Category: General

An earthquake is a natural disaster that can have an impact on the environment or on the community itself. However, do you already know the causes of earthquakes? So, on this occasion, we will discuss about earthquakes, from the definition to the causes.

Definition of Earthquake

An earthquake is a vibration that occurs in the earth due to the movement of tectonic plates. Earthquakes can occur on the surface of the earth or inside the earth. When an earthquake occurs, the movement of tectonic plates can cause faults or cracks in the ground, which can result in landslides or damage to building structures. Earthquakes can also cause tsunamis if they occur at sea.

According to experts, an earthquake is a vibration that occurs in the earth due to the movement of tectonic plates. Earthquakes can occur on the surface of the earth or inside the earth and can cause damage to building structures and other natural disasters. In addition, experts also state that earthquakes can occur suddenly and can have varying intensities, depending on factors such as the depth of the earthquake source, the type and condition of the tectonic plates, and the geological conditions in the affected area.

A seismograph is a tool used to detect and measure earthquakes. John Milne was an English geologist known for inventing the seismograph, an instrument used to detect the earth’s vibrations. He was born in 1850 in Liverpool, England, and spent most of his life in Japan, where he developed seismograph technology and helped study earthquakes. He died in 1913.

He found a way to measure ground vibrations using a device called a casing galvanometer. The casing consists of a freely movable ball in a ring mounted on a shaft. This ball will move in the same direction as the ground vibrations, so it can help us measure the intensity of an earthquake.

A seismograph is a tool used to detect earthquake vibrations and record the amplitude and frequency of these vibrations. A seismograph consists of two main parts, namely a seismic sensor and a recorder. The seismic sensor is part of the seismograph that captures earthquake vibrations and converts them into electrical signals. The electrical signal is then forwarded to the recorder, which is part of the seismograph whose function is to record the electrical signal.

The history of earthquakes dates back to ancient times and has caused tremendous damage and destruction throughout human history. The first recorded earthquake in history was one that occurred in Egypt in 1375 BC. This earthquake is mentioned in a hieroglyphic in the Pyramid of Saqqara, which shows that this earthquake caused extensive damage throughout Egypt.

The largest earthquake ever to have occurred was the Valdivia earthquake which occurred in Chile on May 22, 1960. This earthquake had a magnitude of 9.5 on the Richter scale, which is the largest magnitude ever recorded in history.

The largest earthquake that has occurred in modern times after the invention of seismographs is the Valdivia earthquake that occurred in Chile on May 22, 1960. This earthquake had a magnitude of 9.5 on the Richter scale, which is the largest magnitude ever recorded in history.

In addition, this earthquake caused extensive damage throughout Chile, and also generated a tsunami that spread throughout the region around the Pacific Ocean. As a result of this earthquake, more than 1,655 people died, and hundreds of thousands of others were injured or lost their homes. This earthquake also had a global effect, with most countries around the world feeling the tremors it caused.

Meanwhile, the largest earthquake that ever occurred in Indonesia was the earthquake that occurred in Aceh on December 26, 2004. This earthquake had a magnitude of 9.1 on the Richter scale, and is one of the largest earthquakes ever recorded in history. This earthquake caused widespread damage throughout the Aceh region, and also generated a tsunami that spread throughout the area around the Indian Ocean.

As a result of this earthquake, more than 230,000 people died, and hundreds of thousands of others were injured or lost their homes. This earthquake also had a global effect, with most countries around the world feeling the tremors it caused.

Earthquake Types

There are several types of earthquakes, including tectonic earthquakes, volcanic earthquakes, volcanic eruption earthquakes, and local tectonic earthquakes. Tectonic earthquakes are caused by the movement of tectonic plates under the earth’s surface, while volcanic earthquakes are caused by volcanic eruptions. Local tectonic earthquakes occur in areas that have low tectonic activity.

1. Tectonic earthquake

Tectonic earthquakes are earthquakes caused by the movement of tectonic plates beneath the Earth’s surface. These earthquakes are usually caused by plate tectonic activity, such as when two plates move against each other and collide or separate from each other. Tectonic earthquakes can cause great damage around the area where the earthquake occurred.

2. Volcanic earthquake

Volcanic earthquakes are earthquakes caused by volcanic activity. These earthquakes usually occur near volcanoes or areas that have volcanic activity. In volcanic earthquakes, the movement of magma or lava within the volcano can cause earthquakes. Volcanic earthquakes are usually not as big as tectonic earthquakes, but they can cause damage to buildings around the volcano.

3. Earthquake volcanic eruption

Earthquakes resulting from volcanic eruptions are earthquakes that occur due to movements from within the earth that cause volcanoes to erupt. These earthquakes are usually caused by pressure that accumulates in the magma that is inside the mountain, which eventually erupts and produces an earthquake. Earthquakes resulting from volcanic eruptions are usually very large in strength and can cause extensive damage to buildings and infrastructure around the volcano.

4. Local earthquake

Local earthquakes are earthquakes that are not felt by the people around the place where the earthquake occurred, but can be detected by seismographs. Local earthquakes are usually caused by tectonic activity within the Earth, such as the movement of tectonic plates or faults within the lithosphere. Local earthquakes usually don’t cause major damage, but they can cause vibrations that can be felt by those around them.

Types of earthquakes based on vibration waves

There are several types of earthquakes based on the vibration waves they cause, including:

• P-side earthquake (Primary Wave / Longitudinal Wave) 

This type of earthquake is the first to occur and is characterized by vibrations in the direction of wave propagation. These waves can penetrate rocks and spread at a relatively faster speed compared to other waves. An earthquake is a vibration caused by the transfer of energy that occurs within the Earth. Earthquakes occur when the rocks contained in the Earth experience pressure and tension that are strong enough, causing fractures or cracks to occur in these rocks.

When an earthquake occurs, several types of seismic waves will be created, one of which is the primary wave or what is commonly referred to as the P wave. The P wave is the first wave that occurs when an earthquake occurs. The P wave is a wave that has the fastest speed among other types of seismic waves.

The P wave is also a wave that has a high frequency and has a small amplitude. Because of their fast speed, P waves are usually the first to reach a seismograph station and can be used to determine the point of origin of an earthquake.

• S-side earthquake (Secondary Wave / Transverse Wave) 

This type of earthquake is a wave that occurs after the P-side wave. This wave is characterized by vibrations that are opposite to the direction of wave propagation and can only penetrate soft rocks. Its propagation speed is also slower than that of the P-side wave.

An earthquake is a vibration or shaking that occurs in the ground. Earthquakes can be divided into several types, one of which is a secondary earthquake. Secondary earthquakes are vibrations that occur after the main earthquake.

Secondary earthquakes can occur due to pressure concentrated on the lower part of the earth’s surface, which causes the upper part of the earth’s surface to move or vibrate. Secondary earthquakes can also occur due to changes in pressure in the ground due to the main earthquake.

• L-side earthquake (Surface Wave / Longitudinal Wave)  

This type of earthquake is a wave that can only spread on the surface of the earth. These waves are characterized by rapid up-and-down motions and can cause considerable damage to the area they affect.

The speed of propagation is also slower than the P-side and S-side waves. Earthquake surface wave is a type of earthquake wave that moves on the surface of the earth. Surface wave earthquakes occur when earthquake waves pass through rock layers beneath the earth’s surface, and propagate to the earth’s surface.

Surface waves usually have a lower frequency than other earthquake waves, so they can give a longer and stronger vibration. Surface wave earthquakes can affect large areas and can cause damage to building structures.

All of these types of earthquakes can occur simultaneously when an earthquake occurs. However, the types of earthquakes that occur most frequently are S-side and S-side earthquakes, while L-side earthquakes are rare.

Causes of Earthquakes

The main cause of earthquakes is plate tectonic movement. These plates can move slowly or suddenly, causing earthquakes when the Earth’s surface shifts. This movement can occur on the surface of the earth or in the ground, and can cause damage to building structures and soil. There are also several other factors that can cause earthquakes, such as volcanic activity, mining, and changes in water pressure in the ground.

There are several main causes of earthquakes, namely:

1. Earthquakes can occur when the pressure and friction between tectonic plates increases to the point where the rocks beneath the earth’s surface can no longer withstand the pressure, resulting in faults or cracks in the rocks.
2. Earthquakes can also occur when magma pressure inside the earth increases, resulting in the discharge of magma to the earth’s surface through cracks that occur in the rocks beneath the earth’s surface.
3. Earthquakes can also occur when there is volcanic activity, such as a volcanic eruption or the dumping of lava.
4. Earthquakes can also occur when tectonic plates move rapidly, such as when tectonic plates collide or slide over one another.
5. Earthquakes can also occur due to human activities, such as when mining is too deep or the construction of buildings or bridges that are too large can affect the structure of the earth below.

Things to Do During an Earthquake 

Here are some things you can do when an earthquake occurs:

1. If you are at home, immediately take cover under a sturdy table or chair or behind a solid wall. Avoid standing near windows or wide tables, as these objects could fall and cause injury.
2. If you are outside, walk immediately into an open area and avoid standing near tall buildings or tall trees.
3. If you are in a vehicle, stop immediately in a safe place and avoid standing near tall buildings or tall trees.
4. Avoid using the elevator during an earthquake, as it can get stuck between floors.
5. If you are near the beach, avoid standing near the beach and walk quickly to a safe place, because an earthquake can cause a tsunami.
6. After the earthquake is over, immediately check the condition of your house and immediately evacuate if necessary. If there is a fire or open gas, immediately call the fire department.

Conclusion

An earthquake is a geological event caused by tectonic movements within the Earth. Earthquakes occur when the Earth’s crust shifts or there is a change in pressure inside the Earth, which causes strong vibrations. These vibrations can be felt on the surface of the Earth, and can cause damage and destruction in the areas they affect.

Earthquakes can occur anywhere on Earth, but they usually occur in areas of high tectonic activity, such as along continental plates or around the ring of fire (most earthquakes occur around the ring of fire). namely Indonesia.

Well, Sinaumed’s, our article about the understanding of earthquakes has been completed, after knowing what earthquakes are both in general and the opinions of experts to the causes of earthquakes.

Sinaumed’s friends starting to have awareness to guard against disasters resulting from tectonic earthquakes? sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits, participates in providing knowledge and information, therefore sinaumedia presents books that can add to the knowledge and information that readers need.

If sinaumedia friends are interested and want to learn more about tectonic earthquakes and other natural phenomena, then sinaumedia.com is ready to accompany and fill your reading with books available at sinaumedia. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Mutual

Reference:

• https://news.detik.com/berita/d-5919242/gempa-tektonik-serba-serbi-dan-pembebab-terjadinya?single=1
• https://bpbd.ntbprov.go.id/pages/gempa-bumi
• https://www.kompas.com/tren/read/2021/03/21/162900965/profil-penemu-seismograf–john-milne?page=all
• https://www.merdeka.com/events/earthquake-large-selong-history-indonesia.html

Characteristics of Advertising by Type – Advertising is a form of promotion or introduction of products, services or services delivered through certain media. Usually, advertising has the goal of attracting many people so that they are interested in buying the products or using the services we provide. So advertisers must use persuasive word choices and language. Among the characteristics of advertising are using the right choice of words, interesting, and easy to understand. In addition, advertisements must also show the advantages of the product or service to be advertised. So that the hope can influence the target consumers to buy these products.

Meanwhile, advertisements also have certain elements in them, such as product names, persuasive words, and images. In addition, some elements of true advertising also include interest, attention, trust, desire, and action. Of course, advertisements can be found in various media, from newspapers, television, the internet, to the streets. In fact, there are indeed many types of advertisements that can be used, ranging from commercial and non-commercial advertisements. The division of these types of advertisements can also be done based on the content and nature of the advertisement itself.

Definition of advertisement

Advertising is a promotional activity that aims to sell or inform products or services to the target audience. It is one of the oldest forms of marketing that seeks to influence consumers to buy, sell and do something specific. Using customized messaging, ads can be small or general niche or target audiences.

In addition, advertising also includes a message form of a business promotion strategy for a service or product that uses certain media, depending on the target market or niche market. Usually, advertisements are made so that the audience is interested and encouraged to buy the products or use the services offered. One of the success factors for advertising a product depends on the method or type of advertisement used. Therefore, before you advertise a product, you need to understand the characteristics of the ad and also its type.

Ad Types

The following are several types of advertising that you need to understand so that you can adjust them to the target market and also the types of products that you will offer.

1. Types of Ads Based on Content

The following are several types of advertisements based on the content in them, namely:

a. Offer Advertisement

This type of advertising has the goal of promoting a product or service to the public so that they are interested in buying and using it. For example, such as shoes, clothes, bags, and others. As for services, such as motorcycle taxis, consulting services, translation services, and others.

b. Public service announcements

This type of advertisement usually comes from an institution, community, or agency. Where this ad has the aim of educating the public about something, such as the dangers of drugs, danger, smoking, and others.

c. Announcement

This type of announcement advertisement usually contains an appeal to the public and is usually inviting. For example, competition advertisements, event advertisements, and others.

d. Request Ads

This type of advertisement is usually made at the request of agencies, individuals, or institutions that want information to be published and known to many people. For example, such as job advertisements and others.

2. Types of Ads Based on the Media

Below are several types of advertisements that are differentiated based on the media used to display them, including:

a. Electronic Advertisement

Electronic advertising is a type of advertisement that is delivered through electronic media, for example radio advertisements that focus on audio and television advertisements that focus on video and audio quality.

b. Print media

Print media is a type of advertisement that is printed and then distributed to the public. This advertisement can be in the form of flyers, newspapers, brochures, and others.

3. Types of Ads Based on Purpose

The following are several types of advertisements based on the purpose of their display, including:

a. Commercial Ads

Commercial advertising is a type of advertisement that is made with the aim of increasing sales conversions in order to obtain profit opportunities or large economic profits. This type of commercial advertising is divided into three, namely:

– Consumer advertising: this type of advertising has the aim of seeking business profits, where the main target of this type of advertising is aimed at end consumers. For the meaning of the end consumer himself, namely the person who last used a product or item advertised.

– Business advertising: this type of advertisement is delivered with the aim and intent of seeking economic profit. The main target is the institution that will distribute or also known as distributors of products so that they reach the hands of end-users.

– Professional advertising: this type of advertising has the aim of seeking business profits. The main target for this type of advertising is professional groups or groups.

b. Non-Commercial Advertising

Non-commercial advertisements have the aim of providing information about something that must be realized and contains persuasion or solicitation as well as educating and providing lessons for the general public. Then for the main purpose of this type of advertising is not only to benefit one party, but also for mutual benefits which are also known as social benefits for all people. It aims to be able to fix something that will have a big impact for the future. The following are examples of non-commercial advertisements that you may have seen.

a. Family planning ads
b. Tree Planting Day advertisement
c. Education Ads

4. Types of Ads Based on the Internet

Advertisements originating from the internet are types of advertisements that fall into the category of online advertising. Ad serving on the internet can be a cost-effective way to attract new customers from various regions. Where we can reach more people at a cost that tends to be affordable. There are lots of customers who research online businesses before they finally decide to buy a product or use the service. A well-made website can attract customers to buy advertised products or services.

There are several ways you can advertise your business online through paid advertising. Then another way to promote your business online is to market it on social media, blogs, or search engines that are frequently visited by your target consumers.

Characteristics of Ads by Type

The following is some information about the characteristics of advertisements by type, including:

1. Features of Commercial Advertising

Even though we have found many commercial advertisements, there are still many people who sometimes still have misunderstandings between advertisements, propaganda and publicity. Even though they both involve general attention, in fact the three things are not the same as one another. Commercial advertising itself has special characteristics in it. In order for you to better understand this discussion, let’s look carefully at the discussion below:

a. Paid Communications

The first feature of commercial advertising is an advertisement that has a paid form of communication and is more dominated by commercial purposes. Usually, a published advertisement is considered more interesting as well as important by the owner of the information. In addition, the advertising sponsor is also classified as not anonymous or can still be identified. Thus, consumers also know the origin of the opinions and claims about the product.

b. Not in the Form of Personal Communication

Commercial advertising has the nature of non-personal communication. Where this type of advertising always has a form of purpose, namely for the general public, not for personal consumption. However, there may now be some patterns of advertising communication that are personalized and feel like something for a particular person. However, this is only a presentation method to attract customer experience.

c. Have a Persuasive Nature

Commercial advertisements are persuasive or inviting. The main target of this advertisement is to be able to increase sales of certain products or services. In order to achieve this goal, commercial advertisements usually have a very persuasive nature so that consumers are sure of the offers in the advertisement. Because, it also often makes this commercial advertisement as one of the benchmarks to ensure that the content created can show the products offered can meet the needs and improve the quality of life of its consumers.

Many methods are used in this type of commercial advertising. Starting from attracting consumers’ emotions, increasing consumer trust by using authority support or providing logical reasons why consumers should buy products or use services in advertisements.

d. Aimed At A Target Audience

This commercial advertisement is intended for the target audience. In the past, advertisements were only broadcast through television or radio broadcasts which could reach a wide audience. At present, more advertisements are served through digital platforms whose reach is not only broad but also segmented.

Every product and service brand must have its own personal buyer that they want to attract. Currently, the focus of an ad on a particular segment is quite effective. Because, because of that, commercial advertisements are more specifically designed to attract the target audience.

2. Characteristics of Print Media Advertising

Even though there are many types of advertisements that we can choose from, the advertisements that we encounter in newspapers have characteristics that are different from other types of advertisements. The following are some of the characteristics of print media advertising, including:

a. Tend to be written using formal language
b. Installation is limited by rows and columns
c. Sentences in advertisements are long and detailed
d. It can be in the form of writing alone or it can also be a combination of writing and pictures
e. Distributed through print media
f. It can only be caught by sight

3. Characteristics of a Good Ad

If you want to start advertising, then you need to know the various characteristics of good advertising. It aims to facilitate the process of making advertisements. To find out the characteristics of a good ad, you can see the explanation below.

a. Informative Ads

Informative are the characteristics of good advertising with everything that provides information about a product to the intended potential customers. It is intended that consumers know the function of the product and the benefits they will get. Or it could be in the form of prices, how to use and other information about the products offered. The hope is that with this information, consumers will understand your product and decide to make a purchase.

b. Communicative

Communicative is the characteristics of a good ad with an action that shows pleasure in talking, working together, and associating with the other person. Therefore, communicative in advertising or delivery of advertisements will greatly affect the responses of potential consumers. Are the ads displayed understandable or difficult to understand. So that potential consumers about the intent of the ad.

c. Using Easy to Understand Language

Language is a feature of good advertising, where the development system is used reciprocally and is formed with sound elements of human speech. This was disclosed in the book Khazanah Antropologi (2009). Therefore, the use of language will affect the correctness of the information conveyed about a product that you offer.

e. Ads Packaged Attractively

The characteristics of good advertising are packaged attractively, because that will greatly influence the buyer’s decision. So the more you make attractive ads, the more satisfied they will be with these ads. Make potential customers feel tempted by your ad and in the end buy the product you are advertising.

f. Have a Persuasive Nature

The characteristics of good advertising are having persuasive sentences as persuasive sentences that are done subtly in order to encourage potential consumers to follow the expectations and desires of potential consumers so that they can be interested in your product up to the purchase stage. Usually, these persuasive sentences are found in print media advertisements in the form of posters, brochures, and others. An advertisement must be made in an interesting, informative, and clear way by using words that are solicitation.

Advertising Purpose

Below are some advertising objectives that you need to understand, namely:

1. Providing Information

Advertising has the aim of providing information to the market about a new product and price changes, explaining product functions or benefits, and building a company image.

2. Persuade

Advertising can shape brand preferences, change a person’s perception, persuade consumers, and invite consumers to buy it right now.

3. Remind

The purpose of further advertising is to keep the company’s brand fresh in consumers’ minds and increase consumer interest in pre-existing brands.

4. Value Added

Advertising will provide added value in the form of innovation, improvement of product or service quality, and changing consumer perceptions. Where effective advertising can change consumer perceptions.

5. Accompanying

The purpose of the existence of advertising is as a companion that provides facilities in the form of efforts from the company in the marketing communication process. So that the company can more quickly achieve the desired target.

Advertising itself is one of the important things in a business. You can use various types of media when you want to advertise, ranging from electronic media, print media, and so on. By using paid promotion services, it is important for you to understand the characteristics of a good and correct ad and the important elements in an ad. So, the costs you incur will not be wasted.

This is an explanation of the characteristics of advertisements, their meaning, and also the purpose of advertisements. Hopefully the explanation above can be a new knowledge, especially for those of you who are building a business and want to start advertising products or services widely.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Characteristics of a Unitary State – When viewed in general, then there are 2 forms of state in this world, namely the unitary state and the union state. A unitary state is a form of a single state whose supreme power resides with the central government. While the union state is a form of country that has several states that play a role in managing their respective household affairs.

Based on Article 1 paragraph 1 of the 1945 Constitution, Indonesia is a unitary state in the form of a republic. As explained above, a unitary state is a form of state in which the highest authority resides in the central government. In other words, the central government holds full sovereignty, both internally and externally. In a unitary state, there is only one constitution, one head of state, one council of ministers or cabinet, and also only one parliament.

Of course, there are many countries that adhere to the form of a unitary state besides Indonesia. Then, what are the characteristics of a unitary state, understanding, and also examples of countries that apply this form of state? We will discuss everything in more detail in this article. So, watch it until it’s finished.

Definition of the Unitary State

A unitary state is a form of state in which the supreme power is in the hands of the central government. Hierarchically, a unitary state is a form of a single-stranded state. This means that there are no countries within a single country. This unitary state is often referred to as a unitary state. Where the central government becomes the highest authority in the form of unity. Meanwhile, local governments will only carry out instructions from the center. In this unitary state, they can also implement a centralized system or a decentralized system.

In a centralized system, the central government is responsible for taking care of all domestic problems in all regions without exception. That way, local governments only need to carry out instructions and orders from the central government.

Meanwhile, in a decentralized system, the central government will give each region the rights and authority to manage its own household affairs. The granting of rights to each region is known as regional autonomy. So that each local government must take care of affairs in their respective regions.

The examples of countries that apply the form of a unitary state are Indonesia, France, Japan, Thailand, Egypt, Laos, Vietnam, Denmark, Portugal, the Netherlands, Italy, Sweden, and so on.

Features of the Unitary State

Below are some explanations about the characteristics of a unitary state that you need to understand more deeply, including:

1. Consists of One Head of State

The first characteristic of a unitary state is that it only consists of one head of state. That means, in a unitary state, they will only be led by a head of state. Usually the head of state is the president or prime minister who organizes the central government.

2. Consists of a Council of Ministers and a House of Representatives

Then the next characteristic of a unitary state is that it only consists of a council of ministers or a cabinet and a people’s representative council or parliament. There is no more stacked cabinet or parliamentary compositions, because there is only one council of ministers and also the DPR at the central level.

3. Consists of a Constitutional Law

In a unitary state, there is only one constitution as the basic constitution of the country nationally. This is very different from a union state where each state can have its own different laws, depending on the government in each state.

4. The Supreme Authority is in the Hands of the Central Government

Government power can be held and controlled by the central government. Where the local government will only carry out all the policies and provisions of the central government. In addition, the central government can also grant regional autonomy rights to each regional government. However, the ultimate authority remains in the hands of the central government.

5. State Sovereignty Includes Inward and Outward Sovereignty

State sovereignty that exists within a unitary state includes internal sovereignty as well as external sovereignty. This has also been signed by the central government, which means that the central government holds sovereignty both internally and externally within a country.

6. Can Embrace Centralized and Decentralized Systems

The system that exists within a unitary state can be a centralized system and a decentralized system. In a centralized system, all issues and problems will be regulated directly by the central government. Meanwhile, for a decentralized system, the central government will give authority to each region to manage their own household affairs.

7. Using One National Policy

In a unitary state, the central government will only use one policy to address various problems faced at the national level. For example, such as economic, political, socio-cultural, and security and defense issues.

8. There Is No Country Within A Country

The next characteristic of a unitary state is that there is no state within a state. That means, there is only one free and sovereign country that covers all regions and areas in that country. This is very different from the united states which have several states within one country.

That is a discussion of the characteristics of a unitary state. This unitary state is one of the countries whose supreme power is in the hands of the central government and has the concept of the absence of a state within a state. In the next material, we will discuss the advantages of the unitary state form compared to other forms of government:

The Advantages of the Unitary State

All over the world, there are hundreds of officially registered countries. According to the United Nations, there are around 195 sovereign states registered as members. This number does not include dependent countries and countries that are part of the territories of other countries. There are hundreds of countries that have different forms of government, such as union states and unitary states.

The example of a united state is the United States and the example of a unitary state is Indonesia. So, what are the advantages of a unitary state compared to other forms of government? Let’s see the explanation below:

According to the book entitled The Unitary State in Theoretical Discourse by Dr. Ni’matul Huda, SH., M.Hum (2021:6), according to Fred Isjwara, a unitary state is the most solid form of state, when compared to a federal or confederation. Within a unitary state, there is both unity and unity. When viewed in terms of its composition, a unitary state is not a country composed of several countries, but only a single state.

From the explanation above, we can conclude that according to one expert, the unitary state form is the most solid compared to other forms of state. Not only that, there are other reasons that make the unitary state superior to other forms of state. These reasons include:

1. The government can be more responsible for all development carried out throughout the country. So that the results of the development can be more evenly distributed and uniform.
2. Existing rules will be the same in all regions. So that the law that is enforced will be fairer for every citizen. In addition, the same rules can also increase unity among citizens.
3. With a unitary state system, decisions can be taken more quickly.
4. A country that has an area that is not too large would be good if it adopted the form of a unitary state.
5. The country will become more stable because various races, ethnicities, groups, religions, and also gender will be more likely to work together in government.
6. Funds that are in the center of government can be saved more because they don’t have to support the government in the regions.

Example of a unitary state other than Indonesia

Apart from Indonesia, below are several countries in the world that adhere to a unitary state system, including:

1. Japan

Japan itself adheres to the form or system of a unitary state. In fact, this cherry country was included in the nomination for the best unified state in the world. Japan has an emperor who has the same authority as the president, namely as head of state. While the prime minister’s role is to hold the mandate to run the government.

2. Italy

Countries in the European region are also in the form of republics and unitary states. While the system of government adopted by Italy is parliamentary. There is a president who serves as head of state. Then there is also the prime minister who acts as head of government.

3. Greece

Greece has a prime minister who is authorized to run the country and is elected on the recommendation of parliament. In that case, the constitution in Greece is single and made to regulate all state, national and religious life. The Greek constitution upholds a religious norm that frees all citizens to have an official religion.

4. The Netherlands

The head of state in the Netherlands is led by a king. However, the power of the King will be limited by its symbolic function. While the head of the Dutch government is held by the prime minister. Then for the constitution which is the guideline for the government and also the people of the Netherlands is referred to as the Dutch constitution.

5. Vietnamese

Vietnam adheres to a one-party system that has a thick communist stream. The name of the government party known by the State of Vietnam is DCSVN or Dang Cong san Viet Nam. It is DCSVN that has the highest authority and influence in the country. The Vietnam Constitution is a product of DCSVN. So that the government in it carries out their duties and must submit to this constitution.

6. East Timor

Timor Leste is a country that adheres to a semi-presidential republic system of government. The government arrangement is headed by a president and a prime minister. In this case, the president acts as the head of state, while the prime minister has the authority to head the government.

This is an explanation of the characteristics of a unitary state, understanding, and several examples of countries implementing a unitary state system. Hope it is useful.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Characteristics and examples of explanatory text – In Indonesian class 8 lessons, it will definitely be explained what an explanatory text is. Yes, it turns out that this lesson will also be studied again in grade 11.

So when Sinaumed’s has entered the 11th grade, then it’s time to recall the material that was given before.

If you want to learn more, Sinaumed’s can also read sinaumedia’s book entitled Indonesian Class VIII or get it via the link below.

In short, an explanatory text is a text that explains the process of something happening, for example, a text about the process of a flood. So, to understand more about the characteristics and examples of explanatory text, see the following article until it’s finished.

As mentioned above, explanatory text is a text that explains the process of something happening. More precisely, an explanatory text is a text that contains answers to the questions ‘why’ and ‘how’ to the occurrence of natural, social, cultural, scientific, and other events.

All events around us, not only natural phenomena, of course, have their respective causes and effects. This causal relationship will then be explained through an explanatory text.

The main purpose of an explanatory text is to provide detailed and of course accurate information about the occurrence of a phenomenon or event. This detailed information will be explained according to the special structure of explanatory text.
This structure is the difference between explanatory text and other types of text, as well as making it easier for the reader to understand every detail of the information on the topic being discussed. Apart from that, you can also recognize it through the characteristics that only explanatory text has.

Features of Explanatory Text

If you find a long text, of course there must be characteristics to identify whether the text is an explanatory text or not. Because each text has its own type, so there are special characteristics to recognize it. The following are the characteristics of explanatory text.

1. Factual Information

The information contained in it is a fact or actually happened and is generally factual. That is, the incident is true, not fabricated, or written based on the author’s opinion.

2. Scientific

The things contained in the text relate to science and knowledge. So that the various objects discussed can be accounted for scientifically.

3. Is Informative

The content of the explanatory text is information that is informative in nature, which is to be conveyed to the readers. Not persuasive or trying to influence the reader.

4. Focus on General Things

The focus of the contents of the explanatory text is generic or general matters, such as floods, landslides, storms, tsunamis, earthquakes, rain or volcanic eruptions, not human participants. The explanatory text is also explained in easy-to-understand and detailed language.

5. Using Sequence Makers

In explanatory text, the sequence of events or sequence makers will be used. Like the use of the word first, second, third, fourth, and so on.

Explanatory Text Structure

In addition, this structure is also the difference between explanatory text and other types of text. The following is the structure of explanatory text.

1. General Statement

The first structure is a general statement. In this section, we will explain the general description of certain events or incidents that are intended to be discussed. The point is about the process of how a phenomenon can occur.

2. A series or series of explanations

The second structure is the sequence or series of events to be discussed. If the general description has been explained at the beginning, then you will get information about the causes of the incident and also the consequences of the incident in this section. The causes and effects of this can be described in a few paragraphs. This paragraph is also often referred to as a series of explanations.

3. Interpretation

The last structure is interpretation. In explanatory text, this last paragraph contains a review or conclusion of the entire text. Responses and statements related to the phenomena or events discussed can be placed in this closing paragraph.

These three structures must be considered when writing explanatory text. Because the three structures above must always be sequential. With paragraphs that are made coherently according to structure, it will make it easier for the reader to understand the events or phenomena discussed.

You will also find it easier to recognize the type of explanatory text anywhere by memorizing the structure used in the explanatory text.

Language Rules in Explanatory Text

Each particular type of text has different linguistic rules. This is adjusted to the needs of the reader and suitability with the contents of the writing. This language rule is also what makes readers enjoy writing in an easier way. So, here are some of the language features used in making explanatory texts:

1. The first linguistic rule is the focus of explanatory text on general matters, such as earthquakes, landslides, floods, rain, storms, and others.
2. Explanatory text uses many scientific terms or words. Examples include intensity, grade, temperature, molecule, particle, slab, magnitude, drainage, debut, sedimentation, capacity, degradation, and so on.
3. Use more active verbs. Examples are seeping, rising, shifting, expanding, decreasing, moving, mixing, flowing, buzzing, thumping, shaking, making, floating, and so on.
4. Use more time and causal conjunctions, such as before, after, after that, then, if, so, first, second, last.
5. Keep using the passive voice. Examples include the words drawn, tidied up, avoided, cut, estimated, detained, torn apart, closed, opened, changed, and so on.
6. It is informative, which means it is used to provide information to the reader regarding the theme being written.

Example of explanatory text

After studying the characteristics and examples of explanatory text, of course it will be easier if you make your own text. Therefore, in the following, some examples of explanatory text will be given.

1. Title: Flood

Floods are certainly a natural phenomenon that is familiar to the people of Indonesia. When the rainfall is so heavy, floods will pool everywhere. Especially in lowland areas that have few water catchments.

These floods are usually sourced from high-intensity rainfall with a long or long duration and in watersheds or watersheds. Even so, flooding can be caused by two things, namely because of nature and humans. Naturally, flooding is caused by erosion, river capacity, geophysical/physiographical influences, tidal influences, or land drainage.

In addition, some of the bad human behavior that causes flooding includes changes in land use, littering, densely populated settlements built on riverbanks, and damage to flood control buildings.

Causes of Floods

Floods can occur naturally due to changes in land use. For example, when erosion occurs, sedimentation enters the river, causing the river’s carrying capacity to decrease.

As a result, rainwater that is abundant and can no longer be accommodated by the river, will stagnate as a flood. Rainwater that falls to the ground will later become run-off on the ground. Then some of it will also seep into the ground, so flooding will also depend on soil conditions.

If a forest that has a very high catchment area is turned into a settlement, the absorption capacity will decrease. Forests that should be able to withstand a large enough surface runoff eventually become resistant to the flow of rainwater, because the houses are standing on it. Finally, the river flow rate also increased.

Flood Due to Social Factors

The cause of more flooding is caused by changes in land use. If a forest located in a river is converted into a residential area, the peak discharge of the river will also increase. The debit can increase from 6 to 20 times, depending on the type of forest and settlement.

Likewise with other changes, namely a significant increase in peak discharge. Such as deforestation, and also environmental degradation. This includes city development full of concrete, paved roads that ignore drainage, catchment areas, and also ignore the intensity of rainwater which can cause flooding.

Garbage that is often disposed of carelessly, especially in the watershed, also makes the river dirty and clogged with garbage. So if water is overflowing, then when water is overflowing, it will spill over into the streets and settlements around it, because the capacity of the river is reduced due to piles of garbage.

This happens a lot in densely populated areas around rivers. So that it greatly inhibits the flow and reduces the capacity of the river. Slum areas in Jakarta are one of the important phenomena that must be considered together.
Not only that, other social phenomena that can cause flooding should also be properly responded to, so that flooding can be prevented by the three heavy rains.

2. Title: Lightning

When it rains heavily, it is not uncommon for lightning accompanied by lightning to strike here and there. Yes, thunder, lightning and lightning are indeed natural phenomena that are often found when it rains.

Usually a black sky will be followed by flashes of light and a thunderous roar accompanied by heavy rain. The difference between the speed of light and time means that the two do not appear together.

The occurrence of lightning

Lightning appears when it rains because of a potential difference between the cloud and the earth or with other clouds. The charge on the cloud occurs because it continues to move regularly. Then as long as it moves, it will interact with other clouds. Therefore, the negative charge will gather on one side (top or bottom), while the positive charge on the other side.

Now, when the charge between the cloud and the earth is large enough, this is when the process of removing negative charge or electrons from the earth to the cloud and vice versa will occur. The medium through which the process passes is air, and an explosion occurs when electrons penetrate the air insulation threshold.

Lightning will indeed occur during the rainy season. Why? Because at this time the air contains more water. So that the insulation power goes down, and more current flows. There are two types of clouds, namely those that are negatively charged and positively charged, so lightning can also occur between clouds that have different charges.

3. Title: Lunar Eclipse

One of the beautiful natural phenomena that many people look forward to is the lunar eclipse. Because its appearance is very rare, when a lunar eclipse is about to occur, many people are looking forward to it.

This beautiful view when a lunar eclipse is appearing is what makes some people like it. In fact, it is sunnah for Muslims to carry out the eclipse prayer when it appears.

This eclipse occurs when part or all of the moon’s cross section is covered by the shadow from the earth. This happens when the earth is in a position halfway between the moon and the sun. Where all three are in a straight line.

Therefore, the sun’s rays cannot be received directly by the moon because it is blocked by the earth. Then came the lunar eclipse.

Basically, when an eclipse occurs, the moon can still be seen. This happens because there is still sunlight deflected by the atmosphere towards the moon. Then most of the emitted spectrum is red. That’s why the moon is dark during an eclipse. The color can be brown, red, or orange.

A lunar eclipse will be seen when the moon’s cross section is covered by the earth’s shadow, either partially or completely. Especially when the earth is right between the sun and the moon. The sun’s light that cannot reach the moon makes the moon’s section exposed to the shadow from the earth, so that the phenomenon of a lunar eclipse appears.

4. Title: Landslide

Landslide is a natural phenomenon or event that often occurs in highland areas. Landslide also called ground movement is a geological event that occurs due to ground movement, such as the fall of rocks or large lumps of soil. Landslides occur in various types and types of soil.

In general, there are two factors that cause landslides, namely driving factors and triggering factors. The factors that affect the condition of the material are called driving factors, while the factors that make the material move are called trigger factors.

The main cause of landslides is actually gravity that affects steep slopes. But of course, there are other factors that come into play, such as erosion, soil and rock slopes that are weak due to saturation due to heavy rains, also due to volcanoes, which cause deposits of dust, heavy rains, and flows of dust.

But like other phenomena, of course there are landslides that can also be prevented. For people who are in areas prone to landslides, there are several ways to prevent landslides from occurring.

This can be done by not making ponds or rice fields on the slopes, then not building dwellings around the cliffs, letting the trees around the slopes continue to grow (not being cut down), not building buildings around rivers, and also not cutting the cliffs perpendicularly. .

Those are the characteristics and examples of explanatory text that can be studied. If you want to learn more about explanatory text, check out related books at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products for Sinaumed’s.

Author: Siti Badriyah

Also read:

The Call to Prayer for Muslims – In the Quran, there is the word call to prayer (أذن) in various forms, repeated 9 times. From this repetition 9 times, besides having the meaning of permission, ear, hurting, command, and also means calling.

However, specifically for the following word أذن – يؤذن مؤذن which means call, it is only mentioned once, namely in Surah Yusuf (12): 70. However, the target of the call in the verse is not related to the implementation of prayer, but tells the story of Prophet Yusuf along with his brothers.

Definition of Azan and its meaning

As one of the equivalents of the word adhan (أذن), the word نادى is repeated 53 times in the Al-Quran in its various forms. Of the 53 repetitions, the call to prayer besides having the meaning of a call or call, this word also means a request or a prayer.

If the word is intended for humans, then it has the meaning of a call or exclamation. Meanwhile, if the word is addressed to God, then it can be interpreted as a request or prayer.

In relation to calls or calls to prayer, the Al-Quran does not use the word adhan but uses the words ناديتم (QS al-Maidah 5: 58) and نودي (QS al-Jumu’ah 62: 9). The first word relates to the behavior of the Jews where they ridicule Muslims when they are rushing to the mosque when the call to prayer is echoed. While the word mentioned second is related to the call to prayer which is echoed on Friday as a sign that all activities must be stopped.

Adhan has the meaning of notification, which is a word of exclamation or a call that is intended for notification that the obligatory or fard prayer time will enter. The person who calls the call to prayer is called the muezzin.

While the word iqamah in terms of language means to establish, namely the words used as a sign that the obligatory prayer will begin. For sunnah prayers it is not sunnah to use the call to prayer or iqamah, except for sunnah prayers which are sunnah for congregation.

As well as tarawih prayers, Eid prayers, and so forth. The adhan and also the legal iqamah are sunnah muakkad for fard prayer, whether it is done in congregation or alone. Its implementation is sunnah in a loud voice, standing facing the Qibla.

When viewed in terms of language, the call to prayer has the meaning of announcement, announcement, and notification. As has been in the Al-Quran Surah Al-Kariem, namely:

وَأَذَانٌ مِّنَ اللّهِ وَرَسُولِهِ إِلَى النَّاسِ يَوْمَ الْحَجِّ الأَكْبَرِ أَنَّ اللّهَ بَرِيءٌ مِّنَ الْمُشْرِكِينَ وَرَسُولُهُ فَإِن تُبْتُمْ فَهُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ وَإِن تَوَلَّيْتُمْ فَاعْلَمُواْ أَنَّكُمْ غَيْرُ مُعْجِزِي اللّهِ وَبَشِّرِ الَّذِينَ كَفَرُواْ بِعَذَابٍ أَلِيمٍ) التوبة:٣

Meaning: And (this is) an announcement from Allah and His Messenger to humanity on the day of the grand pilgrimage that Allah and His Messenger are free from the polytheists. Then if you (the polytheists) repent, then repenting is better for you; and if you turn away, know that you cannot weaken Allah. And tell the disbelievers (that they will get) a painful punishment (QS. At-Taubah: 3)

Not only that, the call to prayer also means a call or call. This one meaning was used when Prophet Ibrahim AS was ordered to tell mankind to perform the pilgrimage:

وَأَذِّن فِي النَّاسِ بِالْحَجِّ يَأْتُوكَ ر above

Meaning: And call people to perform Hajj, surely they will come to you on foot, and ride on slender camels that come from all over the far. (QS. Al-Hajj: 27).

If viewed in a shari’a way, the meaning of the call to prayer is a certain word that functions to notify the entry of fard prayer time. In the book Nailul Authar it is stated that the meaning of the call to prayer is an announcement of the time of prayer with a certain lafadz.

The History of the Muslim Call to Prayer

Said a friend named Abdullah bin Zaid, the Prophet Muhammad SAW had a desire to find a way to tell the time of prayer, but he had not yet found that way. In the early days in Medina, Muslims gathered in a mosque to wait for the prayer time.

However, when the prayer time came, no one told him. They will immediately pray alone, without any sign that the prayer time has arrived. It’s as if everyone knows.

As time went on and Islam had begun to develop, many of the Prophet’s companions lived far from the mosque. In fact, some others have increased busyness so that they cannot wait for prayer time at the mosque.

Therefore, some friends gave suggestions to the Prophet Muhammad SAW to make a prayer sign. So that those who live far from the mosque or who have busy lives can pray properly.

The Companions of the Prophet had various suggestions regarding the sign of the start of the prayer time. Some have suggested using bells like the Christians. But there are also those who give suggestions to use trumpets like the Jews.

On the other hand, there is also a suggestion to set off fireworks at a high place. So that Muslims whose homes are far from the mosque can see the sign.

All of these proposals were ultimately rejected. When the condition of the Muslim community was deadlocked and did not find a solution at that time, quoted from Sirah Nabawi (Ibnu Hisham, 2018), there was a friend named Abdullah bin Zaid facing Rasulullah SAW. He told me about himself, who had just dreamed of seeing the call to prayer the night before. In the dream, he was visited by someone wearing a green robe and carrying a bell.

Initially, Abdullah bin Zaid intended to buy the bell that was brought by a person in a green robe. Where he wanted to use the bell to call people to pray. However, this person actually suggested to Abdullah bin Zaid to say a series of sentences that were used as a sign that the time for prayer had arrived.

The series of call to prayer referred to are Allahu Akbar Allahu Akbar, Asyhadu alla ilaha illallah, Asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasulullah, Hayya ‘alash sholah hayya ‘alash sholah, Hayya ‘alal falah hayya ‘alal falah, Allahu Akbar Allahu Akbar, and La ilaha illallah.

Rasulullah SAW then asked Abdullah to teach Bilal bin Rabah about how to recite the sentence. When Bilal bin Rabah made the call to prayer, Umar bin Khattab, who was at his house, heard the call to prayer. He also rushed to the Prophet Muhammad SAW and told him that he also had a dream about something similar to Abdullah bin Zaid. Namely the call to prayer as a marker of the entry of prayer time.

In a history, the Prophet Muhammad is said to have received revelations about the call to prayer. Therefore, he confirmed what Abdullah bin Zaid said. Since then, the call to prayer has officially become a prayer time marker. Meanwhile, according to a more authentic opinion, the call to prayer was first prescribed in the City of Madina in the first year of Hijriyah.

Bilal bin Rabah was the first muezzin in Islam. There are four reasons why Bilal bin Rabah was chosen by the Prophet Muhammad to be the muezzin. The first is because he has a good and loud voice, can live up to the sentences of the call to prayer that are echoed, is highly disciplined, and is courageous.

Since then, Bilal has continued to call to prayer. When the Prophet Muhammad SAW died, he was no longer willing to become a muezzin. The reason is, his tears will definitely fall when he comes to the sentence ‘Asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasulullah’.

So that he can no longer continue the next sentence. However, when Caliph Umar bin Khattab arrived in Jerusalem, Bilal was asked to call to prayer again. Finally, he agreed to the request.

Meanwhile, according to Sheikh Abdullah As-Syarqawi, the Prophet Muhammad once called the call to prayer once. That is when he was on a trip. When it comes to the second creed, the Prophet Muhammad SAW echoed ‘Asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasulullah’. While another history states that the Prophet Muhammad said ‘Asyhadu anni Rasulullah’.

5 Things Muslims Must Do When Hear the Azan

Apart from being a sign of the time when the prayer begins, the call to prayer is also a call from Allah SWT to His servants to carry out His commands by praying five times a day. Muslims will hear the call to prayer five times a day and night.

When hearing the call to prayer, Muslims are ordered to prioritize good manners. The call to prayer echo itself must be used as an alarm for Muslims to pay more attention to the good deeds that must be carried out while listening to it.

The adhan itself is a call to prayer that will always be echoed five times a day. Islam teaches several manners in every action, including hearing the call to prayer. The following are some things to do when you hear the call to prayer, including:

1. Listening With Mindfulness

The first thing to do when the call to prayer resounds is to listen attentively. The Sunnah recommends that when the call to prayer is recited, people, especially Muslims, should listen to it with great attention and repeat every sentence without using their voice. Say the call to prayer shortly after the muezzin recites it.

But when the muezzin says “Hayya ‘ala-Salah” (come to prayer) and “Hayya ‘alal-falah” (reaching success) one listening should say: “La hawla wa la quwwata illa billah” (There is no strength or power except with Allah).

Prophet Muhammad once said:

“When you hear the call to prayer, repeat what the Muezzin said.” (Imam Malik – Al Muwatta)

2. Requesting Blessings for the Prophet SAW

The Prophet Muhammad SAW said:

“When you hear the Muezzin calling for prayer, repeat his words and then ask Allah’s blessings on me, because one who asks Allah’s blessings on me once will be rewarded with ten blessings by Allah.” (Muslim, Book of Prayer, Hadith 384)

The text of the shalawat narrated is:

“Allahumma salli ala Muhammadin wa ali Muhammad, kama sholaita ala Ibrahim wa ala ali Ibrahim innaka Hamidun Majid. Allahumma Barik ala Muhammadin wa aali Muhammadin kama barakta ala Ibrahim wa ala aali Ibrahima innaka Hameedun Majeed.”

It means:

“O God, give your kindness to Muhammad and Muhammad’s family because You have bestowed kindness on Ibrahim and on the family of Abraham, You are Praised, Most Glorious. O Allah, bless Muhammad and Muhammad’s family as You have blessed Ibrahim and Abraham’s family, You are Praised, Glory be to You.” (Al- Bukhari , Book of Acts of the Prophet, Hadith 3370)

3. Pray

The following is a prayer that is recommended for us to read after listening to the call to prayer:

“Allahumma rabba hash-d-kyawati-t-tammati wa-s-Salati-l-qa’imati, and Muhammadanil-wasilata wal-fai’ati (wa-d-Darajata-r-rafi’ati) wa Bath-hammam there is no need for promises (we are together with mi’ad layuhliful).”

It means:

“O Allah, Lord of this most perfect calling, and regarding the soon-to-be-established Prayer, bestow upon Muhammad the favor of nearness (to you) and pre-eminence and place of distinction, and exalt him to the position of exaltation that You have promised him.”

This one prayer has variations, including ‘wa-d-darajat-r-rafiati’ and ‘innaka la tukhliful mi’ad’. Then the addition of “innaka la tukhliful mi’ad”. In the petition it was narrated by Imam Baihaqi in his Sunan and later accepted for action by the scholars as already mentioned by Ibn Abidin in Radd al-Muhtar, who quotes Shdadbulali’s Imdad al-Fattah and Fath al-Qadir from Ibn al-Humam.

Narrated by Jabir bin Abdullah, the Prophet Muhammad SAW said:

“Whoever after hearing the call to prayer says (the prayer given above) then intercession for me will be permitted for him on the Day of Resurrection.” (Sahih Bukhari – Book 11: 588)

Abdullah bin `Amr bin Al-`As narrated, I once heard Rasulullah SAW say:

“When you hear the call to prayer, repeat what the Muezzin said. Then ask Allah to increase my chanting because everyone who does it will receive ten rewards from Allah. Then invoke Allah to grant me Al-Wasilah (mentioned in the prayer above), which is a high rank in Jannah, fit for only one of Allah’s slaves; and i wish that i would be that man. If anyone asks Al-Wasilah for me, it is my duty to intercede for him.” (Sahih Muslim)

4. Answer the call to prayer

“Wa ana ‘asyhadu’ an laa ‘ilaaha’ illallaahu wahdahu laa shareeka lahu wa ‘anna Muhammadan’ abduhu wa Rasulullah, rodhiitu billaahi Rabban, wa bi-Muhammadin Rasulan wabil Islamamidina”

It means:

“And I also testify that there is no god who has the right to be worshiped but Allah, Who has no partner, and that Muhammad is His slave and messenger. I am pleased with Allah as my Lord, with Muhammad (peace be upon him) as my Messenger and with Islam as my religion.”

“…To be read in Arabic after Tasyahud Mu’aththar or words of confirmation of Faith.” (Muslim, Book of Prayer, Hadith 386)

5. Pray between Adhan and Iqamah

In the end, we can ask Allah SWT anything for ourselves and ask for His mercy and guidance, because our requests will be answered. The Prophet Muhammad SAW said:

“Repeat the Muezzin’s words and when you are done, ask Allah what you want and you will get it” (Abu Dawud, Book of Prayer, Hadith 524)

Dawud’s “Book of Prayer”: Book 2: Hadith 521) narrated by Anas bin Malik:

“A request made between the call to prayer and the iqamah is not rejected”

From the explanation above, here are some summaries of what we should do after hearing the call to prayer:

1. Must focus on listening to the call to prayer
2. Repeat whatever the muezzin says except for hayya alas-shalah and hayya-ala-falah. Instead say la hawla wala quwwata illa billah .
3. After finishing the call to prayer, send blessings on the Prophet Muhammad SAW
4. Then say the wasilah prayer
5. Pray between adhan and iqamah

Book Recommendations Regarding Adhan

1. The Power of Adhan

 

 

2. Thoroughly Peel the Azan and Iqamat

 

 

3. Seconds before the Maghrib call to prayer

 

 

This is a review of the call to prayer for Muslims that Sinaumed’s needs to know. You can get books related to adhan at sinaumedia.com. As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

The ear itself is divided into two parts, namely the outer ear and the inner ear. In this inner ear has a function that is quite crucial, namely for hearing. This is because the inner ear is where sound waves are converted into electrical signals or nerve impulses. This allows the brain to hear and also understand sound.

Not only that, the inner ear also has a role in regulating balance. To understand it more deeply, let’s see the full explanation below.

Functions of the Inner Ear

There are two main functions possessed by the inner ear, namely helping to hear and also maintaining balance. Although each part of the inner ear is integrated with each other, the three work separately. The following is a complete explanation of the function of the inner ear, including:

1. Hearing Sounds

This part, which is similar to a snail’s shell, will work together with the outer and middle ear to help hear sounds. The cochlea which is filled with fluid and has a smaller and more sensitive structure is called the organ of Corti. Corti here acts like a microphone on the body, where this organ contains 4 rows of tiny hairs that will pick up vibrations from sound waves.

There are several steps that must be taken from the outer ear to the inner ear so that a person can hear sound, here are the explanations.

• The outer ear acts like a funnel, sending sound into the ear canal from the outside world.
• Sound waves will then travel down the ear canal to the eardrum in the middle ear.
• Then, sound waves make the eardrum vibrate and move the 3 small bones in the middle ear.
• Movement of the ear causes pressure waves that move fluid in the cochlea.
• Then, the movement of fluid in the inner ear causes the tiny hairs in the cochlea to bend and move.
• The hairs dance in the cochlea so that it converts the motion of sound waves into electrical signals.
• Electrical signals will be sent to the brain through the auditory nerve and then produce sound.

2. Maintain Balance

The part of the ear that regulates balance is the vestibule and also the semicircular canals. These semicircular canals are also filled with fluid and are also lined with fine hairs like those in the cochlea. The hair acts like a sensor that helps maintain body balance.

The channels sit perpendicular to each other to help measure every movement a person makes. When the head moves, the fluid in the semicircular canals will shift. The liquid then moves the tiny hairs in it when moved. The canal is connected by the saccule and utricle to sense movement.

The movement and balance sensors will then send electrical nerve messages to the brain. In turn, the brain will tell the body how to stay balanced. When we are on a rollercoaster or boat that moves up and down, the fluid in the inner ear may need to stop moving for a while. That is the reason why we may feel dizzy for a while after being in an imbalanced plane.

Inner Ear Anatomy

The inner ear is at the end of the ear tube. It is located in a small cavity like a slot in the skull on both sides of the head. There are three main parts of the inner ear, including:

1. Cochlea

This is the area of ​​the inner ear that looks like a small, spiral-shaped snail shell.

2. Semicircular canals

This is a semicircular canal or what is called the Semicircular Canal which functions to feel balance and posture.

3. Vestibules

This is the part of the vestibule that is between the cochlea and the semicircular canal.

Outer Ear Anatomy

This outer ear structure is formed from the auricle or auricle and also the external auditory canal or ear canal. The auricle is formed by elastic cartilage which is attached to the oblique skin.

This section serves to capture sound and also localize sound. In addition, the auricle also forms a depression called the concha and the edges are called helices. The structure of the auricle itself consists of:

• helix,
• antihelix,
• triangular fossa,
• scaphoid fossa,
• scapha,
• tragus,
• antitragus
• and lobules.

The ear canal or ear canal is formed by cartilage and also the temporal bone. The size itself is about 4 cm from the outer ear to the tympanic membrane or what is commonly called the eardrum. The arch serves to prevent foreign objects from reaching our eardrums.

In addition to these structures, there are several sensory nerves in the outer ear, such as the auricular, facial, vagus, occipital nerves, and trigeminal nerves. The trigeminal, vagus, and facial nerves are part of the cranial nerves that directly connect to the brain.

Meanwhile, the auricular and occipital nerves are components of the spinal nerves. If there is a problem in the outer ear, ear problems can occur. For example, otitis externa or what is often called swimmer’s ear.

Middle Ear Anatomy

The function of the middle ear is to transmit sound that has been collected by the auricle to the inner ear. But before being sent, according to Kids Health, the part will convert sound waves into vibrations. The middle ear extends from the outer ear margin to the tympanic membrane.

In this section, there are three bones that are connected and will send sound waves to the inside of the ear. The three bones are called ossicles which consist of:

• malleus (hammer),
• incus (anvil), and
• stapes (stirrup).

Apart from these three bones, the anatomy of the middle ear consists of two main structures, namely the tympanic membrane and also the eustachian tube.

1. Tympanic membrane

The tympanic membrane, also known as the eardrum, is shaped like a flat cone and is also semi-transparent, which separates the outer ear from the middle ear. In this section attached to the ring of bone in the ear canal.

Then, in the center of the cone or hollow point it is called the umbo. Meanwhile, the part of the membrane that surrounds the umbo consists of two different parts, which are called the pars flaccida and also the pars tensa. There are three sensory nerves in the tympanic membrane, including:

• auriculotemporal nerve,
• intermedius nerve, and
• auricular branch of the vagus nerve.

2. Eustachian tube

The eustachian tube is the part of the ear that connects the middle ear to the upper esophagus and nose. Its function is to equalize pressure in the middle ear. Balanced pressure is needed for proper transfer of sound waves.

On the other hand, several medical conditions can occur if there is a problem in the middle ear. The following are some disorders that may occur in the ear that affect the middle ear.

• Otitis media.
• The eardrum ruptures.
• Barotrauma.
• Myringitis.

How Can Someone Hear?

From the anatomy of the ear discussed above, we have learned about the structures that make up the ear, namely the outer, middle and inner ear. The three parts become sound channels from outside to enter and are translated by the brain. Reporting from Stanford Children’s Health , the hearing process will start from the outer ear which captures sounds in the form of vibrations or waves that are around us.

Then, the sound will be lowered into the ear canal, so that it will put pressure or a blow on the eardrum or tympanic membrane. When the eardrum vibrates, the vibrations are transmitted to the ossicles, so that the vibrations are amplified and sent to the inner ear.

Once the vibrations have reached the inner ear, the vibrations will be converted into electrical impulses and sent to the auditory nerve in the brain. Then the brain will translate these impulses as sound.

After knowing the anatomy of the ear, of course we understand that the ear does not only function as a hearing aid, but also functions to maintain balance. It allows us to walk, run, jump, and more without falling.

Causes of Damage and Disease in the Ears

Hearing ability is often not given proper attention. Many people are not aware that the process of hearing is actually a complicated process and can easily be lost due to an injury or disease in the ear. In fact, millions of people around the world suffer from some degree of deafness. Hearing loss usually occurs suddenly or gradually compared to those who are deaf from birth.

Sound itself is a vibration that arises from a source and then moves through the air. The process of changing sound so that it can be understood by the brain is called hearing. This hearing process occurs only when all components of the ear function normally. Damage to one or more components can cause a reduction to the loss of a person’s ability to hear.

One of the causes of hearing loss is ear injury resulting from loud noises, sudden blows, pressure, or the entry of foreign objects into the ear. It is important to remember that the components in the ear are very sensitive and also prone to damage.

The eardrum, also known as the tympanic membrane, is a thin tissue that sits between the outer and middle ear. Rupture or perforation of the eardrum is a common hearing loss that occurs due to too much noise, pressure, and the entry of foreign objects.

These disturbances can also result in ear infections that need to be treated immediately. If left alone, ear infections can spread to the inner ear and cause even more damage. The infection can even spread to the brain and damage nerves and other tissues, although this is rare. Other types of ear infections include vestibular neuritis and swimmer’s ear.

In addition, certain diseases can also damage the ear. Some of them are cholesteatoma, otosclerosis, Meniere’s disease, acoustic neuroma, and herpes zoster otitis. Otosclerosis usually attacks the middle ear and interferes with the function of the small bones. Where the disease can spread to the inner ear and result in a condition called permanent sensorineural hearing loss.

Meanwhile, cholesteatoma or a condition characterized by the growth of skin cells in the middle ear can destroy or interfere with the middle and inner ear. So it can cause hearing loss. If not treated immediately, this condition can result in severe ear damage.

Then, there is also Meniere’s disease which occurs when the fluid in the inner ear is not balanced. So that it causes ringing in the ears and excessive pressure. This condition must be treated immediately with appropriate treatment because it can cause total deafness.

In general conditions, otitis snakepox only attacks the facial nerve, but it is possible that the infection also attacks the nerves in the inner ear. Sufferers can experience hearing loss and also even hear foreign voices.

There is another ear disease called acoustic neuroma, which is a tumor that grows in the inner ear and brain. The growth of these tumors is usually very slow and benign, so the tumor is not cancerous.

However, if the tumor continues to grow, then the part of the ear around it will experience damage and various types of symptoms, ranging from vertigo and also loss of hearing. This tumor must be removed through surgery, but this action will only be carried out considering the patient’s age and also the size of the tumor in the patient’s ear.

Main Symptoms of Damage and Disease of the Ears

Besides having the main function as the sense of hearing, the ear also has a function as a means of balancing the body. Therefore, a person who has suffered from an injury or disease that can damage his ear, may experience dizziness or vertigo and nausea to a certain degree. Other symptoms may include deformed outer ear, fever, blocked ear canal, facial paralysis, and a foul-smelling ear discharge.

How to Overcome Ear Diseases

If you experience ear problems, then the best solution is to go to an ENT doctor. Because, this ENT doctor will help to treat various problems in the ear. Consult with an ENT specialist, be sure to start with a brief conversation about the symptoms of the disease, the severity, when the disease started, and also the drugs the patient has been taking to treat the disease.

After that, the doctor will examine the condition of the ear that is affected by the disease or is experiencing interference to find out any signs of infection. In addition, the eardrum will also be examined to find out if there is a hole in the eardrum.

After that, the patient’s hearing ability will be tested using a simple tuning fork. In some cases, the ENT doctor will refer the patient to an audiologist for more precise results.

After the ENT doctor knows the condition of the patient’s ear, the doctor will provide all available treatment options. The options are ear drops, oral medication, or surgery, depending on the condition of the ear and the severity.

This is an explanation of the anatomy of the inner, outer, middle ear, as well as an explanation of various ear diseases and how to treat them. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about the anatomy of the inner ear, you can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Umm

source:

• https://www.docdoc.com/id/info/condition/damage-to-ears-and-ears-disease
• https://www.halodoc.com/artikel/know-function-and-anatomy-ear-section-in

Nature of Convex Lens Shadows – Lenses are one of the important items in human life, both lenses used for aesthetics and lenses used to assist research. There are also lenses that have various types depending on the need or purpose of using the lens. One type of lens that is quite popular and familiar is a convex lens.

A convex lens is a type of lens that is thicker in the center than at the edges, either a convex lens or a concave lens is a type of thin lens based on its surface. The lens itself can be interpreted as transparent glass that has a curved surface.

The surface of the lens can produce different refractive effects. So, so that Sinaumed’s can study material related to convex lenses further, here’s an explanation of the meaning of a convex lens and the nature of the image of a convex lens.

Definition of Convex Lens

The lens is a clear object bounded by two refractive planes. A convex or convex lens is a type of lens that is thicker in the middle than at the edges.

You could say that a convex lens has a bulging center. Convex lenses generally have a circular shape and are made of glass or plastic, so a convex lens has a higher index of refraction than air.

A convex lens is also known as a positive lens. A convex lens has the property of being able to gather light, so a convex lens is also known as a converging lens. If there is a beam of light parallel to the main axis and the light hits the surface of the lens, then the light beam will be refracted through one point.

From the picture above, it can be seen that the refracted rays gather at a single focal point which is behind the lens. Unlike a mirror which has only one focal point, a lens generally has two focal points.

The focus point is the meeting point of the refractive rays and is referred to as the main focus or F1, also known as the active focus. Because in a convex lens the refractive rays gather behind the lens, the location of the F1 is behind the lens. Meanwhile, the passive focus point or F2 is symmetrical with F1. for a convex lens, the location of F2 is in front of the lens.

Types of Convex Lenses

Based on the shape of the curved surface, convex lenses are divided into three, namely biconvex lenses, convex planes and convex-concave lenses. Here’s an explanation.

1. Biconvex convex lens (double convex lens)

A type of biconvex convex lens is a lens that has two convex surfaces.

2. Convex plan convex lens (flat convex lens)

A convex lens has one convex surface and one flat surface. This type of convex lens with two surfaces is called a convex plane convex lens.

3. Concave convex lens

The third type of convex lens is a convex lens which has one convex surface and the other is concave. However, the convex surface tends to be more dominant than the concave surface.

So that Sinaumed’s can better understand what a convex lens is, consider the image below.

A convex lens has 7 main parts, among which are the following:

1. The main axis, namely the line A to B, is a line perpendicular to the lens.
2. The optical center, O, is also known as the vertex point. The vertex point is a meeting point between the main axis and the lens.
3. The focal point or focal point, which is in front of the F1 is the dkus which is in front of the convex lens.
4. The focal point or focal point, behind F2 is the focus behind the convex lens.
5. Points O to F are referred to as the focal length of a convex lens.
6. The 2F point is called the center of curvature of a convex lens.
7. Points O to 2F are also known as the radius of curvature on a convex lens.

From the explanation regarding the definition of a convex lens above, it can be concluded that a convex lens has three characteristics, namely: a) the center is thicker than the edges, b) has the property of gathering light or converging properties, c) has a positive focus value, So the convex lens is also known as a positive lens.

Properties of a convex lens

Convex lenses have several properties that differentiate them from other types of lenses. The following is an explanation of the properties of a convex lens:

1. In a convex lens, light can come from two directions, so a convex lens has two focal points. The front convex lens is where the light comes from while the rear convex lens is where the light is refracted.
2. If there are three rays coming in parallel, then directed at a convex lens, then the rays from these rays will be refracted by the lens and intersect or go to a point. The focus point on the front of the convex lens is called the virtual focus point or passive focus with the symbol F2, while the focus point on the back of the convex lens is called the true focus point or active focus point with the symbol F1.
3. Convex lenses have the property of gathering or converging. Because the light that comes through a convex lens is always refracted towards one point or collects light, a convex lens is called a converging lens or collecting lens.
4. The focal length of the convex lens is always positive, because the intersection or destination of the refractive rays is always at the back of the convex lens, so the focus of the convex lens is a true focus.
5. The amount of light refraction in a convex lens is affected by the refractive index of the lens material and the curvature of the lens surface. Meanwhile, the index of refraction depends on how fast or slow the light is in the lens.
6. A convex lens with a thicker size can produce a greater refraction of light as well, compared to a convex lens with a thinner thickness. In addition, a thick convex lens also produces a shorter lens focal length, compared to a thin convex lens.

Properties of the Image of a Convex Lens

After knowing the properties of a convex lens, here’s an explanation of the nature of the image from a convex lens.

1. The object is between points O and F

• A’B’ = Virtual image is in front of the lens

• F1 = Focus is behind the lens
• F2 = Focus is in front of the lens

The nature of the image above is virtual, upright and magnified.

2. The object is between points F2 and 2F2

The image of object A’B’ is real, inverted and magnified.

3. The object is between point F2 to ~

A’B”s image is inverted, real and diminished.

From the three pictures above, if the object is between points O and F, then the nature of the image is upright, full and magnified. Meanwhile, if the object is between points F and 2F, then the nature of the image is inverted, real and magnified.

• If S = F the image is upright, virtual and infinite.
• If S = 2 F the image has real, inverted and the same size.
• If S > 2F, the image is inverted, real and diminished
• Shadow magnified |s′| > s, the image is reduced if |s′| < s. (caption= |–5| = 5 or |5| = 5).

4. The object is at the focal point F

Objects that are at the focal point or F, objects at the focal point (s = f), images that are easy to observe have upright, virtual and magnified properties.

5. Objects are at 2F (s= 2F)

Objects that are at 2 F (s= 2F) have real, inverted and equal image properties. Objects that are at 2F2, the image of 2F1 has real, inverted and the same size.

From the five pictures above, it can be concluded as follows:

• All virtual images formed by a convex lens are always perpendicular to the object.
• All real images formed by a convex lens will be inverted on the object.

Special Rays of Convex Lenses

There are three special rays that a convex lens has, here are the three special rays:

• Rays coming parallel to the principal axis will be refracted through the focal point (F) behind the lens.
• The incoming light goes to the focal point in front of the lens (F2), it will be refracted parallel to the main axis.
• Rays coming through the center of the optical lens (O) will be forwarded and not refracted.

Convex Lens Formula

There are several formulas that can be used for convex lenses, here are the explanations:

1. Formulas for object distance, image and focus from a convex lens

The formula for object distance, image and focus or focal point of a convex lens can be written using the following mathematical equation:

1/s + 1/s’ = 1/1

Information:

• s = object distance (m or cm)
• s’= distance from the image (m or cm)
• f= distance from focus (m or cm)

Notes:

If s’ has a positive value, then the image behind the lens is real. Meanwhile, if s’ has a negative value, then the image in front of the lens is virtual.

2. The formula for the height or magnification of the image on a convex lens

The formula for the height or magnification of the image in a convex lens can be written using the following mathematical equation:

h’/h = |s’|/ |s| = M

Information :

• h’= shadow height (m or cm)
• h=height of the object (m or cm)
• s’= height of the shadow (m or cm)
• s=height of the object (m or cm)
• M = magnification of the image

3. The formula for the radius of curvature and index of refraction for a convex lens

The formula for the radius of curvature and refractive index of a convex lens can be written using the following mathematical equation:

1/F = (n2/n1 – 1) (1/R1 + 1/R2)

Information :

• F = focal length (m or cm)
• n1 = index of refraction around the convex lens
• n2 = index of refraction of the lens
• R1 = radius of curvature that is in front of the lens
• R2 = radius of curvature that is behind the lens

4. Formula for the power of a convex lens

The formula that can be used to calculate the power of a convex lens can be written using the following mathematical equation:

P = 1/F

Information :

P = power on a convex lens or diopters

It is important to note that the following is the convention for the sign of a convex lens:

• F convex lens always has a positive value
• + s for the real object to be in front of the lens
• – s for virtual objects is behind the lens
• +s’ for the real image is behind the lens
• -s’ for the virtual image is in front of the lens
• +M for an upright shadow
• -M for an inverted shadow

The Benefits of Convex Lenses in Everyday Life

A convex lens has the function of being able to focus on the incoming light beam. So that light entering through the front surface will be refracted at one point by the back surface of the convex lens.

Then, in everyday life, convex lenses are often used by humans in various kinds of equipment and technology. Here are some examples of the use of convex lenses in everyday life:

1. Lup or magnifying glass

A loupe is an optical instrument whose function is to see small objects so that they appear larger. This tool is a fairly simple tool, because it only consists of a convex lens and a support or frame if needed.

A watchmaker is someone who most often uses a lup or magnifying glass. By using a lup, small parts of the movement will appear larger and clearer.

2. Microscope

The nature of the convex lens is that it can make the image bigger, so the nature of the convex lens is used in a microscope. In a microscope, there are two convex lenses used, namely the lens facing the object or objective and the lens facing the eyepiece.

A convex lens that is placed opposite the object has the function of forming a real and inverted image, while a convex lens that is close to the eye has the function of forming an upright, virtual and magnified image.

3. Camera

The camera is one of the items that are familiar to use today, the camera can be used because it utilizes a convex lens, so that it forms a real, inverted and reduced image. Shadows in the photo must be at a distance of more than 2F and F is the focus of the lens. The convex lens on the camera is placed in a row so that it can produce photos or videos.

4. Binoculars

Binoculars are a tool used to see objects that are far away. Binoculars can be used because they use two convex lenses, just like a microscope.

The two convex lenses used are lenses that are placed facing the object or objective and lenses that are placed facing the eye or eyepiece.

The convex lens that is directly opposite the object or objective has the function of gathering light, while the convex lens that is facing the eye has the function of magnifying the image.

5. Glasses

Convex lenses in glasses are used specifically for people with nearsightedness or hypermetropia. People with hypermetropia cannot see objects clearly, because the image of the object falls behind the retina.

Therefore, the way to overcome it is to use glasses made of convex lenses. The convex lens has the function of adjusting the image of objects close to the eye, so that it falls on the retina.

That is an explanation of the image of a convex lens and its general characteristics. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you. Sinaumed’s who want to deepen other Physics material, can get more information by reading books.

Sources of Islamic law – In Islam, there are several sources of law that can be used as guidelines in living this life. However, some Muslims may not know the source of Islamic law other than the Koran. On this occasion, we will discuss more deeply about the sources of Islamic law. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Understanding the Sources of Islamic Law

The source of law is not only owned by a country. But in religious life, especially in Islam, there is also a source of law that has been used by all Muslims. The existence of sources of Islamic law is used as a guide or reference for Muslims when living their lives in this world.

It is undeniable that in life on earth, there are always problems that arise, be it problems in religion or in social life. Therefore, when this problem arises, a source of Islamic law is needed that can be used as a basis or guide for Muslims.

The scholars have mutually agreed that there are four sources of Islamic law that have been used by Muslims. Among them are the Koran which is the holy book of Islam, then hadith, ijma, and finally qiyas. As Muslims it would be better if you know and understand the four sources of Islamic law. To find out a more complete explanation related to sources of Islamic law, the following is summarized through various sources.

Sources of Islamic Law

In Islam there are four sources of law in Islam. Here’s the explanation:

1. The Koran

Al-Qur’an is the revelation of Allah which was revealed to Prophet Muhammad Shallallahu Alaihi Wasallam as the greatest and greatest miracle, through the Angel Gabriel in a mutawatir way as a guide for all mankind, and is a reward for those who read it.

Definition of Al-Quran According to Experts

According to experts, the definition of the Qur’an is as follows.

1. Muhammad A. Summa (1997)

Al-Qur’an is a holy book that contains very clear rules regarding human life, both in terms of outwardly and inwardly.

2. Abu Faiz (2014)

According to him, some of the virtues that will be obtained by lovers of the Qur’an include, obtaining enormous rewards, always being with the noble angels, erasing sins and vices, cleansing the heart and calming the soul.

3. Muhammad Ali ash-Shabumi

The definition of the Qur’an is the noblest word of Allah SWT and revealed by the Prophet Muhammad through the intermediary of the angel Gabriel, which was written in the form of mushafs and delivered mutawatir.

4. Sheikh Muhammad Khudari Beik

The Qur’an is the word of Allah SWT which was revealed to the Prophet Muhammad SAW for all mankind whose contents must be understood and practiced, by way of or conveying to mutawatir, which is written with the beginning of the letter Al-Fatihah and ending with the letter of An-Nas.

5.Dr. Subhi as-Salih

The Qur’an is the word of Allah SWT which is the greatest miracle of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, written in the form of a mushaf and narrated in a mutawatir way (gradually), and for those who read it is worship and is a reward.

6. Al-Qur’an in Language (Etymology)

In terms of language or etymology, the term Al-Qur’an comes from Arabic, which is a plural (many) of masdar fi’il, namely qara’a -yaqra’u-qur’anan which means “reading” or more simply “something to read over and over again”.

7. The Qur’an in Terminology

In the view of Islam, the Qur’an is the holy book of someone who adheres to Islam which in its form contains the word (kalam) of Allah SWT which was revealed by the Prophet Muhammad SAW as a miracle, delivered in mutawatir ways and for those who read it is Worship.

From the understanding of the Qur’an according to the experts above, it can be said that every person, society, especially Muslims must always or always maintain, disseminate and apply knowledge about the Qur’an. The reason is because the Qur’an is the most perfect word of Allah SWT. Al-Quran is kalamullah, or the sentence of Allah SWT and comes from the side of Allah SWT.

Allah SWT said,

“Alif laam raa, (this is) a book whose verses are neatly arranged and explained in detail, which was revealed from (Allah) the All-Wise, All-Knowing.” ( QS. Hud: 1 ).

The existence of the Koran is not only a holy book for Islam. But it is also used as the main or most important source of Islamic law. As it is known that the Koran contains holy verses which are life guidelines for Muslims. These verses are not just read, but also try to be applied in everyday life.

The Qur’an was revealed to the Prophet Muhammad through the intermediary of the angel Gabriel. The Koran in Arabic is the word of Allah SWT which can never be made by humans to be its equal. Therefore, the Koran is used as the main source of Islamic law than the others. As the word of Allah SWT stated in the letter Al-Isra verse 88, Allah SWT says:

قُلْ لَّىِٕنِ اجْتَمَعَتِ الْاِنْسُ وَالْجِنُّ عَلٰٓى اَنْ يَّأْتُوْا بِمِثْلِ هٰذَا الْقُرْاٰنِ لَا يَأْتُوْنَ بِمِثْلِهٖ وَلَوْ كَانَ بَعْضُهُمْ لِبَعْضٍ ظَهِيْرًا

Meaning: “Say, Verily, if humans and jinns come together to make something similar (to) this Al-Quran, they will not be able to make something similar to it, even if they help each other.”

As a source of Islamic law, there are several things that are conveyed in detail in the Al-Quran and some are conveyed in general. For example, related to worship which is explained in detail. As for the other problems are not explained in detail. Therefore, another source of Islamic law is needed as a support so that later the Al-Quran can be applied in everyday life, as well as being a guide when a problem arises.

2. Hadith

The second source of Islamic law is hadith. It is through this hadith that will provide further explanation of what is stated in the Al-Quran. Hadith is one of the 4 sources of Islamic law agreed upon by the scholars. Hadith is a reference for Muslims to explain the laws contained in the Al-Quran.

Quoted from the book Understanding Hadith Science by Asep Herdi, etymologically hadith is interpreted as Jadid, qorib, and khabar. Jadid is the opposite of qadim which means new. While qarib means close, which has not happened in a long time. Meanwhile, khabar means news, which is something that is discussed and transferred from one person to another.

While the meaning of hadith in terminology is the words, deeds, and approval of the Prophet Muhammad.

Meanwhile, in language, hadith means sayings, conversations, speaking. The definition of hadith is categorized into three, namely the words of the prophet (qauliyah) , the deeds of the prophet (fi’liyah) , and all the circumstances of the prophet (ahwaliyah) . Some scholars, such as at-Thiby, are of the opinion that hadith complements the words, deeds and interpretations of the prophet. The hadith also complements the words, deeds, and interpretations of the Companions and Tabi’in.

Basically, Al-Quran and hadith cannot be separated, but complement each other. Therefore, both of them have been a guideline for society, especially Muslims. If Muslims use the Al-Quran as a source of Islamic law and it turns out that they still have not found a clear point on a problem, then the hadith will become the next guideline after the Al-Quran. So, the hadith can be said to be the second source of Islamic law after the Al-Quran.

The following is the word of Allah SWT which explains to always obey the Messenger of Allah as stated in the letter Ali Imran verse 32 which reads:

قُلْ اَطِيْعُوا اللّٰهَ وَالرَّسُوْلَ ۚ فَاِنْ تَوَلَّوْا فَاِنَّ اللّٰهَ لَا يُحِبُّ الْكٰفِرِيْنَ

Meaning: “Say (Muhammad), “Obey Allah and the Messenger. If you turn away, know that Allah does not like the disbelievers . “

The position of the hadith is as reinforcement and providing information when the explanation is not stated in the Al-Quran. What is conveyed in the hadith is the law that has been established by the Prophet Muhammad SAW which is a guide from Allah SWT and can also be the result of ijtihad.

Hadith Function

There are 4 kinds of hadith functions for the Al Quran which are determined by Atsar scholars, as follows:

1. Bayan at-Taqrir

Bayan at-Taqrir is also known as bayan at-Ta’kid and bayan at-Isbat . In this case, the hadith functions to establish and strengthen what has been explained in the Al-Quran.

2. Bayan at-Tafsir

The function of the hadith as bayan at-tafsir is to provide details and interpretations of mujmal (vague or unknowable) verses of the Koran, to provide conditions for verses that are still absolute, and to provide special determination of verses that are still common.

3. Bayan at-Tasyri

Bayan at-Tasyri is embodying a law or teaching that is not found in the Al-Quran. This function is also called bayan zaid ala al-Kitab al-karim.

4. Bayan an-Nasakh

In language, an-naskh has various meanings, including al ibthal (cancel), al ijarah (eliminate), at tahwil (move) stay at taghyir (change). As for what is called bayan an nasakh , there is a syara’ argument (which can abolish existing provisions) due to the arrival of the next argument.

According to the majority of scholars, the position of hadith occupies the second position after the Al-Quran. In terms of wurud or tsubut, the Qur’an is qath’i (certain) while the hadiths are zhanni al wurud (relative) except for those with mutawatir (consecutive) status.

3. Ijma

Ijma comes from the Arabic إِجْمَاعٌ ijmā which means consensus. This term comes from the word أَجْمَعَ ajma’a which means to agree. This word is rooted from جَمَعَ jama’a which means to collect or combine. According to KBBI, the meaning of Ijma is conformity of opinion (agreement) from the scholars regarding a matter or event. Etymologically, the notion of ijma has two meanings. First, Ijma means determination to do something or decide to do something. Second, Ijma means agreement.

The definition of Ijma is the agreement of the scholars in establishing a law in religion based on the Qur’an and Hadith in a case that occurs. Ijma is a joint decision made by the scholars by means of ijtihad which is then negotiated and agreed upon and the result of ijma is a fatwa.

The definition of Ijma is part of Islamic law. In Islam, the Qur’an and hadith are the legal basis used. The scholars use the Al-Qur’an and hadith as the basis for establishing Ijma. The meaning of Ijma is important to understand when studying Islamic law. In language, ijma is collecting problems after which they are given a law on these problems and then they are believed.

Meanwhile, according to the term, ijma is an agreement of opinion from all ijtihad experts after Rasulullah Muhammad SAW died. The position of this ijma is as the third source of Islamic law after the Al-Quran and hadith. So, Ijma is one way of establishing a law that is not found in the Qur’an and hadith.

At first, this ijma was carried out by caliphs and state officials. From the deliberations that they have carried out, then the results will be considered as representative of the opinions of Muslims.

As time went by, more and more deliberations were held. Mainly followed by ijtihad experts and continued to this day. Ijma itself is divided into two, namely ijma sharih and ijma sukuti.

Ijma sharih or lafzhi is an agreement of the mujtahids which is carried out through opinions or from actions against a certain case law. For ijma sharih, this is relatively rare.

Whereas ijma sukuti is an agreement from the scholars through a mujtahid who has expressed his opinion regarding the law of a case. After that the opinion of the mujtahid spread and many people knew about it. In this case, other mujtahids did not express disagreement with that opinion after conducting research or research on that opinion.

The determination of Ijma is still based on the Al-Qur’an and hadith. Based on the understanding of Ijma, it can be said that Ijma comes from the Ijtihad of the scholars. In addition, Ijma is a tool for interpreting law according to Islamic law and as a form of tolerance towards different traditions in Islam.

According to the terms of ushul fiqh experts, the meaning of Ijma is an agreement on a matter of syara’ law at an event. This agreement was carried out by the Muslim mujtahids at a certain time after the death of the Prophet Muhammad.

Understanding Ijma According to Experts

The following is the meaning of Ijma according to the scholars:

Imam Al-Ghazali

Ijma is an agreement of the people of Muhammad specifically on a religious matter.

Imam al-Amidi

Ijma is the agreement of a number of ahlul hall wa al ‘aqd (experts who are competent to take care of the people) from the people of Muhammad at one time over the law of a case.

Abd al Wahhab Khallaf

Ijma is the consensus of all Muslim mujtahids at a time after the Prophet’s death on a sharia law regarding a case.

4. Qiyas

Interpretation of the Qur’an

The last source of Islamic law is qiyas . Qiyas itself in language is the act of measuring something which is then named. Meanwhile, in terms, qiyas is the determination of law on an act for which there were no provisions at that time and then based on existing provisions.

In general, this qiyas is divided into three. There is qiyas illat which is divided into other types, namely qiyas jali and qiyas khafi . Then the second is qiyas dalalah, and the third is qiyas shabah.

Pillars of Qiyas

Quoted from the book Usul Fiqh by Amrullah Hayatudin, qiyas consists of four pillars and several requirements that must be met. Are as follows:

1. Ash

Ashl is an old case that already has legal provisions in both texts and ijma . Ashl is often referred to as musyabbah bih or its likeness and maqis ‘alaih or place to perform qiyas -kan. In a simple sense, ashl is a case that will be used as a measure or comparison.

There are several conditions that must be met asl to be made qiyas . Ashl must have a fixed law. These legal provisions must be based on the path of sam’isyar’i not aqli . This path is also used to find out illat on ashal. In addition, legal provisions on ashal must not be based on qiyas, but because of texts or ijma. Ashl is also not allowed to go outside the rules of qiyas.

2. Far’u

Far’u is a case that will be investigated or equated with cases that already have laws. Several conditions make far’u stipulated in qiyas , among others , far’u does not yet have a law established based on texts or ijma, must find illat ashl in far’u with perfect levels and must not be less than the level of illat found in ashl.

3. Ash’s Law

Ashl law is syara law established by the texts and it is desired to determine the law against far’u .

4. Illat

In language, illat can be interpreted as proof or reason. Illat became the cornerstone in ashl law . In another sense, illat is also called the benefit that syara pays attention to. This illat is one of the considerations in performing qiyas .

So, in living this life, Muslims must follow the things that can be done and things that are not allowed to be done in the Al-Quran. This is because the Koran is the highest source of Islamic law.

Sinaumed’s can learn more about the sources of Islamic law by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Also read:

12 cranial nerves – Humans, who are living things, have the characteristic of moving, starting from moving the upper limbs to the lower limbs. Every limb that is moved by humans originates from brain commands. With orders from the brain, the limbs will run according to their function. For example, when the brain orders the members to see, the eye parts of the body will move.

Therefore, it can be said that the brain is the center of all activities carried out by humans every day. If the brain does not function properly, there will be several limbs that cannot be moved optimally. In addition, because the brain is the most important part for moving the limbs, the brain is protected by strong skull bones.

The human brain weighs approximately 1,400 grams or 1.4 kg. The human brain is composed of many neurons or approximately 100 billion neurons in the brain. Each brain neuron has 1,000 to 10,000 synaptic connections with nerve cells in the rest of the body.

The tissue in the brain can be said to have a rubbery consistency and is located inside the skull bone. The size of the skull bones in humans will get bigger as the humans themselves get older. In other words, the more mature humans are, the larger the size of the skull bones will be.

Every tissue in the brain is also protected by several protectors. In this case, the protective tissue of the brain, such as the scalp, lining of the brain, hair, cerebrospinal fluid, and skull. Each protective brain tissue is still divided into several more parts.

The brain which is a very important part of the body because it can move the limbs to the maximum indicates that the brain has nerves that are connected to the other members of the body. Each of these nerves has its own function.

Of the many nerves connected to the brain, one of them is the cranial nerves which consist of 12 pairs. The 12 cranial nerves are a nervous system that has a very important function. For more details, we will discuss the 12 cranial nerves and their functions and locations. So, consider the following reviews, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Cranial Nerves

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), cranial nerves are the nerves that connect the brain to other organs of the body, totaling 12 pairs, having the function of carrying information from the five senses to the brain.

Cranial nerves or also known as cranial nerves are nerves that are located at the bottom of the brain and play a very important role in the nervous system, why is it important? Because this cranial nerve is connected to the sensory organs, head organs, organs in the neck, chest organs, muscles, without having to go through the spinal cord. Therefore, these cranial nerves can send sensory and motor signals to all parts of the body directly.

With the sensory information to the mouth, nose, ears and eyes through the cranial nerves, it allows humans to carry out activities, such as feeling, smelling, hearing and seeing. In addition, the movements of the limbs that are passed by the cranial nerves allow humans to carry out daily activities, such as the nose to smell something, the mouth to eat or talk, and so on.

Not only that, cranial nerves also have other functions in the form of being able to receive various kinds of motor and sensory information. In fact, cranial nerves can help control various internal organs, such as the lungs and heart.

The cranial nerves themselves originate from two parts of the brain, namely the cerebrum and the brainstem. 10 cranial nerves are in the brainstem, while the other two nerves are in the cerebrum. In the brainstem, these cranial nerves can be seen in certain areas, such as the pons, midbrain, or medulla. However, cranial nerves may also be seen at the junction of each of these divisions.

As previously explained that the cranial nerves consist of 12 pairs, so in the following discussion, we will discuss the function and location of the 12 cranial nerves.

12 Cranial Nerves and Their Functions and Locations

Quoted from a book entitled Neurosurgery, Edition V by Prof. Dr. dr. satyanegara. Sp.BS, here are the 12 cranial nerves and their functions and locations.

1. Olfactory (Cranial 1)

The olfactory nerve is the first cranial nerve. The olfactory nerve is related to or related to human activity on aroma, or more precisely, with the olfactory system or sense of smell. So, the olfactory nerve functions to smell certain odors or aromas. In addition, the olfactory nerve is one of the cranial nerves located in the big brain (cerebrum).

The way the olfactory nerve works starts when a person smells an aroma or smell from the nose, such as the smell of food, the smell of garbage, and so on. Then, after that, the olfactory nerve or olfactory nerve will work to send the smell or aroma information to the brain. After arriving at the brain it will be identified, what smell is this, so that humans can recognize the aroma or smell.

However, for some people, they may experience obstacles in smelling certain odors or odors or also known as anosmia. Anosmia itself can occur due to several things, such as a person experiencing flu, colds, smoking habits, sinusitis, and so on.

If someone experiences anosmia, it can interfere with their health because it will be difficult to smell food, so that their appetite is lost. Therefore, it’s best if you experience disturbances in smell, you should immediately see a doctor so you can get even better treatment.

2. Optics (Cranial II)

The optic nerve is the nerve associated with the sense of sight. Therefore, this optic nerve has a sensory function related to the eye or human activity in seeing. The location of the optic nerve lies in the organs of the eye, such as the cornea, pupil, anterior chamber, vitreous body, and so on. With the optic nerve, humans can tell what they are seeing.

The optic nerve works starting from the entry of light from the front of the eye or the cornea which then continues to the eye lens. After the light is processed by the cornea and lens, the light will enter the back of the eye, namely the retina. It is from these retinal cells that they absorb incoming light and then convert the light into electrochemical impulses. After that, it will continue again to the optic nerve and then get to the brain.

In simple terms, the function of the optic nerve is to transmit stimulus information in the form of light to the brain, where this information will be brought to the brain to be identified, what object is being seen or what color is being seen at the moment. Therefore, it can be said that the way the eye works when viewed at a glance is almost the same as how the camera works.

3. Oculomotor (Cranial III)

The third cranial nerve is the oculomotor nerve. The location of the oculomotor nerve is at the front of the midbrain. Then, this nerve moves to the eye socket, so that the oculomotor nerve can move the muscles in the eye.

The oculomotor nerve has a motor function in the form of helping eye movement. In this case, the eye movement in question is the eye moves in the specified direction and the eye blinks. So, it can be said that the human eye can move because of the function of the oculomotor nerve. In fact, the oculomotor nerve also helps the eye focus on an object it sees.

In addition, the oculomotor nerve also functions to help the eye control the pupil against incoming light. With the oculomotor nerve, the pupil can respond to incoming light, so that the eye does not receive excessive light.

4. Trochlear (Cranial IV)

The trochlear nerve is a cranial nerve that has a motor function that is almost the same as the oculomotor nerve, which is to move the eye muscles. However, in the tochlear nerve, the eye muscle that will be moved is the superior oblique muscle. With the trochlear nerve moving the superior oblique muscle, the moving part of the eye is the bottom. In addition, the trochlear nerve also functions to make the eyes bulge and return to normal.

In addition, the trochlear nerve can also move forward up to the eye socket. This trochlear nerve lies ventral to the periaqueductal gray matter and lies directly beneath the oculomotor nerve nucleus complex at the level of the lower colloculi.

5. Trigeminal (Cranial V)

The trigeminal nerve is located on the side of the face. In addition, the trigeminal nerve is further divided into three parts, namely the ophthalmic, maxillary, and mandibular. The three parts have different functions, such as the ophthalmic function of providing sensory information from the scalp, upper eyelids, and forehead. The maxilla has the function of providing sensory information from the cheeks, nasal cavities, lower eyelids, and upper lip. The mandible has the function of providing sensory and motor information starting from the lower lip, jaw, chin, and tongue.

The trigeminal nerve is a cranial nerve that has motor and sensory functions. In this case, the sensory function of the trigeminal nerve, such as being able to feel touch or sensation on the face, upper neck, and scalp. Meanwhile, the motor function of the trigeminal nerve, such as having a role in controlling every movement of the muscles in the mouth, ears and jaw.

6. Abducens (Cranial VI)

The sixth cranial nerve is the abducens nerve. The abducens nerve is related to motor function in the eye. With the abducens nerve, the human eye can move to look sideways and can move the eye outward. It can also occur because the cranial nerves can control the lateral rectus muscles.

The abducen nerve is located caudal to the pons tegmentum or just below the floor of the fourth ventricle. The abducens nerve can also move toward the lateral rectus muscle, which is located in the eye socket. Judging from how it works, the abducen nerve starts from the pons of the brainstem, then enters the area of ​​Dorello’s canal, then moves through the cavernous sinus, until it reaches the lateral rectus muscle.

7. Facial (Cranial VII)

The next cranial nerve is the facial nerve. The function of the facial nerve is not far from the facial limbs. The facial nerve has functions, such as storing glands that can produce saliva and can secrete tears, providing sensory information from the tongue so that it can feel various kinds of food tastes, and providing motor information to control every muscle movement related to facial expressions or expressions.

The facial nerve is located inside the parotid salivary gland which has left the stilomastoid foramen. This nerve forms several terminal branches at the anterior border of the parotid gland. Each of these branches will move towards the muscles that can move facial expressions.

8. Vestibulocochlear (Cranial VIII)

There are two sensory functions in the vestibulocochlear nerve, namely functions related to balance and functions related to hearing. Therefore, the vestibulocochlear nerve has two parts, namely the vestibular and the cochlea. Vestibular has a function in the form of collecting any information related to the inner ear and related to balance. Meanwhile, the cochlea has the function of detecting any vibrations originating from the tone of voice and volume.

The vestibulocochlear nerve originates laterally from the angle formed between the cerebellum and the pons. Then it will pass through the facial nerve to lead to the internal acoustic meatus on the temporal bone.

9. Glossopharyngeal (Cranial IX)

The glossopharyngeal nerve has the function of providing sensory information from the outer ear to the cavity of the middle ear. In addition, the glossopharyngeal nerve also functions to provide sensory information at the back of the throat and on the back of the tongue. In other words, the main function of the glossopharyngeal nerve is to provide sensory innervation from the oropharynx and the back of the tongue.

The glossopharyngeal nerve originates in the medulla oblongata and travels toward the neck and throat. The role of the glossopharyngeal nerve is related to the gag reflex, so it can be said that the role of the glossopharyngeal nerve is not that important.

10. Vagus Nerve (Cranial X)

The vagus nerve has several functions related to the human internal organs. The function of the vagus nerve, such as controlling every movement of the heart, lungs, to the vocal cords. In addition, the vagus nerve also has the function of controlling the digestive organs, such as the stomach and intestines. The vagus nerve can also help the process of the body’s metabolic hormones by stimulating the endocrine glands.

The vagus nerve is opposite the parasympathetic nerve. The vagus nerve is the longest nerve of the autonomic nervous system in the human body. The length of the vagus nerve starts from the brain to the tongue, then to the heart, and up to the digestive organs.

11. Accessory (Cranial XI)

The accessory nerves are located above the posterior triangle of the neck, such as the trapezius and sternocleidomastoid. This accessory nerve is the eleventh cranial nerve. This nerve is also known as the accessory spinal nerve. This nerve consists of two parts, first the skull, and second, the spine.

The two halves touch each other for a short time before the spinal cord makes a move to send the neck muscles. Meanwhile, on the cranial side, join the vagus nerve.

This nerve has a function in the form of helping the motor nerves of the neck muscles to work. Therefore, this accessory nerve can control every movement that occurs in the neck muscles, so that the neck can move according to our wishes. In addition, the function of the accessory nerves is also related to every muscle in the shoulders, neck and head.

12. Hypoglossus (Cranial XII)

The twelfth or last cranial nerve is the hypoglossal nerve. This nerve originates from the medulla oblongata which then moves towards the jaw until it reaches the tongue. Therefore, this nerve has a fairly important role in moving the tongue and playing a role in swallowing, speaking and chewing food.

This part of the muscles on the tongue can move because of the hypoglossal nerve. If the hypoglossal nerve is disturbed, it will be difficult for the tongue to move or even paralyzed. Paralysis of the tongue usually occurs on one side only.

This is an explanation of the 12 cranial nerves. Hopefully knowing the 12 cranial nerves will make us more confident in protecting every part of our body so that unwanted things don’t happen and can function properly.

Tahallul is – Hajj is one of the pillars of Islam, the fifth pillar of Islam to be exact. That is, the pilgrimage must be performed by Muslims who are able to carry it out. Being able here means being able materially or financially as well as being able physically.

When a Muslim performs the pilgrimage, that person needs to follow a series of pilgrimage processes in accordance with the pillars, so that the pilgrimage is valid.

In the series of pilgrimage processes, there is one stage called tahallu which is carried out by a Muslim at the end of a series of pilgrimage activities and when performing Umrah.

This tahallu stage can only be carried out if the Hajj and Umrah rituals have been completed. Because tahallu is the last series or can also be called the closing of the process of Hajj and Umrah.

What is tahallu? How is it implemented and what is the meaning behind it? Consider the explanation of the following tahalul.

Definition of Tahallul

Tahallul is one of the pillars of Hajj that must be fulfilled by a Muslim who is performing Hajj. Tahallul is carried out not only for someone who performs Hajj, but also for someone who performs Umrah.

According to the book Teaching the Study of Fiqh written by Adila Septiana and Firman Setiawan, tahallul literally means to be permissible or to be lawful. Meanwhile, according to the term syara’, tahallu means the release or permissibility of someone from the prohibition of ihram.

According to the science of jurisprudence, the word tahallu means leaving the state of ihram, because one has performed the pilgrimage completely or partially. The completion of the pilgrimage series is marked by cutting or shaving several strands of hair, at least three strands of hair are cut for tahalul.

Meanwhile, according to Jumhur Ulama other than Syafi’iyah, tahallul is obligatory to be implemented and according to ulema Syafi’iyah tahallul is the pillars of Hajj. According to the opinion of other scholars, tahallu is release, liberation, halal and forgiveness which is marked by cutting or shaving some hair and at least three strands.

The legal basis of tahallul as Allah says which means, “Surely you still enter the Grand Mosque (at the appointed time) in a safe condition and perfect your worship by shaving your head and if not, then you can cut a little of his hair.” (Surah Al Fath verse 27)

In accordance with this argument, verse 27 of Al-Fath explains that the background or ins and outs of the law of tahallul began when the Prophet Muhammad and his companions entered Mecca when Mecca was safe, without any fear of bad treatment previously carried out by people polytheist.

The Meaning of Tahallul, Not Just a Hair Cut

Shaving or tahalul is one of the processes of the pilgrimage which is very important and should not be abandoned, especially for Muslims who adhere to the Shafi’i school of thought.

Even though this shave seems trivial, if it is abandoned then someone who performs the pilgrimage needs to repeat his pilgrimage in the next year, because the pilgrimage he performs is considered invalid. So that means, tahallu is a process that must be carried out so that the pilgrimage is valid.

Then, why do things that are considered trivial actually have big consequences if they are not done? This is certainly a sign that tahallu actually has a greater meaning than just shaving. In addition, this tahallu order is a sign that the brain and the advantages possessed by humans are all in the power of Allah.

By making tahallu obligatory in the series of Hajj and Umrah, Allah actually wants to teach people that even though humans are perfectly created creatures, they are only humans.

Humans need to realize that forever they are creatures and servants of God. Humans need to be solemn, humble or humble and khudhu’. These three attitudes will lead humans to become creatures that are loved by God.

On the other hand, hair is a symbol of a human crown. Hair is a person’s jewelry and a symbol of good looks and valor. Bertahalul or shaving the hair is a symbol that someone is willing to put down his crown.

That is, the person will be willing to let go of the pride that makes him feel very proud compared to other people. Hair loss during tahallul becomes a symbol of someone’s arrogance and arrogance which also falls out and makes that person feel inferior.

In accordance with the intricacies or theorem, it can be interpreted that tahallu is a symbol so that someone who implements it can be free from all the anxiety, fear and discomfort that exists in his life.

Meanwhile, Quraish Shihab is of the opinion that tahallul is a process that can be interpreted as a human being who is asked to cut or shave all his past disgrace.

Humans are asked to open a new page of their lives and to better adapt their actions or behavior to the demands that have been blessed by Allah. Tahallul can also be interpreted as a symbol or an attempt to cleanse oneself and remove dirty ways of thinking.

Kinds of Tahallul

In general, tahllul is divided into two types, namely tahallul umroh and tahallul haji. The following is an explanation of the various types of tahallu.

1. Tahallul Umrah

Tahallul umroh is a series of processes that are carried out when someone performs the pilgrimage. If a congregation has completed the whole process of the pilgrimage series, they are obliged to cut or shave a few strands of their hair.

Tahallul Umrah is a sign that the ban has fallen on the Umrah pilgrims who were carried out during the Umrah pilgrimage and are allowed to carry out activities that were previously prohibited while on Umrah.

2. Tahallul Hajj

The second tahallul is the tahallul haji which is carried out when someone performs the pilgrimage. In the tahallul haji, there are two types of tahalul, namely the initial and final tahallul. The following is an explanation of the Hajj tahallul.

a. Tahallul Ashghar or Tahallul Awal

Tahallul ashghar or initial tahllul is tahllul or shaving which is carried out in the first stage and is marked by the elimination of some of the prohibitions for the pilgrims.

Initial tahallul can be carried out in two of three ways, namely by shaving, thawaf ifadhah and throwing the jumrah aqabah on 10 Dzulhijjah.

If you have carried out these three practices, then all the prohibitions in ihram have been permissible, except for carrying out jima’ or husband and wife relations and things that encourage them to do these actions, for example such as touching with lust and kissing.

The procedure for carrying out the initial tahalul is by shaving or by cutting the hair which is done earlier when the pilgrims have arrived at Minda after leaving Muzdalifah on 10 Dzulhijjah, then proceed with throwing the jumratul aqabah.

For pilgrims, most of them carry out the initial tahalul in the above way. However, there are also some pilgrims who do the second or third way.

The above method is considered more difficult, because pilgrims must go to Mecca. Meanwhile, the transportation from Mina to Mecca is quite difficult. The second difficulty is that after completing the tahallul at the Grand Mosque, the congregation must immediately return to Mina to stay overnight or die and throw jumroh on the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dzulhijjah.

Pilgrims must arrive at Mina before sunset. Because if he arrives at Mina after sunset then they are obliged to pay the dam.

So that in one day, pilgrims have to go back and forth from Mina to Mecca and vice versa. Even though it has many difficulties in its implementation, the early tahalul in this way has advantages.

The advantage is being able to carry out Eid al-Adha prayers at the Grand Mosque.

b. Tahallul Tsani or Tahallul Akhir

Tahallul tsani, tahallul akbar or final tahallul is carried out if all the processes in the pilgrimage series have been fulfilled. The final tahallul will be reached if the da’aah performs three complete circuits, namely shaving, thawaf ifadhah and stoning the jumrah. By carrying out the final tahallu, then all the prohibitions during ihram have been allowed to return.

There are those who argue that the final tahalul is carried out by throwing jamratul aqabah, tawaf ifadah and doing sai. The final tahallul is carried out after the pilgrims carry out the thawaf and said pilgrimage, after returning to Mecca and completing their ablution at Arofah.

Or after carrying out all the pillars of Hajj, including one obligatory pillar of Hajj, namely by throwing the Jumratul Aqabah. Even if you haven’t thrown three jamrahs and spent the night in Mina, then the entire prohibition of ihram is still lawful.

Those are the two kinds of tahallu. In the book of fiqh, it is explained that the two kinds of tahlul have differences.

According to Syafi’iyah scholars, the difference between the two types of tahallu lies in the procedure for carrying out the tahallu. Here’s the difference between the two.

• First, the initial tahlul has been assessed as carried out if someone has carried out two of the following three things, namely throwing the jumrah aqabah, slaughtering the sacrificial animal and shaving or cutting the hair.
• Second, the second tahalul is considered implemented if it has done the following three things perfectly, namely throwing the jumrah aqabah, shaving or shortening the hair and carrying out the ifadhah thawaf.
• Third, tahallul Akbar is considered to have been carried out if the following three things are done perfectly, namely throwing the jumrah aqabah, shaving or shortening the hair and carrying out the thawaf ifadah after carrying out the sai first.

 

Procedures for Carrying Out Tahallul

For male pilgrims, it is sunnah to shave all hair in a series of tahalul processes. According to the opinion of Shaykh Abu Bakar Syatha in the book I’anatut Talibin, it is explained that the hair of pilgrims other than women is more important if, according to the agreement of the scholars.

As for female pilgrims, it is not recommended to shave off their hair. However, cutting his hair to the tip of the finger only. According to Ibn Qudamah in the book Al Mughni, it is explained that a woman can cut her hair up to the length of her knuckles, that is, only along the ends of the knuckles.

It is recommended for women who are not shaved or shaved. There is no difference of opinion among the scholars about the tahallul procedure for women. Imam Ahmad said that shaving each end of the hair as long as a finger deer.

Whereas Abu Daud argued that he heard Ahmad being asked by a woman about shaving each hair short and he answered by gathering all of his hair in the front which was then cut off at the ends of his hair along the knuckles.

Then what about pilgrims who have cut or shaved their hair completely or are bald? Because tahallu is a pillar of Hajj that cannot be abandoned and cannot be replaced by paying a fidyah or paying a fine according to the Shafi’i school of thought.

The minimum standard for carrying out tahallul is to remove three strands of hair in various ways, either by shaving the hair off, cutting only part of it, pulling the hair or even burning it and so on.

For men or pilgrims who have bald or bald heads before performing the pilgrimage, there is no need to carry out the tahallu process. This means that the Shari’a of shaving or cutting hair as part of the pillars of Hajj or Umrah does not apply.

People who have bald heads do not need to wait until their hair grows to carry out the tahallu process. However, they are still sunnah to carry out tahalul symbolically by using a razor. The trick is to pretend to use a razor on his head like when he was about to shave his hair. This is done to resemble the people who carry out tahalul by shaving off their hair.

According to Imam al-Adzra’i, this sunnah only applies to men, because it is not sunnah for women to shave off the hair on their head.

Syekh Ibn Hajar al Haitami said, which means “a person who carries out ihram and has no hair on his head, either because he was born or has been shaved before or has performed umrah afterwards, it is sunnah for him to use a tool on his head according to the agreement of the scholars. Because it resembles people who are shaving their hair.

Imam al-Adzra’i conveyed that the bahts sunnah applies specifically to male worshippers. Because shaving one’s hair is not prescribed for other than men.” (Sheikh Ibn Hajar al Haitami.)

In addition to using the shaving tool symbolically, it is also sunnah to take or cut off part of the hair of the mustache or beard. This was explained by Sheikh Khatib al-Syarbini.

“It is sunnah to take part of the mustache or beard hair, so that the muhrim or the person who performs ihram takes off part of his hair for the sake of Allah.” (Al-Syarbini: II/269).

So in conclusion, people who are bald or bald do not need to wait for their hair to grow to perform Umrah or Hajj or wait for their hair to grow to carry out tahlul. Because, the law of tahalul is not mandatory for people who have bald heads.

Meanwhile, for men who are not bald, they still have the obligation to carry out tahalul by cutting some of their hair or shaving it. However, it is sunnah to shave off his hair. For female worshipers, it is obligatory to carry out tahalul by cutting part of their hair, at least three strands along the knuckles.

Thus the explanation regarding tahallu is cutting or shaving the head of hair and one of the pillars of Hajj and Umrah that must be carried out and cannot be replaced by paying fidyah.

If Sinaumed’s is interested in learning the pillars of Hajj or Umrah and knows the procedures for carrying out the Hajj and Umrah, then he can find information by reading books. Because books are windows to the world.

Apart from tahallul, Sinaumed’s can also add to their knowledge and open their horizons regarding Hajj and Umrah or other topics by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides a variety of books according to Sinaumed’s’ needs so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

Understanding Semiotic Theory in Linguistic Studies-Every day in carrying out their activities, humans always communicate either at home, at the market, at school, or at their workplace. This is done as a matter of course because indeed one of the abilities that humans have had since ancient times is to communicate through language. Language can be divided into two, namely, verbal and non-verbal language to facilitate their communication activities. In some cases, humans use non-verbal language to be able to understand the intent of the other person or as a notification sign that can be understood in the communication process. When studying language, especially in linguistic studies, it is known that this is a science known for understanding signs, namely, semiotics. In everyday life humans also always intersect with various signs such as, traffic signs, gender-based toilet signs, or understanding sign language as a sign of communication made by people with special needs who are unable to speak verbally. The presence of language through these signs really helps the communication process and can even be studied through studies at universities through linguistic studies. And, in studying linguistics about these signs, we will also understand that signs are not only found in ordinary texts but also in texts in songs, films, etc. The presence of language through these signs really helps the communication process and can even be studied through studies at universities through linguistic studies. And, in studying linguistics about these signs, we will also understand that signs are not only found in ordinary texts but also in texts in songs, films, etc. The presence of language through these signs really helps the communication process and can even be studied through studies at universities through linguistic studies. And, in studying linguistics about these signs, we will also understand that signs are not only found in ordinary texts but also in texts in songs, films, etc.

But do you know about semiotics? What is the definition and how is the explanation of the theory and its benefits in linguistics? If you don’t know, then in this discussion we will discuss the theory of semiotics complete with the views of several experts.

Furthermore, we will discuss this discussion in the review below!

History of Semiotics

Semiotics is developed and widely used in the study of sign systems. Semiotics in relation to this case is an understanding of semiotics that refers to the semiotics of Ferdinand De Saussure and the semiotics of Charles Sanders Peirce, known as the father of modern semiotics, and the Semiotics theory of Roland C. Barthe. Semiotics. Ogden and IA Richard, Semiotics Michael Riffaterre. Ferdinand De Saussure as the father of modern semiotics (1857-1913) divided the relationship between the signifier and the signifier with an agreement called the signifier.

In a literary work, the signifier is seen as a physical form rather than a concept.

At the same time, the signifier is seen as the meaning behind the physical form in the form of value. Meaningful relationships are based on

social conventions about the meaning of signs. The relationship between semiotics and linguistics must be understood according to the nature of the relationship between the two fields, in which Saussure emphasizes the nature of words as signs.

The main object of semiotic research emerged in 1974 at the first semiotic congress in Milan. The following areas were covered at the congress, apart from the basic sciences including the fields of semantics and pragmatics, semiotics and linguistics, and scientific languages, where the topics of general sign theory and scientific theory and strategy were discussed. The largest area of ​​the Congress is literature, which deals with the correct use of method in art and literature. Other areas that have received a lot of attention are architecture, music, visual arts, visual communication and non-verbal communication.

According to Nordo, there are four traditions behind the birth of semiotics, namely semantics, logic, rhetoric and hermeneutics. According to Paul Cobley and Litza Janz, semiotics is ultimately derived from the Greek seme, which means interpreter of signs, and as a theory, a broad term, semiotics means the systematic study of the production and interpretation of signs. In this case, the theory of semiotics refers to human life, which can be considered full of signs, and semiotics as a sign mediator in the communication process, so that people are called homo semioticus.

The study of new signs began at the beginning of the 20th century by two philosophers, namely Ferdinand de Saussure (1857-1913) as a linguist and Charles Sanders Peirce (1839-1914) as a semiotician and logician. Since 1969, the science of signs has had official scientific associations, namely the International Association/or Semiotic Studies (IASS) of semiotics as a scientific discipline, and the magazine Semiotica (published in The Hague).

Definition of Semiotics

Etymologically, the term semiotics comes from the Greek word Semeion, which means sign. The sign itself is said to be something which, based on predetermined social conventions, can be considered to represent something else. The sign was originally interpreted as something indicating the existence of something else. In terminology, semiotics can be defined as a science that studies various objects, events, and all cultures as signs. Semiotics can be said as a discipline dealing with signs, starting with sign systems and processes involved in the use of signs at the end of the 18th century.

Semiotics is the science of signs or sign systems. This definition then raises the question “who can distinguish between a sign and not a sign?” Before the emergence of semiotics, Augustine of Hippo realized that it was difficult to separate “things” from signs. Someone can know something and speak “something” with the help of signs.

Person replaces “something” with a character that corresponds to “something”. This is the idea of ​​the father of modern semiotics, Charles Sanders Peirce, who tries to turn most of the “things” into “something in themselves”, as well as the steps to do sign studies to understand the human mind. and into the world.

But apart from what is received as a sign, one can also accept without thinking, for example, the Bible or the Koran can be interpreted and believed as sacred and symbolic objects. On the other hand, you can also kill using arguments from two books.

In short, there are several conditions that exist simultaneously to determine whether “something” is considered a sign or not. In semiotics there is no real problem with all “things”, or with the relationship between things or signs. Semiotics does not accept unsigned reality because it cannot answer the question of whether or not anything under the sign exists. Semiotically, a non-sign will be read as the meaning of a sign whose content is completely negative (or empty). More than that, semiotics is something that tends to believe in everything as signs and sign systems. In semiotics, all objects also mean that everything is no longer an object or is not an object characteristic of an object.

Several Originators of the Concept of Semiotic Theory

Ferdinand de Saussure’s Theory of Semiotics

In the concept of semiotics or semiology of Ferdinand de Saussure there are four concepts, namely:

• Significant and Significe

The first concept is Significant and Significant, which according to Saussure are components of a sign and their roles cannot be separated from each other. Meaningful or significant are things that remain in our memory, such as sound images, visual images, etc. At the same time, a sign, or also called a signified, is the meaning or impression of attachment that we have.

From a linguistic point of view, which forms the basis of Saussure’s semiological concept, equality can be likened to the word and object “door”. The door is basically part of a series of letters, namely the door, while in an important sense it can be understood as something that connects one room to another. The combination of signifier and signified then forms a sign for “door”, not just an inanimate object used by humans.

• Langue and parole

Another concept is the aspect of language, which Saussure divides into two parts, namely language and parole. Language is a language system and an abstract system that is used jointly which is agreed upon by all language users, and is a guideline for language practice in society.

At the same time, speech is the practice of language and individual forms of speech in society at a certain time or moment. Saussure explained that it can be said that language is a social fact and refers to society in language, which also functions as a system that determines the relationship between signifiers and signifieds. The use of language that is understood and applied by individuals in society as a form of speech is then called conditional. Individual trial periods may vary as implementation and application may vary. 

• Synchronic and Diachronic

Saussure divided the three concepts of language research into two, namely synchronic and diachronic. Synchronic is language learning that learns the language within a certain period of time, while diachronic is learning the language continuously or all the time the language is still being used. 

Synchronism is often called descriptive linguistic research because the research involved examines many things in an effort to describe or explain what language is used at a particular moment. Diachronic is a study that is more historical and comparative because it aims to know the history, change, and structural development of a language in an unlimited period of time.

• Syntagmatic and associative / Paradigmatic

The last semiological concept from Saussure is the concept of the relationship between elements, which is divided into syntagmatic and associative, or paradigmatic. Syntagmatics explains the relationship between elements in an orderly and regular language concept. At the same time, the association/paradigm relationship explains speech elements that are not present in the speech concerned, which are present in the language but not in the sentence structure. This syntagmatic and paradigmatic relationship is reflected in the structure of language in the sentences we use everyday, including Indonesian sentences. If a sentence has a syntagmatic relationship, it can be seen that every word in the same sentence has a unity of meaning and relationship. Paradigmatic relations simultaneously show the unity of meaning and relationships between individual sentences which are not visible when looking at just one sentence. We often follow Indonesian lessons about sentence elements in the form of subject, predicate, object and adverb (SPOK); but in fact not all sentences always have these elements, right? Semiological studies state that if a sentence has complete SPOK elements and has a unity of meaning from the combination of these elements in such a way that they cannot be replaced by other elements because they can change meaning, then the sentence has a syntagmatic relationship. but in fact not all sentences always have these elements, right? Semiological studies state that if a sentence has complete SPOK elements and has a unity of meaning from the combination of these elements in such a way that they cannot be replaced by other elements because they can change meaning, then the sentence has a syntagmatic relationship. but in fact not all sentences always have these elements, right? Semiological studies state that if a sentence has complete SPOK elements and has a unity of meaning from the combination of these elements in such a way that they cannot be replaced by other elements because they can change meaning, then the sentence has a syntagmatic relationship.

Conversely, if a sentence does not have a complete SPOK arrangement and one of its elements can be replaced by another word without changing its meaning, then the sentence has a paradigmatic relationship.

Peirce’s Semiotic Theory

Peirce’s theory of semiotics is a science or analytical method related to the sign system created by Charles Sanders Peirce, an American philosopher known for his logic and human reasoning. Peirce argues that human life is characterized by a mixture of signs and their use in representational activities. The prerequisite for being called a sign is that something is tangible, refers to something, replaces, represents, presents, and has representative properties that are directly related to the nature of the interpreter. According to Peirce, a sign is something that stands for something else, represents something it represents. Peirce divides the sign system (semiotics) into three elements included in the triangle theory, namely the sign (sign), sign reference (object) and sign use (interpretation). A sign is something physical that can be felt by one’s five senses and can represent other things beyond the sign itself. According to Peirce, a sign consists of a symbol, an icon and an index. Character references are called objects. Object is something related to the sign or something referred to by the sign. At the same time, the interpreter is the thinking concept of the person who uses the sign and gives meaning to the object referred to by the sign. Peirce called sign semiosis, which means that everything in this world is a sign, which is a three-stage (trianide) process of meaning. Object is something related to the sign or something referred to by the sign. At the same time, the interpreter is the thinking concept of the person who uses the sign and gives meaning to the object referred to by the sign. Peirce called sign semiosis, which means that everything in this world is a sign, which is a three-stage (trianide) process of meaning. Object is something related to the sign or something referred to by the sign. At the same time, the interpreter is the thinking concept of the person who uses the sign and gives meaning to the object referred to by the sign. Peirce called sign semiosis, which means that everything in this world is a sign, which is a three-stage (trianide) process of meaning.

According to Peirce, semiotics is part of empirical science. Peirce created a general theory about signs, especially regarding sign functions in general. Peirce argues that linguistic signs are important, but not the only types of signs. The nature of generic signs also applies to linguistic signs. But what is true for linguistic signs may not be true for general signs. He developed general sign science so that it can be applied to all types of signs. The goal is to develop new concepts, complemented by a new vocabulary of your own creation. One way is to use the term “semiotics” as the name of the science that studies the general signs it creates.

Roland Barthes’ Semiotic Theory

According to Barthes, semiology wants to study how humans interpret things. Its meaning in this case cannot be equated with communication. Meaning means that objects not only carry information when objects want to communicate, but also form sign structures. Thus Barthes saw

meaning as a general process of structured arrangement. Meaning is not only limited to language, but also to other things outside of language. Barthes regards social life, whatever its form, as its system of signs.

Barthes’ semiotic theory is almost literally derived from de Saussure’s theory of language. Roland Barthes revealed that language is a sign system that reflects the assumptions of a particular society at a certain time. Besides that, it uses the Significance theory, which was developed as a theory of metal language and its implications. Term becomes marker expression (E) and marker becomes content (C). However, Barthes said that there must be a certain relationship (R) between E and C to form a sign (sign, Sn). The concept of this relationship makes the theory of more than one sign of the same content. This development is called the phenomenon of metalanguage and forms what are called synonyms.

He introduces a model of sign analysis into two degrees of meaning, or often called two degrees of meaning. Then divide again into meaning and meaning.

The first degree of meaning is in the form of the relationship between the signified and the signified in their actual form or signification, that is, in their original meaning which is understood by most people. For example, the word “chicken” means “a bird that lays eggs and cries.”

Then the second stage of meaning is connotation, which describes the relationship when the sign is mixed with emotions or feelings. Even though there is a difference between denotation and meaning, people often do not understand the difference, so studying it requires semiotic analysis.

Conclusion

So a brief discussion of the definition of semiotic theory. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of semiotic theory but also discusses the history of semiotics, and discusses the theories of world semioticians. Understanding the meaning of the theory put forward by linguists who discuss semiotics can give us a deeper understanding of non-verbal language in the form of signs which are studied more deeply in linguistic studies.

This is a review of the understanding of Semiotics theory. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn everything about understanding Semiotics theory and other linguistic-related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram

Research variables – When compiling research, you will not be able to escape the problem to be scientifically investigated. To do this, Sinaumed’s needs to determine the research variables so that the research remains in accordance with its goals and objectives.

Variable, in short, is something that becomes the focus of the study and to formulate it requires a clear theory, concept or proposition. Because if not, you may find it difficult to formulate research problems and collect the data needed for a study.

In other words, this variable will answer questions such as ” what do you want to find through this research?” ”, “ What must be determined first by the researcher so that the research objectives are achieved? ”, and “ What is the basis for the determination? ”.

Unfortunately, there are still many people who do not understand research variables well. As a result, it takes a long time to finish the research being done or even repeat the writing process from scratch.

Therefore, in this article we will discuss the meaning of research variables, their types, and how to formulate them. Listen carefully, okay!

Definition of Research Variables

In general, variables are objects or concepts to be studied that can be abstract or real . In the process of writing research, the formulation of variables must be carried out systematically and in accordance with scientific principles. That way, the truth of the results of observations in research can be accounted for.

S. Margono (1997) states that a variable is a concept that has a variation in value. That is, this variable certainly has diverse properties and refers to characteristics that differ from one variable to another.

For example, let’s say you are going to do a research study entitled ” The Impact of Extracurriculars on Student Achievement at SMA Negeri 1 Bandung “. In this study, the variables are Extracurriculars and Student Achievement. The types of extracurricular activities and student achievement will certainly vary between students.

Besides being varied, a variable must also be measurable. Especially for quantitative research that requires research results that are objective, measurable, and open to retesting. Elements or the term “research variable” itself is more widely used in this type of research.

Asroi et al explained more fully about what variables and research instruments are in the book Understanding Variables and Research Instruments . Make sure Sinaumed’s uses this book as a reference when writing research, OK?

Types of Research Variables

After knowing the meaning of research variables, you can enter the variable selection stage. At this stage, Sinaumed’s must know the types of variables that can be used in research.

The purpose of knowing the types of variables is so that it is not too difficult for you to determine the right variable and in accordance with the research objectives. Therefore, the type of variable itself is divided into several groups, so that it will be easier for you to make research variables that will be used. The first is based on position and function; by nature; based on urgency; based on the type of measurement scale; and based on appearance at measurement.

Types of Variables Based on Position

Independent Variable ( Independent Variable )

Independent variables are variables that can affect changes in other variables. In other words, if there is a change in a variable, the change is caused by this independent variable.

For example, let’s say Sinaumed’s is currently compiling a study entitled ” The Impact of Extracurriculars on Student Achievement at SMA Negeri 1 Bandung “. Now, in this study, the independent variable is “extracurricular” because it can stand alone and can affect changes in “student learning achievement” which is another variable.

Bound Variable ( Dependent Variable )

In contrast to the independent variable, the dependent variable is a variable that can be influenced by other variables. Therefore, its existence is considered as a result of the presence of independent variables.

For example, in the research mentioned earlier, the dependent variable is “student learning achievement”, because it can be influenced by extracurriculars taken by students.

Basically, your research is an attempt to find relationships between various variables. So, the relationship between the independent variable and the dependent variable is the most basic relationship that you must understand.

As for the type of relationship between the two variables, Machfoedz (2007) states that there are three types of relationships that can be used, namely symmetrical, reciprocal, and asymmetrical relationships.

A symmetrical relationship is a relationship in which a variable is not affected or does not affect other variables.

Reciprocity means that a variable can be a cause and effect for another variable. For example the variable “quality of education” with “economic level of the millennial generation”. Each of these variables can influence each other.

What this means is, suppose you are a millennial generation with a high economic level. So because of this, it’s easier for you to get a high quality education too.

Conversely, if you come from a family with a high level of education, you can also have a high economic level.

An asymmetrical relationship is the opposite of a symmetrical relationship, which means that a variable can affect other variables.

Control Variables

Control variables are variables that you can control with the aim that the influence of the independent variable on the dependent variable is not disturbed by other factors that you don’t examine.

For example,
let’s say you have a hypothesis that someone from the upper middle class can tolerate mixed marriages more than someone from the lower middle class.

So, to find out the truth of the hypothesis, you can use “education” or “income” or both as control variables. This means that the respondents from your research will be taken from different social classes but have the same education and income.

With a method like this, you can avoid biased calculation results or conclusions.

Types of Variables Based on Nature

Dynamic Variables

Just as the name suggests, this one variable can change. Starting from up or down to its characteristics. For example, such as student learning interest, employee performance, employee motivation, learning achievement, and others. Some of these examples will always change and usually keep up with the times.

Static Variables

In contrast to dynamic variables, static variables are more fixed and cannot change or are very difficult to change. For example, such as region of origin, gender, social status, and others.

Types of Variables Based on Urgency

The next type of research variable is based on the urgency or interest of the instrument used to collect research data. Within this group of variables, there are two types that you should know about:

Conceptual Variables

Conceptual variable is a type of variable that is hidden and cannot be seen through existing facts. However, it can still be seen using existing indicators. Examples include talent, interest in reading, motivation to work, and so forth.

Factual Variables

Factual variables are the opposite of conceptual variables. That is, this variable can be seen through the facts that already exist. For example, such as age, education, gender, ethnicity, religion, and others.

Therefore, with its factual nature, it is very rare to find errors or confusion in this variable. Even if there is, it is usually caused by dishonest respondents during the interview process.

Types of Variables Based on the Type of Measuring Scale

Nominal Variables

Nominal variables are also called categorical variables or discrete variables. In short, this variable is a variable that can be grouped into several relatively few categories.

For example:

1. Religion:

• Islam
• Catholic
• Hindu
• Protestant
• Buddha

2. Gender:

• Man
• Woman

3. Quality:

• Very good
• Good
• Not good
• Bad

Nominal variables will produce ordinal data and nominal data when examined. Ordinal data is data that has attributes (names) and ranks or sequences. In addition, the numbers in this data have levels and function to sort objects from the lowest to the highest, and vice versa. In variables of this type, there is no absolute value in this data.

Judging from the example above, the Quality category is ordinal data because there are differences between the attributes. “Very good” means better than just “good”, and “good” means better than poor.

Meanwhile, nominal data is the simplest variable measure, so the numbers in this data only function as labels or attributes, not as any level.

From the previous example, the categories Religion and Gender are examples of nominal data because they are only based on classification.

Continuous Variable

Continuous variables in short are variables that have levels or levels. Within this variable, there are several other types of variables, namely:

Ordinal variables or variables that have a certain level or order. For example, sports match scores or world championship rankings.

Interval variables or variables that have a certain distance or scale. For example the rating scale obtained by military training participants.

Ratio variables or variables that have a comparison. For example, the weight of two athletes, one weighing 40 kilograms and the other 80 kilograms. This data can also be translated into “the first athlete weighs half of the second athlete”.

Continuous variables are often found in quantitative research because they “play” more with numbers. As stated in the Quantitative Research Methodology book written by Pu;us Insap Santosa.

Types of Variables Based on Appearance at the Time of Measurement

In this group of variables, it is divided into two types, namely maximalist variables and typicalist variables.

Maximal Variable

Maximal variable is a variable that during the data collection process, you give encouragement to respondents to bring out their best performance. Such as achievement, creativity, talent, skill , and others.

Typical Variables

Conversely, a typical variable is a variable that during the process of collecting data, you don’t give any encouragement to the respondent to show maximum performance. This variable places more emphasis on respondents answering questions or choosing options honestly. Examples include interests, personality, ways of shopping, attitudes towards certain issues and others.

How Many Variables Can You Use in Your Research?

When compiling a research, actually you are free to determine the number of variables to be used, it can be two, three, four, or if you want five it doesn’t matter. It’s just that, the more variables, the process of writing research also becomes more complicated and longer, it can even be that the discussion will become less focused.

Therefore, the most important thing when selecting research variables is that you must ensure that they reflect the characteristics of the population you are studying. Apart from that, also pay attention to the position and relationship between the variables, OK? The reason is, this will affect the research framework that you use.

For example, does variable X determine variable Y, does variable X precede variable R, or are there other variables that interfere with variables X and R.

After determining the research variables that you will use, the next task is to make conceptual and operational definitions. Conceptual definition here means explanation of existing concepts with your own understanding. Usually the conceptual definition is written briefly, clearly, and firmly.

While the operational definition means a more detailed explanation and includes how to measure existing concepts. For example, the variable academic achievement.

So, conceptually, academic achievement is the achievement of student learning outcomes over a certain period of time. Operationally, academic achievement is the value of the report card or ranking given by the teacher.

Tips for Formulating Research Variables

In the process of writing research, many researchers are confused when formulating research variables. Especially undergraduate students who are not very experienced.

Therefore, in this article sinaumedia will provide some tips that can help the process of formulating research variables.

1. Determine the Main Problem

This main problem will later become the Y variable which is the dependent variable and the core of the research that you will do. For example: student learning interest

2. Find the Factors

Next, find the problem factors that will become variable X or the independent variables. Well, generally in a study there are two variables, namely X and Y. As an example of the previous title, “The Impact of Extracurriculars (X) on Student Learning Interests (Y) SMA Negeri 1 Bandung”.

3. Prepare Research Theory

From the variables that you have determined, you should prepare a research theory that can support both. Usually these theories can be taken from journals, theses, and previous studies.

4. Prepare Research Needs

Finally, also prepare the needs for conducting research such as plans, funds, documents, locations, and so on. The goal is so that you can find out whether the research is possible to do or not.

Examples of Research Variables

Based on the type of research, research variables can be divided into two categories. The first is a qualitative variable and the second is a quantitative variable.

Qualitative Variables

Qualitative variables or categorical variables are variables that include quality that cannot be measured by numbers from a group or population. This variable is often associated with the physical attributes of a group of individuals.

These variables can then be further divided into two types, namely nominal and ordinal. Nominal qualitative variables are variables that do not recognize order criteria and do not have a predetermined numerical value.

Meanwhile, qualitative variables are also known as semi-quantitative variables. Because these variables are classified using a value scale, even though they talk about attributes or qualities that do not have a numerical value.

Some examples of qualitative variables are:

1. Marital status–single, married, divorced, widower/widow
2. Fear
3. Hunger
4. Beauty
5. feeling happy
6. Ignorance
7. Creativity
8. Exam qualification

You can find other examples of qualitative variables in the book Theory & Practice Qualitative Research Methods compiled by Imam Gunawan.

Quantitative Variables

Quantitative variables are variables that are written using numeric values ​​(numbers). Therefore, this variable requires operations and also mathematical calculations to measure it.

There are two types of quantitative variables that you can use, namely continuous and discrete. A continuous quantitative variable is a variable that can take a number of values ​​that do not always have two digits. This means that what is used is a decimal number.

The accuracy also varies, depending on the measuring instrument you use. However, in essence, a continuous quantitative variable has an unlimited number of decimal places.

A discrete variable is a variable that only takes finite values ​​into account. In other words, a discrete quantitative variable is a variable that only calculates the number of accounts with a value scale that can be separated and shows a specific value.

Some examples of quantitative variables are:

1. Number of family members
2. Number of chickens in the coop
3. The value (price) of an object
4. Height
5. Weight
6. The number of rounds in a sports competition
7. Vehicle speed
8. Screen size

Thus the discussion about research variables this time, I hope that all the discussion in this article can be useful for Sinaumed’s, especially in compiling scientific papers or those who want to do research. For Sinaumed’s who want to find books on research methods, they can get them at sinaumedia.com . Together with sinaumedia, you can get #MoreWithReading information

Prophet Adam’s Prayer – Prophet Adam is a human being and the first prophet created by Allah SWT, included in the 25 prophets that Muslims must believe in. Therefore, what he brought, what he did and what he avoided can be a lesson in itself. Including when the Prophet Adam’s prayer was said.

For some Muslims, maybe they don’t know Adam’s prayer. Therefore, in this article, we will study together about Prophet Adam’s prayer. So, see the full review until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

However, before discussing about Prophet Adam’s prayer, it is better if we discuss about Prophet Adam first.

Prophet Adam

The story of Prophet Adam shows that humans are blessed creatures. One of the reasons is because the Prophet Adam showed an example of human nature which is bound to obey all instructions from Allah SWT. But then he failed, repented and was received back and guided to stay on the straight path.

Therefore, what is brought, what is done, and what is avoided can be a lesson in itself for human life today, including the prayer of Prophet Adam AS. Prophet Adam became a blessed prophet because of his obedience to Allah SWT.

Even though he also made big mistakes until he was sent down to Earth, Prophet Adam also showed an example of human nature that is bound to obey all commands and prohibitions from Allah SWT. Even though he failed, he immediately repented and was accepted again and then guided to stay in the way of Allah SWT.

Therefore, the life story and teachings of Prophet Adam can be a lesson or example in itself. There is no exception regarding Prophet Adam’s prayer of repentance when he made a mistake and was expelled from heaven. The story of the Prophet Adam is of course very famous and is narrated in the Koran and other heavenly religious books. Allah created Siti Hawa as his companion in heaven.

When the Prophet Adam AS and Eve happily lived in heaven, there was one prohibition for both of them not to eat the khuldi fruit. However, the Devil, who had sworn to mislead people, managed to tempt Prophet Adam AS and Eve.

As a result, Prophet Adam and Siti Hawa had to be expelled from heaven and lowered to earth. After arriving on earth, Prophet Adam and Eve then admitted the mistakes they had made. Both of them then repent.

Prophet Adam’s prayer

Prophet Adam once made a mistake with Eve by violating Allah SWT’s prohibition to eat khuldi fruit while in heaven. Therefore, Prophet Adam read a prayer to ask forgiveness from Allah SWT for this deed. There are several prayers of Prophet Adam AS that were said when asking Allah SWT for forgiveness.

Prophet Adam himself was the first human and prophet created by Allah SWT. Prophet Adam became a blessed prophet because of his obedience to Allah SWT. Therefore, we as Muslims must also emulate their attitudes and behavior, especially obedience to Allah SWT. That way, the practice of a Muslim can continue to increase.

After knowing a few things about Prophet Adam, the next discussion is the prayers of Prophet Adam which you can also know. You can practice every prayer, so that it can increase the reward of a Muslim. Then, what are the prayers of Prophet Adam?

Prophet Adam’s Prayer When Asking For Forgiveness

The following is the prayer of Prophet Adam AS that was said when he asked Allah SWT for forgiveness. Prophet Adam AS is a human being as well as the first prophet created by Allah SWT. The prayer of Prophet Adam AS is enshrined in the Koran Surah Al-A’raf verse 23.

This surah is the 7th letter in the holy book of the Koran. What Prophet Adam brought, what he did and what he avoided can be a lesson in itself, including the prayer of Prophet Adam AS. Prophet Adam once made a mistake with Eve by violating Allah SWT’s prohibition to eat khuldi fruit while in heaven.

Therefore, Prophet Adam read a prayer to ask forgiveness from Allah SWT for this deed. The prayer of repentance of the Prophet Adam and Siti Hawa is enshrined in the Al-Qur’an surah Al-A’raf verse: 23

رَبَّنَا ظَلَمْنَا أَنفُسَنَا وَإِن لَّمْ تَغْفِرْ لَنَا وَتَرْحَمْنَا لَنَكُونَنَّ مِنَ الْخَاسِرِينَ

“Robbana dholamna Anfusana wa inlam taghfirlanaa wa tarhamnaa lanakunanna minal khosirin”.

Meaning: “O our Lord, we have wronged ourselves. If You do not forgive us and have mercy on us, we will surely be among the losers.”

Then, Imam at-Tabari in his commentary said that the meaning of ‘tyrannizing ourselves’ is a sentence of regret because we have done something that will harm ourselves. This shows that when people do bad things, it will have an impact on themselves.

Apart from that, in the prayer of Prophet Adam, he also asked Allah SWT to accept his repentance. This can be seen in the sentence ‘wa tarhamna laanakunanna minal khosirin’, which shows that if the Prophet Adam AS and Hawa were not forgiven, then they would both become slaves of the losers.

The prayer of Prophet Adam AS to ask forgiveness from Allah SWT is also known as Prophet Adam’s Prayer of Istighfar. Believers can practice this prayer when they want to ask for forgiveness for all sins that have been committed. By reading this prayer, it is hoped that someone can be istiqomah in asking for forgiveness.

Prophet Adam’s Repentance Prayer

The sentence of Istighfar Prophet Adam was carried out by him, after Prophet Adam committed a wrong deed, he also immediately read the following prayer for forgiveness:

لا إِلَهَ إِلا أَنْتَ سُبْحَانَكَ وَبِحَمْدِكَ ، رَبِّ عَمِلْتُ سُوءًا وَظَلَمْتُ نَفْسِي فَاغْفِرْ لِي أَنْتَ خَيْرُ الْغَافِرِينَ ، لا إِلَهَ إِلا أَنْتَ سُبْحَانَكَ وَبِحَمْدِكَ رَبِّ عَمِلْتُ سُوءًا وَظَلَمْتُ نَفْسِي فَارْحَمْنِي إِنَّكَ أَرْحَمُ الرَّاحِمِينَ ، لا إِلَهَ إِلا أَنْتَ سُبْحَانَكَ وَبِحَمْدِكَ ، رَبِّ عَمِلْتُ سُوءًا وَظَلَمْتُ نَفْسِي ، فَتُبْ عَلَيَّ ، إِنَّكَ أَنْتَ التَّوَّابُ الرَّحِيم

La ilaha illa anta subhanaka wa bihamdika rabbi ‘amiltu suan wa dzolamtu nafsi faghfirli anta khoirul ghofirin la ilaha illa anta subhanaka wa bihamdika robbi ‘amiltu suan wa dzolamtu nafsi warhamni innaka arhamur rohimin la ilaha illa anta subhanaka wa bihamdika robbi ‘amiltu suan wa dzolamtu nafsi fatub ‘alayya innaka antat tawwabur rohim.

Meaning: “There is no god but You, Glory to You and all praise be to You. My Lord, I have committed sins and wronged myself, so forgive me for You are the best forgiver. There is no god but You, Glory be to You and all praise be to You. My Lord, I have sinned and wronged myself, so have mercy on me, verily You are the best of compassion. There is no god but You, Glory be to You and all praise be to You. My Lord, I have committed sins and wronged myself, so forgive me, verily You are the best of repentance and the Most Merciful.”

In Surah Al Baqarah verse 37 telling about the Prophet Adam, it is stated that:

فَتَلَقّٰٓى اٰدَمُ مِنْ رَّبِّهٖ كَلِمٰتٍ فَتَابَ عَلَيْهِ ۗ اِنَّهٗ هُوَ التَّوَّابُ الرَّحِيْمُ

Meaning: “Then, Adam received several sentences from his Lord, then He also accepted his repentance. Verily, He is the Most Repentant, the Most Merciful.”

When he was expelled from heaven and fell to earth, he came to the Kaaba and prayed two rak’ahs, then prayed, in a beautiful prayer:

اَللَّهُمَّ إِنَّكَ تَعْلَمُ سِرِّيْ وَعَلاَنِيَتِيْ فَاقْبَلْ مَعْذِرَتِيْ، وَتَعْلَمُ حَاجَتِيْ فَأَعْطَنِيْ سُؤْلِيْ، وَتَعْلَمُ مَا فِيْ نَفْسِيْ فَاغْفِرْلِيْ ذَنْبِيْ، اَللَّهُمَّ إِنِّيْ أَسْأَلُكَ إِيْمَانًا دَائِمًا يُبَاشِرُ قَلْبِيْ، وَأَسْأَلُكَ يَقِيْنًا صَادِقًا حَتَّى أَعْلَمَ أَنَّهُ لَنْ يُصِيْبَنِيْ إِلاَّ مَا كَتَبْتَهُ عَلَيَّ، وَالرِّضَا بِمَا قَسَمْتَهُ لِيْ يَا ذَا الْجَلاَلِ وَاْلإِكْرَامِ.

Meaning: “O Allah, you really know what is hidden and visible from me, therefore accept my regret. You know my needs, so grant my request. You know what is in me, so forgive my sins. O Allah, I really ask You for faith that touches my heart and true belief so that I know that nothing will happen to me unless You have decreed for me. O Allah, give me a sense of contentment with what You have given me.”

Allah then answered Prophet Adam’s prayer:

“O Adam, I have accepted your repentance and I have forgiven your sins. There is no one among your descendants who prays with prayers like you unless I forgive his sins, I take away his sorrows and difficulties, I remove poverty from him, I trade him more than all merchants trade, I subdue the world before him even though he doesn’t want it.

The Virtue of Prophet Adam’s Prayer

Having such virtues, Prophet Adam also taught many prayers that mankind could follow. Of course this prayer of Prophet Adam has many fadhilah and virtues. One of them is to be forgiven of sins and sufficient sustenance by Allah SWT.

1. Prophet Adam’s prayer when asking for forgiveness

The big mistake that Adam and Eve made was violating the prohibition of Allah SWT to eat khuldi fruit while in heaven. Therefore, Prophet Adam recited a prayer to ask forgiveness from Allah SWT.

Prophet Adam recited the prayer:

“Robbana dholamna Anfusana wa inlam taghfirlanaa wa tarhamnaa lanakunanna minal khosirin”.

Meaning: “O our Lord, we have wronged ourselves. If You do not forgive us and have mercy on us, we will surely be among the losers.”

Imam at-Tabari in his Tafsir states that the meaning of the word ‘tyrannizing ourselves’ is a sentence of regret for having done something bad that actually harms oneself. This shows that when someone does bad things, it will harm himself.

Apart from that, in the Prophet Adam’s prayer he also asked that his repentance be accepted. The sentence ‘ wa tarhamna lanakunanna minal khosirin,’ shows that if the Prophet Adam and Eve were not forgiven, then they would become slaves of the losers.

Allah SWT then answered Prophet Adam’s prayer: “O Adam, I have accepted your repentance and I have forgiven your sins. There is no one among your descendants who prays with prayers like you unless I forgive his sins, I take away his sorrows and difficulties, I remove poverty from him, I trade him more than all merchants trade, I subdue the world before him even though he doesn’t want it.

Jalaluddin as-Suyuthi in the book ad-Durul Mantsûr fît Tafsîril Ma’tsûr cites a history that before praying, Prophet Adam munajat: “O Allah, if I ask You in the name of Muhammad, will You forgive my sins?”

Allah replied, “Who is Muhammad?” . Adam said, “Glory be to You, when You created me, I turned my face towards Your throne and there was written the phrase ‘Laa ilaaha Illallah’, so I know that no one has a higher degree in Your sight except he who his name goes with your name.”

Allah replied, “O Adam, he is the last prophet from your descendants. If it weren’t for him, I wouldn’t have created you.”

2. Prophet Adam’s prayer when he arrived on Earth

After being expelled from heaven, it is told that Prophet Adam then circled the Kaaba seven times and prayed two cycles of prayer. After that, Prophet Adam then went to multazam, namely the Kaaba wall which is between the Black Stone and the Kaaba door. Then, he also prayed:

“Allahumma innaka ta’lamu sirri wa ‘allaniyati, faqbal ma’dziroti. Wa ta’lam ma fi nafsi faghfir li dzunubi. Wa ta’lamu hajati wa atini suali. Allahumma inni as aluka iimaanan yubasyiru qolbi, wa yaqinan shodiqon hatta a’lama annahu la yusibana illa ma katabta ali, ar ridho bima qodhoita ‘alayya”.

Meaning: “O Allah, you know my secret and my actions, please accept my apology. You know the beat of my heart, forgive my sins. You know my need, grant my request. O Allah, I ask You to give me faith that sinks into my heart, a firm belief so that I am sure that nothing will happen to me except for the destiny that You have recorded and I am pleased with the provisions that You have set for me.”

According to Sheikh Abu Bakar Syatha, Allah SWT gave a revelation to Prophet Adam that his children and grandchildren prayed like this, then all his difficulties would be alleviated, his sustenance was sufficient and all his worldly needs were fulfilled even though he did not expect it.

In the book Al-Maslakul Qorib by Al-Habib Thohir bin Husain bin Thohir there is an addition to the prayer: “O Allah, extend my life in obedience to You and knowing You, and fill my heart with the belief in which all the calamities of the world will be lightened.” . And lighten the agony of death for me and close my age in the best condition, and provide me with friendship with Your Prophet Muhammad, may Allah always bestow blessings and greetings in the hereafter in khuldi heaven and grant me the pleasure of looking at Your glorious ‘face’.” .

Closing

Until already at the end of this article. The story behind Prophet Adam’s prayer reminds us that we are weak creatures without the help of Allah SWT, so it is appropriate to always pray to the Creator. Thus the discussion of Prophet Adam’s prayer.

So, it would be nice for you to take the time to read Prophet Adam’s prayer so that you can be given protection by Allah SWT. It would be nice if you read the Prophet Adam’s prayer regularly so that you will get used to it in the future. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Sinaumed’s can get more information by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Also read:

Understanding Product Development Strategies and Its Stages – Almost all businesses, both small and large, are always related to product production, development, manufacture, and sales. When you have produced a product, the management section will work on a strategy on how to carry out product development.

In this article, the author will discuss what product development is and how to design a strategy and also the stages. Check out this article to the end.

Definition of Product Development

Product development is a process and strategy that needs to be carried out by a company in developing a product. Things that need to be done in developing a product are repairing old products or adding the use of these products to the target market. This means, you need to present new elements that can captivate customers.

In addition, product development is included in the process of making changes to existing products. At the same time as a process of looking for innovation to add value to old products and convert them into the form of these products. By doing product development, it means that the company understands and knows the needs and wants of the market.

The following is the definition of product development according to several book sources:

1. According to Tjiptono (2008), he revealed that product development is a strategy for new products, such as enhanced products, original products, modified products, and also new brands developed by means of research and development.

2. According to Armstrong and Kotler (2008), product development is a strategy to grow a company by offering product modifications or new products to predetermined target markets. Product development is carried out on physical products and ensures that existing product ideas can be turned into a new, more effective product.

3. According to Simamora (2000), states that product development is a process of finding ideas or ideas for new products and converting them into product lines that have been successful in the market. The search for new products is based on the assumption that the target market wants new elements. Therefore, the introduction of new products can help in achieving company goals.

4. According to Alma (2002), product development is an activity carried out by manufacturers in developing their products, improving old products, adding the use of old products, and reducing production costs and packaging costs.

Product Development Goals

The purpose of product development is to provide maximum value for consumers. Not only that, it also aims to win the company’s competition by selecting innovative products. Then also products that have been modified and have high value, be it in terms of design, packaging, size, and others.

Meanwhile, according to Keller and Kotler (2008), stated that there are two general objectives of product development, namely:

1. To meet new needs and strengthen the company’s image as an investor. This goal is achieved by offering a new product compared to the previous product.

2. The second goal is to maintain competitiveness with existing products. This is done by offering products that can provide various types of satisfaction or new uses.

According to Alma (2002), there are several reasons that underlie a company in developing products, including:

1. To meet the needs and desires of consumers
2. To increase turnover or increase sales
3. To utilize production resources
4. Win the competition with existing products
5. Increase profits by using the same materials
6. Utilizing the remaining materials
7 .Prevent consumers from feeling bored
8. To simplify product packaging

Product Development Strategy

Each company operating in a different field will follow its own product development strategy. Some members will innovate, while others will focus on adaptation in current product development.

Whatever strategy is used, it must be done clearly. When releasing a new product on the market, there are several product development strategies that you must implement, including:

1. Improving Existing Products

This strategy is carried out by creating new products from existing old products. Then modified and adapted to market desires. Apart from that, you also need to motivate the target market to buy the product that you have improved.

This focuses on adding features and updates that will affect consumer interest. But there are important things to note, that is, you have to keep looking for the features that consumers need from updated products.

2. Increase Product Value

Usually, the reason customers buy a product is because of the value they will receive from the product. That way, companies need to further strengthen product value by offering premium features, improving product quality, and also customer support. The added value presented will attract new consumers. Then existing customers will get something new from the product.

3. Experiment

Offering samples or product samples for free will make customers want to buy your product. Here, customers will certainly check the quality of the product and the free sample will make them even more convinced to buy the premium version of the product. This free offer shows customers what they will get when they buy the product.

4. Specialize and Customize

You can customize some products and make them more special to target certain customer groups. In fact, you can also offer personalized products that are relevant to customer needs and wants. This will make them interested in buying the products you offer compared to competitors.

5. Package Offers

Offering a new package will certainly attract the attention of customers. You can offer products with various packages. Such as bundle packages, discounts, or free samples to choose the products you offer. The package here is an offer that other customers will not get. Especially if you offer a limited time offer, it is included in a good marketing strategy.

6. New Product Line

New product line is the development of a new product within a product line that is still relevant to the existing product line. When you want to make a new product, then you have to be careful with the development. Don’t let it, you only focus on offering products that are needed by customers. New products must be equipped with new features. So that it will increase sales of these products.

7. Changing Ideas or Ideas

This strategy is carried out by changing the definition and idea of ​​the product. For example, when you create a new product but the target market doesn’t respond to the offer. Then you need to do market research and find out the appropriate customer wants and needs. Companies also need to provide new ideas for products to be developed and adapted to customer needs.

8. New Target Market

Selling several types of products in different markets is one strategy in product development. Where you can sell products in different markets. In fact, you can also change your target market and demographics and shift your focus from customers to business.

Types of Product Development

Every company must have a strategy for product development. It is intended that the product being developed can be in accordance with the wishes and needs of consumers and the company itself. But still in an attractive offer, so that existing consumers still want to have the product.

According to Keller and Kotler (2008), there are several types of product development strategies, including:

1. Improve existing products. This means that companies must use existing facilities and technology to create new innovations and improve old products. By using this method, the company will not get a big risk. Because they just need to make a complete change.

2. Expand product lines by adding items to existing product lines. You can also add to new products.

3. Adding existing products. In this case the company needs to add and provide variations to existing products. Then expand the market segment by serving various types of consumers who have different tastes.

4. Mimicking or modifying competitors’ strategies. This method can be done by imitating the strategies of competitors who are considered to be profitable. For example regarding pricing.

5. Adding product lines. Usually, companies will need substantial funds in the process of making new products that are not related to existing products. This is because products that have never been made and the facilities needed to manufacture them require substantial funds.

Stages or Product Development Process

1. Creating an Idea or Idea

Creating an idea for a new product is the first step in the product development process. In the process, the company needs to follow some systematic efforts in creating the latest products.
Usually, there are many ideas or ideas related to new products in the idea creation process. However, all these ideas must be able to proceed to the next stage. So that in this process, there will be many ideas that are wasted after passing various kinds of eligibility requirements for a product.

2. Screening of Ideas or Thoughts

The next stage is filtering ideas. After carrying out the creation stage, companies need to carry out screening related to product ideas that have been created. The screening is done with the aim that companies can get quality ideas. So that later it can be processed to the next stage. This is also useful for reducing production costs, minimizing the risk of failure, and also for selecting product ideas that are considered feasible and can be produced by the company.

3. Concept Development and Testing

After getting the product idea from the screening above, the next step that must be done is to develop the idea and test the new product concept. The concept here is a result of development efforts on several selected ideas. Where the product concept must be able to meet consumer needs. So that it can be better understood by the target market in a particular segment.

a. Concept Development

In carrying out concept development, companies must develop pre-selected ideas. Then make it a product concept so that it can be processed further. Therefore, in product development it is necessary to make several other alternatives that can be adapted to market needs and are also considered attractive.

b. Concept Testing

The new concept that has been developed must be tested first with the intended target market. Be it on a small or large scale. The concept can be presented in various forms. For certain types of products, it can be presented using pictures or word descriptions. In essence, the message to be conveyed to consumers must be easily accepted by the target market.

Then after the concept can be explained in detail to consumers. Then give them a question related to the interest and value contained in each product concept.

4. Marketing Strategy Development

When you have decided to choose a new product, the next step is to develop and develop a marketing strategy. The strategy must be developed and started from scratch. Starting from the release of products to the market until these products can be accepted by consumers.

5. Business Analysis

The product development stage that you must do if you have decided on a product concept and marketing strategy is to evaluate the business attractiveness of the new product that has been previously determined.

At this stage, only a re-examination is needed regarding sales projections, costs and profits derived from the sale of the new product, the goal is to find out whether all business factors are able to meet the company’s main goals or not.

If the final result of a business analysis shows a positive value and is in accordance with the company’s main goals, then the product can be moved to the next stage, namely the product development stage. These sales can be obtained by reviewing a history of other products from the company, it would be even better if the product is still in the same category as the product.

Apart from that, you can also monitor similar or similar products on the market, by monitoring these developments, as well as what things should be done and also avoided in order to achieve this.

Then, connect with various kinds of correct and appropriate marketing strategies, good sales distribution, as well as what promotions and communications will be delivered.

In a sales projection, the company must make maximum and minimum sales figures to be able to find out all the risks that will occur and be passed. In addition to all that, this can also be useful so that you can find out what the estimated costs are and what level of profit will be achieved from selling the product.

From all the results of this analysis, the company will be able to find out from the financial side and also be able to assess how attractive the product is to the business.

6. Product Development

In this stage, the product being developed is not a real or actual product, but is still in the concept of a series of words, videos, pictures, animations, or a prototype of a product.

If you have passed the business analysis, then you will proceed with developing it into an actual or real product. So, later consumers will evaluate the product by themselves. Because consumer input and experience is very useful for the product development process itself.

7. Test Marketing

Before the product is marketed according to its marketing strategy, the product must pass a marketing test on a real market on a small scale.
With this strategy, the production company will get an overview and experience related to the product to be launched, before the product is actually sold on a large scale, which requires a lot of marketing costs.

8. Commercialization

The results of the marketing test should be able to provide exposure related to the prospects for the product.

From the results of the marketing test, the company can then decide whether the new product can be launched, postponed, etc. If the company is sure that it will launch the product, then the company is obliged to prepare several activities, namely commercialization, starting from production preparation, preparation for new product launching activities such as promotion, advertising, distribution, and various other marketing activities.

There are not a few products that fail to enter a successful and broad market, therefore, to overcome this case, make sure all the steps above have been carried out.

Prayers entering the mosque – We must accustom children to worship, and don’t forget to teach children various daily prayers, one of which is the prayer to enter the mosque when going to pray at the mosque. Moreover, boys who actually have to perform congregational prayers at the mosque.

This is because the mosque is not only a place for worship, but also a place for conducting studies, reading the Koran, and as a place for various religious activities in our society.

Then, how do we teach prayer to enter the mosque to children? What are the manners and virtues of going to the mosque? Check out the explanation below until it’s finished.

 

Adab-Adab Going to the Mosque

What are the manners that must be considered when going to the mosque? Here are some manners of going to the mosque:

1. Ablution From Home

When you want to go to the mosque, try to be in a state of ablution from home.

Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu anhu narrated, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

مَنْ تَطَهَّرَ فِى بَيْتِهِ ثُمَّ مَشَى إِلَى بَيْتٍ مِنْ بُيُوتِ اللَّهِ لِيَقْضِىَ فَرِيضَةً مِنْ فَرَائِضِ اللَّهِ كَانَتْ خَطْوَتَاهُ إِحْدَاهُمَا تَحُطُّ خَطِيئَةً وَالأُخْرَى تَرْفَعُ دَرَجَةً

“Whoever purifies himself in his house, then he walks to one of Allah’s houses to fulfill the obligations that Allah obliges him to, then one step of his foot will erase his mistakes and another step will elevate his degree.” [HR. Muslim No. 666].

2. Stay Away From Bad Smells

Then, when you want to go to the mosque, stay away from bad odors on your body and mouth. Like cigarettes, bad breath from jengkol, petai, onions, or the like.

Ibn ‘Umar radhiyallahu anhu narrated, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said,

مَنْ أَكَلَ مِنْ هَذِهِ الشَّجَرَةِ – يَعْنِى الثُّومَ – فَلاَ يَقْرَبَنَّ مَسْجِدَنَا

“Whoever eats this plant (namely onions), then let him not approach our mosque.” [HR. Muslim No. 561 and Bukhari No. 853].

3. Wear Fragrances

When going to the mosque, it is recommended to beautify yourself (wear nice clothes), and it is also recommended to wear perfume, especially for men. As explained in the verse:

يَا بَنِي آدَمَ خُذُوا زِينَتَكُمْ عِنْدَ كُلِّ مَسْجِدٍ

“O son of Adam, wear your beautiful clothes in every (entering) the mosque.” [QS. Al-A’raf : 31].

Then there is a hadith of ‘Abdullah bin Mas’ud mentioning that someone said,

Amen.

“There is someone who likes to wear nice clothes and nice sandals.” The Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam then said, “Indeed, Allah is Jamil (Beautiful) loves everything that is beautiful.” [HR. Muslim No. 91].

Meanwhile, women are prohibited from wearing fragrances when going to the mosque, and may not decorate themselves excessively (grooming) when leaving the house. This prohibition is contained in the verse:

وَلَا يُبْدِينَ زِينَتَهُنَّ إِلَّا مَا ظَهَرَ مِنْهَا

“And let them not show their ornaments, except what (ordinary) appears thereof.” [QS. An-Nur : 31].

4. Reading Prayers When Leaving the House

Furthermore, we must also read a prayer before leaving the house. Anas bin Malik radhiyallahu’anhu narrated, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

إِذَا خَرَجَ الرَّجُلُ مِنْ بَيْتِهِ فَقَالَ بِسْمِ اللَّهِ تَوَكَّلْتُ عَلَى اللَّهِ لاَ حَوْلَ وَلاَ قُوَّةَ إِلاَّ بِاللَّهِ قَالَ « يُقَالُ حِينَئِذٍ هُدِيتَ وَكُفِيتَ وَوُقِيتَ فَتَتَنَحَّى لَهُ الشَّيَاطِينُ فَيَقُولُ لَهُ شَيْطَانٌ آخَرُ كَيْفَ لَكَ بِرَجُلٍ قَدْ هُدِىَ وَكُفِىَ وَوُقِىَ».

“If someone leaves the house, then he says “Bismillahi Tawakkaltu ‘alallah, Laa Hawla Wa Laa Quwwata Illa Billah” (meaning: In the name of Allah, I put my trust in Allah, there is no power and strength except with Him), then it is said at that time : “You will be guided, fulfilled and guarded”. Satan will turn away from him. Another demon will say: “How can you bother someone who has guidance, sufficiency and care?” [HR. Abu Dawud and Tirmidhi].

5. Can’t Interrupt Fingers

The next adab is not to interject your fingers when going to the mosque until you finish praying. It was narrated by Ka’ab bin ‘Ujrah radhiyallahu’anhu, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

إِذَا تَوَضَّأَ أَحَدُكُمْ فَأَحْسَنَ وُضُو especially ثُمَّ خَرَجَ عَامِدky

“If one of you performs ablution, then performs his ablution, then goes out to the mosque on purpose, then he should not intertwine his fingers because he is already in prayer.” [HR. Tirmidhi No. 386, Abu Dawud No. 562, Ibn Majah No. 967].

6. The road to the mosque is calm and not in a hurry

The next adab is to walk to the mosque calmly and not in a hurry even though it’s late. Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu’anhu narrated, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

إِذَا سَمِعْتُمُ الإِقَامَةَ فَامْشُوا إِلَى الصَّلاَةِ ، وَعَلَيْكُمْ بِالسَّكِينَةِ وَالْوَقَارِ وَلاَ تُسْرِعُوا ، فَمَا أَدْرَكْتُمْ فَصَلُّوا وَمَا فَاتَكُمْ فَأَتِمُّوا

“If you hear iqomah, then walk towards prayer. But stay calm and solemn towards prayer, don’t be in a hurry. Whatever you get from the priest, then follow it. As for what you miss, then perfect it.” [HR. Muslim No. 602 and Bukhari No. 636].

7. Reading prayers on the way to the mosque

When on the way to the mosque, we should read the following prayer:

اللَّهُمَّ اجْعَلْ فِى قَلْبِى نُورًا وَاجْعَلْ فِى لِسَانِى نُورًا وَاجْعَلْ فِى سَمْعِى نُورًا وَاجْعَلْ فِى بَصَرِى نُورًا وَاجْعَلْ خَلْفِى نُورًا وَأَمَامِى نُورًا وَاجْعَلْ مِنْ فَوْقِى نُورًا وَمِنْ تَحْتِى نُورًا اللَّهُمَّ وَأَعْظِمْ لِى نُورًا

Meaning: “O Allah, give light to my heart, my tongue, my hearing, my sight, behind me, in front of me, above me and below me. O Allah, give me light.” [HR. Abu Dawud No. 1353].

8. Enter the Mosque Prioritizing the Right Foot and Saying Greetings

When you arrive at the mosque, put your right foot first, and give greetings so that people around you can hear them. Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu’anhu narrated, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

وَعَنْ أَبِي هُرَيْرَةَ رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ قَالَ: قالَ رَسُولُ اللهِ صَلَّى اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ “لاَ تَدْخُلُوا الجَنَّةَ حَتَّى تُؤْمِنُوا وَلا تُؤْمِنُوا حَتىَّ تحَابُّوا، أَوَلاَ أَدُلُّكُمْ عَلَى شَئٍ إِذَا فَعَلْتُمُوهُ تَحاَبَبْتُمْ؟ أَفْشُوا السَّلاَم بَيْنَكُم” رَوَاهُ مُسْلِمٌ.

“You will not enter paradise until you believe. And you are not called believers until you love one another. Shall I show you something that if you did, you would love each other? Spread greetings among you.” [HR. Muslim No. 54].

9. Working on the Sunnah Tahiyatul Mosque Prayer

Then, it is recommended to do the Sunnah Tahiyatul Mosque prayer two cycles. From Abu Qatadah radhiyallahu’anhu, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

Amen

“If one of you enters the mosque, then he should not immediately sit down until he has prayed two cycles of prayer.” [HR. Muslim No. 714, Bukhari No. 444].

10. Selecting the First Shaf

It is advisable to choose the first row for men, if possible, choose the row on the right.

From Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu’anhu, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

لَوْ يَعْلَمُ النَّاسُ مَا فِي النِّدَاءِ وَالصَّفِّ الأَوَّلِ ، ث ث لَمْ يَجِدُوا

“If people knew the reward of the call to prayer and the first row, then they didn’t get it except by holding lots, they would definitely do it.” [Muttafaqun ‘alaih. HR. Muslim No. 437, Bukhari No. 615].

11. Sit Facing Qibla and Increase Prayer

After completing the sunnah tahiyatul prayer at the mosque, you should sit quietly and face the Qibla. Can fill the time by:

• Reciting Al-Qur’an
• Reading Dhikr and Istighfar
• Increase Prayer, because the prayer that is said between the Adhan and Iqamah is an efficacious prayer.

Anas bin Malik radhiyallahu’anhu narrated, that Rasulullah shallallahu’alaihi wasallam said:

Amen

“Indeed, a prayer that is not rejected is a prayer between the call to prayer and iqamah, so pray (at that time).” [HR. Ahmad 3 : 155].

12. Don’t Disturb Others

Someone who is waiting for prayer will always receive prayers from angels, and is considered as being in prayer. So it’s best to sit quietly and not disturb others. Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

لاَ يَزَالُ أَحَدُكُمْ فِى صَلاَةٍ مَا دَامَتِ الصَّلاَةُ تَحْب above

“One of you is considered to be continuously in prayer as long as he is waiting for the prayer in which the prayer keeps him from going home. There is nothing holding him back from going home to his family except prayer.” [HR. Muslim No. 649, Bukhari No. 659].

13. It is not permissible to pray the sunnah when the Iqamah is resounding

Then, no more prayers are performed when the Iqamah has been pronounced. Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

إِذَا أُقِيمَتِ الصَّلَاةُ فَلَا صَلَاةَ إِلَّا الْمَكْتُوبَةُ

“If the iqamah has been announced, then there is no prayer except the obligatory prayer.” [HR. Muslim No. 710].

This word means that it is not permissible to start sunnah prayers when the iqamah has been announced. However, if someone has started it before iqomah, then when iqomah, he is already in the second cycle, then the sunnah prayer will continue until the greeting. The application of this principle is as expressed by Ibn Nuzaim in Al-Asybah wa An-Nazhair, he said;

البَقَاءُ أَسْهَلُ مِنَ الإِبْتِدَاءِ

“Staying (continuing) is easier than starting.”

14. Not allowed to leave the mosque unless there is a need 

When you are in the mosque, you should not go out of the mosque unless there is a really important event. A hadith states,

مَنْ أَدْرَكَهُ الْأَذَانُ فِي الْمَسْجِدِ ثُمَّ Previous

“Whoever finds the call to prayer in the mosque, then leaves (and his exit is not due to a need, and he does not intend to return to the mosque) then he is a hypocrite.” [HR. Ibn Majah No. 606].

15. Exit the Mosque With Left Foot and Read Prayers 

When you have finished praying and are about to go home, it is sunnah to leave the mosque by putting your left foot first, then reading the prayer outside the mosque. Prayers entering the mosque, and prayers leaving the mosque will be discussed in the review below.

 

The Virtue of Performing Prayers in the Mosque 

Why are some Muslims, especially men, reluctant to pray in the mosque? Even though praying at the mosque is more important than praying at home. Because, there are many virtues, even the rewards are up to 27 times greater. What are the virtues of praying in the mosque?

1. Every step of walking to the mosque will be counted as charity.

In a hadith, the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

وَكُلُّ خَطْوَةٍ تَمْشِيهَا إِلَى الصَّلاَةِ صَدَقَةٌ

“Every step taken to perform the prayer is a charity.” [HR. Muslim No. 1009].

Syaikhul Al-Utsaimin in Syarh Al-Arba’in An-Nawawiyah explained, “Every footstep towards prayer is a charity, both far and near.”

2. Every Footstep Towards the Place of Prayer is Recorded as Goodness.

Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu’anhu narrated, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

كُلُّ خُطْوَةٍ يَخْطُوهَا إِلَى الصَّلاَةِ يُكْتَبُ لَهُ بِهَا حَسَنَةٌ وَيُمْحَى عَنْهُ بِهَا بِهَا سَيَةٌ

“Every step towards the place of prayer will be recorded as good and will erase the bad.” [HR. Ahmad 2 : 283].

3. Going to the Mosque Gets Two Priorities.

Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said:

مَنْ تَطَهَّرَ فِى بَيْتِهِ ثُمَّ مَشَى إِلَى بَيْتٍ مِنْ بُيُوتِ اللَّهِ لِيَقْضِىَ فَرِيضَةً مِنْ فَرَائِضِ اللَّهِ كَانَتْ خَطْوَتَاهُ إِحْدَاهُمَا تَحُطُّ خَطِيئَةً وَالأُخْرَى تَرْفَعُ دَرَجَةً

“Whoever purifies himself in his house and then walks towards one of the houses of Allah (namely the mosque) to fulfill the obligations that Allah has made obligatory, then one of his steps will erase sins and other footsteps will elevate his rank.” [HR. Muslim No. 666].

So, someone who goes to the mosque will get two virtues, that is, his sins will be erased, and his degree will be exalted.

4. Returning from the mosque will be recorded (same) as leaving.

Narrated in a hadith below:

عَنْ أُبَىِّ بْنِ كَعْبٍ قَالَ كَانَ رَجُلٌ لاَ أَعْلَمُ رَجُلاً أَبْعَدَ مِنَ الْمَسْجِدِ مِنْهُ وَكَانَ لاَ تُخْطِئُهُ صَلاَةٌ – قَالَ – فَقِيلَ لَهُ أَوْ قُلْتُ لَهُ لَوِ اشْتَرَيْتَ حِمَارًا تَرْكَبُهُ فِى الظَّلْمَاءِ وَفِى الرَّمْضَاءِ . قَالَ مَا يَسُرُّنِى أَنَّ مَنْزِلِى إِلَى جَنْبِ الْمَسْجِدِ إِنِّى أُرِيدُ أَنْ يُكْتَبَ لِى مَمْشَاىَ إِلَى الْمَسْجِدِ وَرُجُوعِى إِذَا رَجَعْتُ إِلَى أَهْلِى. فَقَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ -صلى الله عليه وسلم- « قَدْ جَمَعَ اللَّهُ لَكَ ذَلِكَ كُلَّهُ »

“There used to be someone I didn’t know anyone who was far away from the mosque besides him. But he never missed prayer. Then someone said to him or I said to him myself, “How about you buy a donkey to ride when it’s dark and when the ground is hot.” The person then replied, “I’m not happy if my house is next to the mosque. I want it to be recorded for me my steps towards the mosque and my steps when I go back to my family.” Then, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wasallam said, “Indeed Allah has recorded for you all”. [HR. Muslim No. 663].

 

Prayer Entering the Mosque 

When we are going to enter the mosque, then there is a prayer that we must say. Which, in the prayer there are praise and blessings for the Messenger of Allah and his family. In addition, the prayer certainly contains a request to receive the Grace and protection of Allah Ta’ala and to have all sins forgiven.

When going to enter the mosque, it is sunnah with the right foot first, then read the following prayer:

بِسْمِ اللَّهِ وَالسَّلاَمُ عَلَى رَسُولِ اللَّهِ اللَّهُمَّ اغْفِرْ لِى ذُنُوبِى وَافْتَحْ لَِا أَبَِ

“Bismillah Wassalaamu ‘ala Rosulillah. Allohummaghfir Lii Dzunuubi Waftahlii Abwaaba Rohmatik”

Meaning: “In the name of Allah and greetings on the Messenger of Allah. O Allah, forgive my sins and open to me the door of Your mercy.

[HR. Tirmidhi No. 314 and Ibn Majah No. 771].

Prayer Exit the Mosque

Conversely, when going out of the mosque, it is sunnah with the left foot first, then read the following prayer:

بِسْمِ اللَّهِ وَالسَّلاَمُ عَلَى رَسُولِ اللَّهِ اللَّهُمَّ اغْفِرْ لِى ذُنُوبِى وَافْتَحْ لَِاْ أَبَِ

“Bismillah Wassalaamu ‘ala Rosulillah. Allahummaghfir Lii Dzunuubi Waftahlii Abwabaa Fadhlik”

Meaning: “In the name of Allah and greetings on the Messenger of Allah. O Allah, forgive my sins and open to me the door of Your grace.

[HR. Ibn Majah, no. 771 and Tirmidhi, no. 314].

The Virtue of Reading Prayers Entering and Exiting the Mosque

There are several virtues in reading prayers entering the mosque and prayers leaving the mosque, namely:

1. Get used to good manners

The mosque is the noble house of Allah, and it is a place that must be kept pure and clean, so by getting used to good manners when going to the mosque, it will also become a good habit in everyday life and will be recorded as a reward.

2. Get Prayers From Angels

The Prophet sallallaahu’alaihi wasallam said:

فَإِذَا دَخَلَ الْمَسْجِدَ كَانَ فيِ الصَّلاَةِ مَاكَانَتِ الصَّلاَةُ تَحْبِسُهُ واْلمَلاَئِكَةُ يُصَلُّوْنَ عَلىَ أَحَدِكُمْ مَادَامَ فِي مَجْلِسِهِ الَّذِي صَلىَّ فِيْهِ يَقُوْلُوْنَ: اَللّهُمَّ ارْحَمْهُ الّلهُمَّ اغْفِرْ لَهُ مَا لَمْ يُؤْذِ فِيْهِ مَا لَمْ يُحْدِثْ

Meaning: “When someone enters the mosque, then he is counted as being in prayer as long as the prayer is holding him (in the mosque), and the angels pray to one of you as long as he is in his place of prayer; They said, “O Allah, pour out mercy on him, O Allah, forgive him as long as he does not hurt others and does not have reason.” [HR. Bukhari and Muslim].

3. Get Shade from Allah on the Day of Resurrection

In a hadith, the Prophet sallallaahu’alaihi wasallam said:

يظلهم الله تعالى في ظل عرشه يوم لا ظل إلا ظله : شاب نشأ في عبادة الله تعالى ، وإمام مقسط ، ورجل دعته امرأة حسناء ذات حسب إلى نفسها فقال : إني أخاف الله رب العالمين ، ورجل أخفى يمينه عن شماله صدقته ، ورجل قلبه متعلق في مساجد Allah تعالى ، ورجلان تواخيا في الله ثم افترقا على ذلك » ( الطحاوى )

Meaning: “There are seven groups of people who will be shaded by Allah in the shade of His Throne on a day when there is no shade other than Allah’s shade, namely: (1) A young man who grew up in the worship of Allah, (2) A just and honest leader, (3) A man who is invited to have an affair by a beautiful and high-ranking woman, then he says “I fear Allah” (4) Someone who keeps the alms given by his right hand to his left hand a secret, (5) Someone whose heart is always moored in Allah’s mosques, (6) and (7) Two people who each intended to establish brotherhood for Allah’s sake, then in such circumstances they separated. [HR. Thahawi].

Such is the explanation regarding the etiquette of going to the mosque, which should be carried out by all Muslims, praying to enter the mosque, and the virtues contained therein. May Allah ta’ala give taufik, so that we can regularly pray in congregation at the mosque, especially for men.

If you want to find books about Islam, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Veronika Novi

Reference:

• https://www.orami.co.id/magazine/doa-entry-masjid
• https://jabar.tribunnews.com/2019/03/25/doa-entry-dan-keluar-masjid-lengkap-arab-dan-latin-memohon-dibukakan-door-rahmat
• https://www.detik.com/hikmah/doa-dan-hadits/d-6460972/bacaan-doa-enter-masjid-memohon-dibukakan-door-rahmat
• https://www.google.com/amp/s/www.cnnindonesia.com/gaya-hidup/20220603113033-289-804310/adab-dan-doa-entry-keluar-masjid-versi-lengkap/amp

In Islam, it is better before doing prayer activities first. Not only before doing activities, but also after doing activities. Likewise with praying before and after studying. On this occasion we will discuss prayers before studying and prayers after studying which can be practiced in everyday life. Come on, see the full explanation, Sinaumed’s.

Law of Study in Islam

The benefits of studying alone are many, besides getting knowledge, it can also drive away loneliness, rather than when we are bored, it’s better for us to study. Learning is one of the obligations of Muslims to seek knowledge, which is according to what is stated in the holy book Al-Quran and Hadith.

Learning also makes us smart, learning is also considered a worship with a high reward value for Allah SWT. Including if we go deeper into the problems of political science, religion and so on.

Rasulullah SAW once said about the importance of learning, namely:

“Whoever goes to seek knowledge, then he has been included in the sabilillah (people who uphold Allah’s religion) until he returns home.” (HR Tirmidhi)

The Importance of Prayer Before and After Learning

 

Prayer is one thing that is inherent in all religious people. Prayer is a means of conveying the contents of the heart to God Almighty. Especially for Muslims, praying is one of the activities that must be accustomed even from an early age. In fact, everything that is about to be done has its own prayer.

Before praying, of course, it is also necessary to understand the manners in praying, so that what is intended will be more perfect in practice. Learning and seeking knowledge is one thing that must be done by every human being. Learning is not only aimed at achieving academic value, but also to gain useful knowledge. To achieve this, every Muslim is encouraged to read a prayer after studying or before.

In fact, knowledge is also believed to be one of the important aspects for development in a country. Science is not only studied but also tried to be applied in everyday life. In addition, the existence of knowledge is expected to be able to make someone more familiar with nature, social life, and also humanity.

Learning is a person’s process towards goodness, starting from the goodness of knowledge, behavior, attitude, mentality, and other positive skills. In Islam, seeking knowledge actually has no age limit. As long as they are still alive, humans are obligated to seek knowledge.

In the Al-Qur’an letter al-Ghafir verse 60 has been alluded to the recommendation to pray. In this verse it is stated that Allah will grant the request of those who pray to Him.

“And your Lord said, ‘Pray to me, I will surely allow you. Indeed, those who are arrogant and do not want to worship Me will go to hell in a state of humiliation,’” this is the meaning of the verse.

In the process of acquiring knowledge, one must always study hard. Sometimes there is a temptation in learning, it can make someone lazy to study. Therefore, praying before studying and after studying is an important suggestion that needs to be implemented.

The obligation to seek knowledge and study has been explained in the hadith of the Prophet Muhammad quoted from the book 1100 Selected Hadiths by Muhammad Faiz Almath, which means:

“Demand knowledge and study for serenity and self-respect. Be humble to the person who taught you.” (HR. Thabrasion) A person will have provisions in living life and solving problems if he has extensive knowledge and insight. Useful knowledge is also a field of charity that is uninterrupted.

This is as narrated by Muslim, that Rasulullah SAW said:

“If someone dies, his deeds are cut off except for three things, namely almsgiving, knowledge that is utilized, or the prayer of a pious child.” (HR. Muslim number 1631).

Prayer Before Studying

1. Prayer Reading Before First Study

Amen

Robbi zidnii ‘ilman Warzuqnii fahmaa, Waj’alnii minash-shoolihiin

It means:

“O Allah, increase my knowledge and give me the ability to understand it, and make me one of Your pious servants.”

2. Prayer Reading Before Second Study

اَللّٰهُمَّ اخْرِجْنَا مِنْ ظُلُمَاتِ الْوَهْمِ وَاَكْرِمْنَا بِنُوْرِالْفَهْمِ وَافْتَحْ عَلَيْنَا بِمَعْرِفَتِكَوَسَهِّلْ لَنَآ اَبْوَابَ فَضْلِكَ يَآ اَرْحَمَ الرَّاحِمِيْنَ

Alloohumma Akhrijnaa Min Dzulumaatilwahmi Wa Akrimnaa binuuril Fahmi Waftah’alainaa Bima’rifatika Wasahhil Lanaa Abwaaba Fadl-lika Yes Arhamar Roohimiin

It means:

“O Allah, free us from all the darkness of prejudice, glorify us with the light of understanding, open the understanding of knowledge to us and open for us the doors of Your grace, O Most Merciful Substance.”

3. Prayer Reading Before the Third Study

رَضِتُ بِااللهِ رَبَا وَبِالْاِسْلاَمِ دِيْنَا وَبِمُحَمَّدٍ نَب above

Rodlittu billahiroba, Wabil islaamidiinaa, Wabimuhammadin Nabiyyaa warasuula, Robbi zidnii ilmaan warzuqnii fahmaan

It means:

“We are pleased that Allah SWT is my Lord, Islam is my religion, and the Prophet Muhammad is the Prophet and Messenger, O Allah, increase my knowledge and give me good understanding.”

Prayer After Study

Not only is it recommended to pray before studying, but Muslims are also encouraged to read prayers after studying. Here is a prayer after studying that you need to know

1. Prayer After First Study

???

Allahumma Arinal Haqqa Haqqan Warzuqnattiba’ahu. Wa Arinal batila Baa-Thilan Warzuqnaj tinaba bahu

Meaning: “O Allah, show us the truth so that we can follow it and show us the ugliness so that we can stay away from it.”

2. Prayer After Second Study

اَللّٰهُمَّ اِنِّى اِسْتَocked

Allaahumma innii astaudi’uka maa ‘allamtaniihi fardud-hu ilayya’inda haajatii wa laa tansani hihi yaa robbal ‘alamiin

Meaning: “O Allah, I have actually entrusted to You the knowledge that You have taught me, and return it to me when I need it back and do not forget me to that knowledge, O Lord, call upon all the worlds.”

3. Prayer after the third study

رَبَّنَا انْفَعْنَا بِمَاعَلَمْتَنَا الَّذِيْ يَنْفَعُنَا وَزِدْنَا عِلْمًا وَالْحَمْدُلِلّٰهِ عَلَى عَلَى ِ

Rabbanan fa’naa bima ‘allamtana ladzi yanfa’una wa zidna ‘iman alhamdulillahi ‘ala kulli hal

Meaning: “O our Lord, make our knowledge useful knowledge, teach us about what is beneficial for us and add knowledge to us, all praise is only to Allah in every condition.”

The purpose of reading a prayer after studying is to get the pleasure of Allah SWT, so that the knowledge gained can benefit oneself and others. Besides that, prayer keeps us in mind of Allah, the Lord of the universe.

In this case, praying is part of the form of ethics, manners, and morals of a servant to Allah SWT. Therefore, don’t forget to pray every time you do something or afterward so that everything you do will be blessed by God.

Islam teaches every Muslim to always pray before or after doing any activity, including when studying. At a minimum, if you are going to do something, read “basmalah”. So that in learning to be protected from the temptations of Satan and given convenience and get the blessing of Allah SWT. Prayer before studying has the virtue of being given fluency and convenience in understanding the material being studied.

Manners and Procedures When Studying

Adab is needed in life, especially when we pray to Allah SWT. Adab in praying can be by facing the Qibla, reading hamdalah or praise as well as by Istighfar and Shalawat. You are also advised to pray in a soft and fearful voice and be sure that it will be fulfilled.

Adab or morals is something that is important in human life. With the existence of good manners, of course that is used in everyday life. From adab, a person will be glorified by Allah. In addition, indirectly will be respected by fellow human beings. Likewise in learning there are good manners in order to get the pleasure of Allah SWT.

In a hadith it is mentioned about adab for Muslims.

“There is nothing heavier on the scales of a believer on the Day of Resurrection than noble character.” (Narrated by Tirmidhi)

Before a Muslim carries out learning activities, it is necessary to carry out the following manners and procedures.

1. Intention to learn to seek the pleasure of Allah

When you want to learn, you must sincerely intend from the heart so that the knowledge we gain from the learning process can be of benefit to ourselves or to others.

2. Read the prayer before and after studying

After intending our hearts to study sincerely, we must read a prayer before studying first. Then, when studying is finished, we just recite the prayer after studying.

3. Concentration and don’t mess around while studying

When studying, we must concentrate and be serious in order to get good learning results.

4. Focus your eyes on the book or something you are studying

When studying, our eyes must focus on the book or something we are studying. Don’t let your mind wander.

Facts About Prayer

1. Prayer and Healing

Do you know that in the world of Western medicine and religious researchers are currently trying hard to prove the impact of praying for the cure of disease.

Praying regularly, it is alleged, can improve the quality of health and accelerate the healing of diseases. Usually those who pray and pray regularly are said to be less likely to develop cancer, heart disease and high blood pressure.

Indeed, the previous statement reaped many pros and cons. However, research in California has shown that those who are devout in their religion live an average of seven years longer. The phenomenon of prayer and healing is scientifically proven.

Whoever fully accepts God as the controller of his destiny, he will feel calmer, less stressed, and more socially attached. From this opinion, adherents of a devout religion can naturally distance themselves from the influence of alcohol, narcotics, deviant sexual practices and other crimes that can damage health.

2. Pray when getting kindness from others

Like saying “Alhamdulillah” is a word of praise to Allah SWT when we get something good or pleasure. There are manners or ethics that have become a habit and are highly recommended in Islam when there are people who have done good to us, that is, we must pray for that person.

The recommended prayer is “Jazakallahu khairan”, which means May Allah reward you with good.

The prayer is considered to be a compliment for people who have done good things. As well as this prayer is also the basis of a hadith narrated by At-Tirmidhi.

3. Understanding the Spirituality of Prayer

The great role of prayer in shaping the peace of the human soul. Prayer can strengthen the bond of love between Allah SWT and His obedient servants. “Prayer is the essence of worship,” said the Prophet Muhammad.

Prayer should be done facing the Qibla while raising both hands. After that, when you have finished praying to Allah SWT, wipe your hands over your face. The ethics of prayer was also explained again by Imam Ghazali (in his book, Ihya ‘Ulumuddin). According to him, in the human palm there is an energy that can be transferred to our faces.

Apart from that, there is also a hadith which says that when a child cries, the mother rubs her hand over the child’s face, then the child will stop crying.

The Best Place and Time To Pray

In addition to a good prayer for study, there is also a good place to pray. The following are good places for Muslims to pray:

1. In front of and inside the Kaaba
2. At the Prophet’s Mosque
3. Behind the tomb of Prophet Ibrahim AS
4. On the hills of Safa and Marwah
5. At Arafah, at Muzdalifah, at Mina and on the three sides of the Jamarat
6. In other noble places such as mosques or prayer rooms

The following are the best times, for a Muslim to pray:

1. Between the call to prayer and Iqamat
2. Before prayer time and after
3. The time of the last third of the night
4. All day Friday
5. Between Dzuhur and Asr, and Asr and Maghrib
6. When Khatam reads the Koran
7. When it rains
8. When doing tawaf
9. When facing the enemy on the battlefield
10. In praying, it is better to repeat 3 (three) times

Benefits of Praying

Prayer itself has many benefits, including:

1. Praying can make us feel better.

Prayer turns out to have powerful power in us to become more humble and surrender to Allah SWT.

There is a study on “prayer” which turned out to get amazing results. Praying can make us stay away from selfishness while increasing our humility.

2. Good for the heart and prolong life

By praying, usually our feelings will be calm. The calm actually helps in reducing stress in the mind. Remembering stress is one of the main causes of various diseases.

So it can be concluded that by praying, we will avoid stress and can make our lives longer.

3. Get forgiveness from Allah SWT

When praying, generally people will ask God for forgiveness for their sins in the prayer that is said.

If we pray earnestly, admit our mistakes, ask for forgiveness sincerely, God willing, our sins will be forgiven by Allah SWT.

4. Recovering emotionally and physically

Praying in fact can give suggestions by thinking that what is said in the prayer will not be impossible by Allah SWT. From this hope, it allows someone to avoid despair. This hopelessness can stress you out and make you sick.

Apart from being emotional, praying can also be felt physically by humans. For example, by praying, our stress hormones will be reduced, blood pressure will be controlled, thus making our immune system better.

5. Can cure disease

Prayer can be used as a healing process, especially in mental health problems. A study in Canada proves this and makes praying a self-reflection for patients so they can get a better life.

6. Eradicate feelings of loneliness

Prayer turns out to be an effective method for eradicating feelings of loneliness. Through prayer activities where there are no boundaries when communicating with God, our loneliness can be overcome slowly. When the feeling of loneliness is successfully driven away, then God willing, the depression we experience can be avoided.

Thus the discussion about prayer before study and prayer after study. We hope that all of the discussion above has made you accustomed to praying before and after studying. If you want to find a book about prayer, you can get it at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Parallel Circuits – The subject of physics teaches us the reasons for the occurrence of everyday phenomena that can make someone curious about it. It can be said that there is no incident or event that cannot be explained by this branch of natural science.

Sinaumed’s can ask a number of things about the phenomena around you, and you can be sure that these phenomena can be explained using physical theory. Starting from the existence of a rainbow, why water can boil, to the reasons behind the functioning of an electronic object.

Of course, you must already know the main reason why an electronic object can work, namely because of electricity. Even so, electricity itself cannot work alone, and requires a component that can channel its energy.

One such component is a circuit. And in this article, we will study one form of circuit behind the functioning of a number of electronic objects around us, namely parallel circuits.

Sinaumed’s will study definitions, some formulas, and any objects that apply parallel circuits to work properly. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Parallel Circuits

Parallel circuit is one of two types of electrical circuits that function to distribute electrical energy to an electronic object. Another circuit that also has the same function as a parallel circuit is called a series circuit.

Even though they have the same function, the applications of these two sets are different from each other. A parallel circuit in which there are a number of circuits, can be said to be more complicated when compared to a series circuit which only consists of one circuit.

In this article, Sinaumed’s will only focus on understanding the basics of parallel circuits in a simple, yet thorough manner. Meanwhile, discussion of the series will be explained in another article.

Coming back to parallel circuits, the components connected in this circuit are connected along multiple paths and each component has a voltage equal to the voltage across the network. The electric current through the network is also equal to the sum of the currents through each component.

However, if two or more components are connected in parallel, they have the same potential difference (voltage) across their ends. The difference that has the potential to occur in all components can be said to be of the same magnitude, so these differences are also fairly identical.

Moreover, the same amount of voltage will be applied to all the components in a parallel circuit. While the total current contained in a parallel circuit is the sum of the currents through each component.

Parallel circuits and series circuits are one of the topics that will always be found in physics subjects, especially in high school. You will definitely study this topic more deeply than when you were in elementary school. The book “Smart Book Physics for SMP/MTs Grades VII, VIII, IX” can help those of you who are in middle school if you have difficulties not only regarding circuit topics, but also in physics lessons in general.

 

Parallel Circuit Formula

Of course, almost every topic of discussion in physics requires calculations in order to find out exact numbers about something. Without exception, this also applies to the calculation of electric circuits, both parallel circuits and series circuits.

Earlier it was mentioned that parallel circuits are slightly more complicated than series circuits, because of the many components in them. Even so, Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to worry about learning the formulas for this parallel circuit, because if you are used to it, then you will be more fluent in understanding these formulas.

Not only that, you will also learn a few explanations about a number of figures who contributed to the field of electricity, so that their names are enshrined as units of several components of electrical circuits. Check out the explanation below.

1. Flow

The current in an electric circuit has the symbol “I”, and has the unit “amperes”. These units were taken from a French scientist named André-Marie Amperé, who played a major role in developing theories in the field of electrodynamics.

The formula regarding the current itself actually comes from Ohm’s Theory, which will also be alluded to when studying the resistance formula. Basically, the formula for calculating current in a parallel circuit can be written as follows:

I _Total = I ₁ + I ₂ + I ₃ + …..…. I _n = V ( ¹ / _R1 + ¹ / _R2 + ¹ / _R3 + ……… ¹ / _Rn )

2. Voltage

The voltage in an electrical circuit has the symbol “V”, and has the unit “volt”. This unit was taken from an Italian scientist named Alessandro Volta, who during his lifetime managed to discover various things about the field of electricity, one of which was the theory of electric voltage.

The formula regarding self-voltage is basically not that difficult to understand, because the sum of the voltages in a parallel circuit will be the same for each of its components. Basically, the formula for calculating the voltage in a parallel circuit can be written as follows:

V = V ₁ = V ₂ = V ₃ = V ₄ = ……… V _n

3. Barriers or Resistors

Barriers or resistors in electrical circuits have the symbol “R”, and have units of “ohm”. This unit is taken from a German scientist named Georg Ohm, who is also the creator of the theory of resistance or resistors.

The formula regarding the resistance or resistor itself is basically found by adding the reciprocal of the resistor number of each component and taking the reciprocal of that amount, so that the total will always be less than the resistor value. Basically, the formula for calculating resistance or resistors in parallel circuits can be written as follows:

¹ / _RTotal = ¹ / _R1 + ¹ / _R2 + ¹ / _R3 + ¹ / _R4 ……… ¹ / _Rn

Resistance or resistor itself is quite related to current, so sometimes we also need to look for electric current based on the information we find from the amount of voltage and resistance or resistor. For this, we will again use Ohm’s Theory, namely:

I = ^V / _R

In addition, there is also such a thing as electrical conductance when calculating resistance or resistors. Electrical conductance is the phenomenon by which electric current flows through materials such as metals and non-metals. Electrical conductance has the symbol “G” and has “siemens” units.

Electrical conductance has a complementary relationship with resistance or resistors in parallel circuits, so it can be found in some cases. Basically, the formula for calculating the electrical conductance in a parallel circuit can be written as follows:

G _total = G ₁ + G ₂ + G ₃ + G ₄ + …..…. G _n

4. Inductor

Inductors in electrical circuits have the symbol “L”, and have units of “henry”. These units were taken from a scientist from the United States named Joseph Henry, who in his time succeeded in discovering electromagnetic theory to be applied to various types of equipment.

The formula regarding the inductors themselves can basically be found using the principle that the total inductors is equal to the reciprocal of the sum of the reciprocals of the respective inductances. Basically, the formula for calculating inductors in parallel circuits can be written as follows:

¹ / _{L Total} = ¹ / _L1 + ¹ / _L2 + ¹ / _L3 + ¹ / _L4 ……… ¹ / _Ln

However, if the inductors are located in the vicinity of each other’s magnetic field, this formula cannot be used because there is a trade-off in each inductance. The magnetic field resulting from this mutual inductance is usually symbolized by the letter “M”.

The symbol “M” depends on how the magnetic fields in the inductor affect each other. The existence of the “M” symbol in the calculation of this inductor can be said to be quite complicated to understand, so it will not be discussed further in this article.

5. Capacitor

Capacitors in electrical circuits have the symbol “C”, and have units of units “farads”. These units were taken from a British scientist named Michael Faraday, a figure who was credited with discovering a number of theories and objects, especially in the fields of electromagnetics and electrochemistry.

The capacitor formula itself is basically the same as finding voltage, namely adding up the numbers contained in each capacitor component in an electric circuit. Basically, the formula for calculating capacitors in a parallel circuit can be written as follows:

C _total = C ₁ + C ₂ + C ₃ + C ₄ + …..…. Cn _{_}

Studying physics means that you are ready to deal with different formulas for each topic. However, if Sinaumed’s wants to try to learn these formulas slowly, it’s not impossible that you will master various kinds of physics formulas in the future. If you are still in high school and want to try to memorize and learn formulas, you can try reading the book “SMA Collection of SC Physics Complete Formulas”.

 

Examples of Objects Using Parallel Circuits

In our daily life, there are several objects that use parallel electrical circuits, including:

1.LED light

Light-Emitting Diode or also known as LED lights in Indonesian, is a type of lamp that will shine brighter, and often twinkle. The working principle of the LED lamp itself also applies parallel circuits, especially twinkling LED lights.

Sinaumed’s noticed, when one light bulb goes out, the other light bulbs don’t necessarily go out too. This is because the switch in the LED lamp has special branches, which is the principle of parallel circuits in an electronic object. In other words, the LED light can flicker and will not turn off even though there are parts that are not lit.

2. Traffic Lights

Traffic lights are also an example of an electronic object that functions using the parallel circuit principle. This object has a role in regulating traffic, by turning on a number of different color lights, namely red, yellow and green, as a guide for vehicles regarding when to stop and when to go.

Inside the traffic light, there is a detector or sensor that will move the switch and function to regulate when the lights should be on or off. These switches will work without being affected by other switches.

3. Fire Alarm

The third and final object to be discussed as an example of applying parallel circuits in everyday objects is the fire alarm. As the name implies, this object serves to inform someone of a fire in a building through a loud sound like a siren.

The way a fire alarm works is simply that it uses a kind of sensor to detect the presence of smoke which can potentially cause a fire. Fire alarms in buildings are usually connected from one floor to another, and may not necessarily go off on another floor if no smoke is detected on that floor.

Other Famous Physicists

In addition to the figures mentioned above, of course there are many more physicists who have contributed greatly to the advancement of physics. The theories and ideas they find help people to understand the reasons behind a phenomenon in everyday events.

Not only that, the theories and ideas that these physicists have developed have also succeeded in inspiring other scientists and inventors to apply their thoughts, and develop new theories and even create objects based on these theories.

Below, there are 3 physicists who succeeded in changing the world because they succeeded in discovering theories that had never been thought of before. This discussion about physicists is the last session in this article, and it is hoped that it will inspire Sinaumed’s to study and work harder like them.

1.Galileo Galilei

Technically, Galileo Galilei was not only a physicist but also an astronomer. Even so, this man from Italy continued to produce various kinds of findings throughout his life, to the extent that he was nicknamed the “Father of Modern Physics” because of his discoveries and theories that broke science at that time.

In addition to pioneering heliocentrism, namely the fact that the earth and other planets revolve around the sun, Galileo Galilei also succeeded in discovering several kinetic theories, which were later developed and perfected by other physicists after his time ended.

2. Isaac Newton

This physicist figure also managed to shock the world because of one of the theories he found. Isaac Newton, who is a man from England, is the developer of a number of well-known physical theories that are not only focused on physics, but also mathematics and chemistry.

A number of theories that Isaac Newton succeeded in developing include the theory of acceleration, the theory of optics, the theory of mechanics, and the theory of gravity. This scientist is also credited with developing the theory of calculus in the field of mathematics. He is considered one of the most influential physicists of all time.

3. Albert Einstein

It certainly won’t be complete if we don’t discuss the “Father of the Theory of Relativity”, Albert Einstein. This figure from Germany, although better known for his theory of relativity, apparently did not only develop that one theory, but there were other theories that Einstein developed throughout his life.

Call it the theory of brown movement, the theory of the Planck-Einstein relationship, and other Einstein’s theories which are as well known as the theory of relativity, namely the theory of mass-energy or E = mc². Besides Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein is also considered by many to be the most influential scientist in the world.

Albert Einstein’s theory of relativity is considered one of the greatest breakthroughs in physics. It’s not uncommon for ordinary people who don’t understand physics to be interested and want to try to find out about this theory. Sinaumed’s, who is also interested in studying the theory of relativity, can read a book by Albert Einstein himself, namely the book “Relativity: Special and General Theory”.

The discussion of physicists above closes the article regarding parallel circuits. After learning all about parallel circuits, starting from the definitions, formulas, and also the tools, we hope that Sinaumed’s will be more helpful in understanding this topic.

The key to physics is to always practice and be willing to understand topics in depth. If you feel that this article is still lacking, Sinaumed’s can try to find other articles or books to add to your understanding of the topic of parallel circuits.

If you want to find books that are suitable for the topic of parallel circuits, apart from the recommended books above, sinaumedia, #SahabatUnlimits, also has various other books to satisfy your curiosity about this topic which can be found at sinaumedia.com . Remember Sinaumed’s, you will get more knowledge and information #MoreWithReading.

Understanding Pancasila

Pancasila is the ideology and basis of the Indonesian nation state. Pancasila has become a basis for all decisions of the Indonesian nation. The ideology of this country is a reflection and personality of the Indonesian nation.

Pancasila is a basis or guideline in governing the Indonesian government and the life of the Indonesian people in the nation and state.

Pancasila is also often referred to as the basis and ideology of the state and is one of the four pillars of nationality, which consists of Pancasila, the 1945 Constitution, the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia, and Unity in Diversity which is explained in the Pancasila book.

 

1. Literal Understanding of Pancasila

Pancasila literally means five principles. Pancasila comes from Sanskrit, panca which means five, and sila which means foundation. Pancasila has been formulated by the founding ancestors of the Indonesian nation. With Pancasila, the Indonesian state has a foundation for a state. This foundation is used as a guide so that the Indonesian people are not easily influenced by other nations.

Pancasila as the basis of the state has the symbol of the golden Garuda bird. On the eagle’s chest are symbols for each precept, a star, a chain, a banyan tree, a bull’s head as well as rice and cotton.

2. Definition of Pancasila Etymologically

Pancasila is the foundation of the Indonesian state. Etymologically Pancasila comes from Sanskrit. In language, Moh. Yamin said that Pancasila consists of two words, namely panca and syila. Panca means five, while syila means basic if sila means rules of good behavior. The word was finally taken to be the word ‘susila’ in Indonesian.

Therefore, etymologically, what is meant by Pancasila is the panca syila with the short vowel i. In language it means the basis which has five elements. The term Pancasila was originally obtained from Buddhist literature from India. Tripitaka, the book of Buddhist teachings which consists of three books namely Suttha Pitaka, Abhidama Pitaka, and Vinaya Pitaka. In the concept of Buddhism, there is a moral teaching to reach nirvana with Samadhi. Each group has different moral obligations. These moral teachings are Dasasila, Saptasila and Pancasila.

According to the Buddhist concept, the moral teachings of Pancasila are five rules or five prohibitions that must be obeyed and implemented. Pancasila or the five rules are:

• Panatipata veramani sikhapadam samadiyani, this means do not take the lives of other living things. This is a prohibition against killing living beings.
• Dinna dana veramani sikhapadam, this means do not take things that are not given to us. This is an order not to steal or take other people’s things that are not ours.
• Kameshu micchacara veramani sikhapadam samadiyani, this means don’t have sex. This is an order not to commit adultery or have sex with someone who is not their partner.
• Musavada veramani sikhapadam samadiyani, this means do not say or utter false words. This is an injunction not to lie or say things that never happened.
• Sura meraya masjja pamada tikana veramani, this means don’t consume drinks that can make your mind go away. This is an order to stay away from drinks that can intoxicate and deprive the mind.

In ancient times, Indian culture had entered Indonesian territory through Hindu and Buddhist teachings. Since the Majapahit era, Buddhist teachings have entered Javanese literature, including the concept of Pancasila. It was from there that the word Pancasila, which came from Sanskrit, was absorbed by the ancient Javanese language. Even during the Majapahit era, the teachings of Shiva Hinduism and Mahayana Buddhism coexisted peacefully.

After the collapse of Majapahit came his time, Islam slowly began to spread throughout Indonesia. However, remnants of Buddhist teachings are still very strong in Javanese society. There is a moral teaching called Ma Lima or M 5. Named M 5 because all the moral teachings or five prohibitions start with the letter M. The five prohibitions are Mateni which means killing, Maling which means stealing, Madon which means adultery, drunkenness which means consuming liquor, and Main which is meant by gambling.

 

3. Definition of Pancasila in Terminology

Pancasila terminology has been used by Ir. Soekarno since June 1, 1945, when the BPUPKI trial took place. After the BPUPKI was disbanded because it was considered successful in carrying out its duties, a Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence was formed. PPKI was formed to continue BPUPKI’s tasks and prepare for Indonesian independence. After the proclamation was successfully carried out, the day after PPKI succeeded in ratifying the 1945 Constitution. At that time the Constitution consisted of the preamble to the 1945 Constitution and 37 articles.

The 1945 Constitution contains the Pancasila precepts, namely Belief in One God, Just and Civilized Humanity, Indonesian Unity, Democracy led by wisdom in deliberations/representation, and social justice for all Indonesian people. The Pancasila formulation has been ratified as the foundation of the Indonesian state.

Pancasila is used for self-development and the realization of ideals in accordance with existing rules. And this is discussed through the values ​​that exist in Pancasila and can be studied in the book Pancasila and Citizenship Education.

Previously, there were several proposed formulations. However, from the various proposed formulations, constitutionally valid Pancasila is the Pancasila formulation contained in the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution. This was also reinforced by Presidential Decree No. 12 dated April 13, 1968. In addition, there is also Decree No.XX/MPRS/1966 emphasized that the legal writing, pronunciation and formulation of Pancasila as the basis of the Indonesian state is what is contained in the 1945 Constitution.

4. Legal formulation of Pancasila

The legal formulation of Pancasila is the formulation contained in the preamble of the 1945 Constitution. This formulation was also ratified by Presidential Decree No. 12 dated 13 April 1968. In addition, there is also Decree No.XX/MPRS/1966. The legal formulation of Pancasila is:

• Belief in the one and only God
• Just and civilized humanity
• the unity of Indonesia
• Democracy led by wisdom in deliberations/representation.
• Social justice for all the people of Indonesia.

Definition of Value

Value is a process of one’s life that always experiences development. According to Soerjono Soekanto, value is an abstract concept that exists in humans. It also depends on the value that someone thinks is good or bad value. A good value will definitely describe a good person, otherwise a bad score will describe a bad person and is less liked by some groups of people.

According to Simanjuntak, value is a person’s or group’s thoughts on good behavior or bad behavior. This behavior arises because of the traditions adopted by the community. This tradition is carried out continuously and repeatedly. Meanwhile, Robert MZ Lawang argues that value is a thought that must be owned by everyone. However, these values ​​can change a person’s behavior. From there one’s life can be seen whether it is good or bad.

Value Traits

Social values ​​have characteristics, namely:

1. Value is created in a social environment.

Every human being will certainly continue to learn about values ​​over time. For example, according to someone, education up to university is very high, because it can achieve success. However, there are also those who think that education up to university is not a benchmark for achieving success. From the case above, it shows that value is not innate, but is created in the social environment.

2. Values ​​have a different influence on a person and society

Every human being certainly has a different outlook in life. This shows that the value gives a different influence on someone. For example like the example above. College is very influential for the success of one’s life. But there are also those who think friendship and a good environment can lead to success and are more important than a high degree.

3. Values ​​are formed continuously through acculturation and social interaction

In a person, a value will have a different value over time. For example, from the example above, someone considers a degree and education to a higher level to be very important values. But because over time a person meets new people, he will definitely have a different view of the values ​​he had before.

4. Values ​​involve human feelings

In carrying out a value, someone will involve feelings or emotions in it. For example, when you think college is important, then you will be willing to save for your child’s future so that your child doesn’t have to worry about taking education to a higher level.

 

Value Types

After knowing the various meanings of value from several experts and knowing their characteristics, here are the types of values ​​that exist.

1. Religious values

Religious values ​​are important values ​​for someone who adheres to a religion. Because these values ​​are related to the beliefs or religions adhered to by that individual. The source of religious values ​​comes from God who is believed. This religious value is used as a guide by someone from God.

2. Value Beauty

The value of beauty is an element of taste that comes from human beings. The value of beauty is also often referred to as aesthetic value. Beauty itself has a very broad meaning and of course everyone has different values ​​of beauty.

3. Truth Value

The value of truth is a value that is created by the human mind and also morals. This truth value has existed since birth, therefore the value of truth is often considered as the nature of God which has been given to all human beings.

4. Social Value

Social values ​​are values ​​that are always related to human actions. Social value is a value that already exists in a person. This social value can change the behavior or actions of a person.

5. Moral Values

Moral values ​​are a view of a person’s desires. Moral values ​​are also considered as good values ​​in a person. To see a moral value can be seen from a conversation between several people. For example, when you overhear a conversation between a child and a mother. Generally, a child will use language that is more polite to their parents. This is due to differences in age and ethics that exist in people’s lives.

6. Material values

Material values ​​are values ​​that are useful for human physique. An example is food. For some people food has its own value. Delicious and delicious food can certainly make someone happy. Examples of some items that have other material values ​​are shelter, clothing and other basic human needs.

7. Vital values

Vital value is something that is useful for humans in carrying out their activities. For example, a chef will consider the stove, spatula and seasonings to be vital or important values. Because without these items a chef cannot work optimally.

The Noble Values ​​of Pancasila

Pancasila is formed from cultural values, customary values ​​and religious values ​​that already exist in Indonesian society. Pancasila is a source of values ​​in social and state life for the Indonesian nation. Pancasila is the moral basis or benchmark for behavior. In Pancasila there are three noble values, namely:

1. Basic Values

These basic values ​​are principles based on culture and values ​​within the Indonesian nation which are abstract in nature. This value tends not to change, but can always follow the changing times. The basic values ​​contained in Pancasila can be continuously interpreted and also implemented. If the basic values ​​of Pancasila are reinterpreted, new values ​​will be obtained that can be implemented according to the times. The basic values ​​in Pancasila are divinity, humanity, unity, democracy and justice.

These values ​​form the basis of state philosophy as well as the philosophy of the Indonesian nation that exists today. Understand more deeply through the book Pancasila by Drs. H. Mahpudin Noor.

 

2. Instrumental Value

Instrumental values ​​are the elaboration of the basic values ​​in Pancasila. These instrumental values ​​take the form of social norms and legal norms. The instrumental values ​​of Pancasila are the 1945 Constitution, MPR Decree, UU no. 2 of 1999 which discusses political parties, Law No. 39 of 1999 which discusses human rights, and others.

3. The Value of Praxis

Value praxis is a further elaboration of basic values ​​and instrumental values. This value is applied in everyday life in the lives of Indonesian people.

Because praxis values ​​are the elaboration of basic values ​​and instrumental values, implementing praxis values ​​should not deviate from these two values.

The meaning or meaning of Pancasila which is used as the way of life of the Indonesian nation consists of the crystallization of life experiences in the course of the history of the Indonesian nation which has shaped attitudes, character, behavior, values, philosophical views, morals, ethics which are discussed in the book Pancasila Democracy System Second Edition.

An example of the value of praxis as the practice of the Pancasila precepts is making friends with everyone regardless of ethnicity and religion, working together and helping each other, respecting the differences that exist in humans.

The Meaning of Pancasila as a Source of Value

The acceptance of Pancasila as the basis of the state and national ideology brings a logical consequence that Pancasila values ​​are used as the basic foundation, the fundamental basis for the administration of the Indonesian state. As discussed in the second chapter of the Pancasila Character Person book which consists of various other discussion of Pancasila divided into 7 sections.

Every precept in Pancasila contains different values, but all of these values ​​are one unit. The following are the values ​​contained in Pancasila.

1. Divine Values

In this first precept, there is a value that the Indonesian state was founded on divine values. Indonesian society itself adheres to many religions, or a pluralistic society. There are Islam, Christianity, Catholicism, Buddhism, Hinduism, Confucianism. With this first precept being the basis for the other four precepts. The meaning of this first precept is to believe in God Almighty with each other’s beliefs and mutual respect for the beliefs of others.

2. Human Values

In this second precept contains human values. This human value is the basis for carrying out the life of the nation and state. With these precepts it is hoped that the Indonesian state must always uphold human values, human dignity as creatures that have manners.

3. The Value of Unity

In this third precept contains the value of unity. This value means that the state is a community of life among the elements in society such as ethnicity, religion and race. This is meant that the differences that exist in Indonesian society are not a conflict that can divide the Indonesian nation.

4. Community Value

In this fourth precept there is a populist value in it. This value of justice means that in running the Indonesian state, democracy must be prioritized. The state must also give freedom but still be accompanied by mutual responsibility towards one another. In this fourth precept, there is also the intention that the Indonesian people and state must recognize and accept the differences that exist so that these differences do not become a problem in the life of the nation and state.

5. Value of Justice

In the fifth precept there is a value of justice in it. This value is a state goal to live in one goal. This justice must be realized in the Indonesian state. Therefore, Indonesian society must be fair to others, fair to themselves and not forgetting the individual’s relationship with God Almighty.

In its application, we as a society and the nation of Indonesia must always animate and reflect the values ​​contained in the 5 precepts of Pancasila and this can be learned through the Pancasila Existence & Actualization book.

 

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

If you want to dig more about Pancasila in a more comprehensive manner, have the book immediately at www.sinaumedia.com.

1. Pancasila Education

Buy now

2. Pancasila Philosophy of National Islamic Epistemology

Buy now

3. Common Home Pancasila

Buy now

Every sea in the Indonesian region has its own boundaries. Likewise with the maritime boundary of the island of Borneo. Then, do you already know the sea boundaries of the island of Borneo? On this occasion, we will discuss more about the island of Borneo. So, keep reading this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Geographical Location of Borneo Island

The island of Borneo is located in Southeast Asia, to the west of the Pacific Ocean and to the east of the Java Sea. This island is part of Indonesia and is divided into five provinces, namely West Kalimantan, Central Kalimantan, South Kalimantan, East Kalimantan and North Kalimantan.

Borneo Island is located between two other countries, namely Malaysia to the north and Brunei to the northeast. This island is also located near several other countries, such as the Philippines to the northwest and Singapore to the northeast.

Specifically, West Kalimantan is located between 3° North Latitude – 7° South Latitude and 109° East Longitude – 114° East Longitude. Central Kalimantan is located between 0° N – 5° S and 114° E – 119° E. South Kalimantan is located between 3° South Latitude – 7° South Latitude and 109° East Longitude – 114° East Longitude. East Kalimantan is located between 0° S – 5° S and 119° E – 124° E. North Kalimantan is located between 3° South Latitude – 7° South Latitude and 124° East Longitude – 129° East Longitude.

To find out the geographical location of the island of Borneo more specifically, you can use tools such as maps or location applications. Maps can help you understand the geographic location of the island of Borneo more clearly, as well as understand the locations of the areas within it.

Geographical Conditions of Kalimantan Island

The island of Borneo has quite complex geographical conditions with a variety of reliefs consisting of mountains, lowlands and large rivers.

The lowlands on the island of Borneo are found along the coast and around several major rivers, such as the Barito, Kapuas, and Mahakam rivers. These plains generally consist of fertile soil with high rainfall, making it an area suitable for agriculture.

Mountains on the island of Borneo are in the central and western parts of the island. This mountain range consists of active volcanoes such as Mount Merbabu, Mount Lawu and Mount Semeru, as well as non-volcanic mountains such as Mount Sumbing and Mount Ciremai. These mountains have a high altitude, with the highest peak on the island of Borneo being Mount Trusmadi which has a height of about 2,642 meters above sea level.

The major rivers on the island of Borneo are one of the important geographical features for the life of the people on this island. The largest rivers on the island of Borneo are the Kapuas River, the Barito River and the Mahakam River. These rivers are an important source of water for the life of the surrounding community, as well as natural resources such as fish and wood.

In addition, Kalimantan Island also has a tropical climate with an average temperature of around 27 degrees Celsius. This island has two seasons, namely the dry season and the rainy season. The dry season usually occurs from April to October, while the rainy season usually occurs from November to March. Rainfall on the island of Borneo is quite high, with an average of around 2,500 millimeters per year.

Kalimantan Island is also one of the largest islands in Indonesia which is rich in natural resources, especially wood and oil resources. In addition, this island is also one of the largest centers of agricultural production in Indonesia, especially in the production of coffee, tea and palm oil. Kalimantan Island is also one of the most popular tourist attractions in Indonesia.

Dry tropical climate is found in a small part of the island of Borneo, especially in the western and southern coastal areas. In these areas, rainfall is less than in the wet tropics, ranging from 1,000 mm to 2,000 mm per year. The dry season in this area usually occurs between May and October. The average air temperature is around 26-28 degrees Celsius, with relatively low humidity.

In general, the climate in Borneo is quite stable, with little difference in temperature between summer and winter.

Kalimantan Island is one of the most populous islands in Indonesia with a population of around 19 million people. The population of Kalimantan consists of various ethnic groups with diverse languages ​​and cultures. The most widely spoken language in Kalimantan is Indonesian, but there are also several regional languages ​​spoken by the local community.

There are many tribes living in Borneo, each with a different culture, customs and language. Some of the well-known tribes in Indonesian Borneo are the Dayak, Banjar, Bugis, and Kutai.

The Dayak are the largest tribe in Kalimantan and are spread across the island. They are famous for their carving art and traditional dances.

Banjar is a tribe that lives in the headwaters of the river in South Kalimantan and is famous for its traditional dance and music.

The Bugis are a tribe living in South Kalimantan and are famous for their abilities in trade and maritime affairs.

Kutai is a tribe that lives in East Kalimantan and is famous for its rich culture and history. They are also famous for their carving art and traditional dances.

In Borneo, Malaysia and Brunei, there are several tribes that also have rich culture and customs, such as the Iban in Sarawak, the Bidayuh in Sabah, and Dusun in Brunei.

Kalimantan Island is one of the largest islands in Indonesia which is rich in natural resources, especially timber and petroleum resources. This island is also one of the largest centers of agricultural production in Indonesia, especially in the production of coffee, tea and palm oil. Kalimantan Island is also one of the most popular tourist attractions in Indonesia, with various natural and cultural beauties.

Kalimantan Island Area

The area of ​​Kalimantan Island is around 539,000 square kilometers, which is about 7% of Indonesia’s area. The island is about 1,600 kilometers long and about 800 kilometers wide.

Kalimantan Island is divided into two parts by the Mahakam River, namely West Kalimantan on the west side of the river and East Kalimantan on the east side of the river. The area of ​​West Kalimantan is around 147,000 square kilometers, while the area of ​​East Kalimantan is around 392,000 square kilometers.

Central Kalimantan is located in the center of the island of Borneo and has an area of ​​around 141,000 square kilometers. South Kalimantan is located in the south of the island of Borneo and has an area of ​​around 37,000 square kilometers. North Kalimantan is located in the north of Borneo Island and has an area of ​​around 14,000 square kilometers.

Kalimantan Island is the fourth largest island in the world after Papua Island, Madagascar Island, and Sumatra Island. This island is also the fourth largest island in Indonesia after Papua Island, Sumatra Island and Java Island. The area of ​​Borneo Island is about three times larger than Java Island, which is Indonesia’s second largest island.

Topography of Borneo Island

Kalimantan is an island located in Indonesia. This island is part of the Asian continent which is located southwest of Sumatra Island. Kalimantan is divided into five provinces, namely West Kalimantan, Central Kalimantan, South Kalimantan, East Kalimantan and North Kalimantan.

Geographically, Kalimantan is an island located on the Sunda tectonic plate and has many active volcanoes. Most of the island consists of lowlands and extensive tropical rainforest. The major rivers that flow in Kalimantan, such as the Kapuas River and the Barito River, are important sources of water for life on this island.

Borneo is also one of the largest islands in the world, with an area of ​​around 743,000 square kilometers. This island has a long coastline with several shallow bays. Along the coast there is a mangrove forest which is a habitat for various types of plants and animals.

Demographically, Kalimantan is an island consisting of various ethnicities and religions. The population of Kalimantan consists of several ethnic groups, such as the Dayak, Banjar, Bugis and Javanese. Each of these ethnic groups has different cultures and traditions. In addition, the population of Kalimantan also consists of various religions, such as Islam, Christianity and Hinduism.

Rivers in Kalimantan Island

The rivers on the island of Borneo are quite fast and have a significant contribution to the ecosystem and the lives of the people around them. Some of the major rivers on the island of Borneo include:

1. Kapuas River

This river is the longest river in Indonesia and is the main river in West Kalimantan Province. The Kapuas River is about 1,143 km long and flows into the Kapuas Bay in the South China Sea.

2. Mahakam River

This river is the largest river in East Kalimantan Province and is a source of water for the surrounding community. The Mahakam River is about 900 km long and flows into the Flores Sea.

3. Barito River

This river is the largest river in South Kalimantan Province and is a source of water for the surrounding community. The Barito River is about 1,150 km long and flows into Banjarmasin Bay in the Java Sea.

4. Kahayan River

This river is the largest river in Central Kalimantan Province and is a source of water for the surrounding community. The Kahayan River is about 850 km long and flows into the Sulawesi Sea.

5. Sebangau River

This river is the largest river in Central Kalimantan Province and is a source of water for the surrounding community. The Sebangau River is about 400 km long and flows into the Sulawesi Sea.

Borneo Island Sea Boundaries

The sea boundary of the island of Borneo is the line that limits the mainland of the island of Borneo to the sea. This sea boundary is the boundary between the territory of Indonesia and the territory of other countries. This sea boundary consists of the territorial sea baseline, the exclusive economic zone (EEZ) boundary line, and the offshore boundary line.

The baseline of the territorial sea is the line that marks the limits of Indonesia’s authority over the territorial sea. This line is closest to land and is usually 12 miles (22.2 km) from the baseline.

The EEZ boundary line is the line that marks the limit of Indonesia’s power over the exclusive economic zone. The exclusive economic zone is an area that gives Indonesia the right to control the exploitation of natural resources within it, including living resources in the sea, such as fish and oil. The EEZ is 200 miles (370.4 km) from the baseline of the territorial sea.

The offshore boundary line is the line that marks the limit of Indonesia’s authority over the offshore area. Offshore areas are areas that are not controlled by any country and are usually used for research and exploration of natural resources, such as oil and gas. The offshore boundary line is normally 350 miles (633 km) from the baseline of the territorial sea.

The maritime boundaries of the island of Kalimantan are determined based on the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) which is an international law that regulates maritime boundaries and the rights of states over the sea. This law has been signed by Indonesia and is part of Indonesian national law.

Kalimantan is an island located in Indonesia. The sea boundaries of the island of Borneo consist of:

1. Makassar Strait

The Makassar Strait is a strait that separates the island of Borneo from the island of Sulawesi.

2. Karimata Strait

The Karimata Strait is a strait that separates the island of Borneo from the island of Sumatra.

3. Natuna Sea

The Natuna Sea is a sea located to the north of the island of Borneo, which separates it from Singapore.

4. Java Sea

The Java Sea is a sea located east of the island of Borneo, which separates it from Java Island.

5. South China Sea

The South China Sea is a sea located south of the island of Borneo, which separates it from countries in Southeast Asia such as Malaysia and the Philippines.

6. Pacific Ocean 

The Pacific Ocean is the sea located west of the island of Borneo, which separates it from countries in Southeast Asia such as Brunei and the Solomon Islands.

Conclusion

The island of Borneo is located in Southeast Asia, to the west of the Pacific Ocean and to the east of the Java Sea. This island is part of Indonesia and is divided into five provinces, namely West Kalimantan, Central Kalimantan, South Kalimantan, East Kalimantan and North Kalimantan.

Borneo Island is located between two other countries, namely Malaysia to the north and Brunei to the northeast. This island is also located near several other countries, such as the Philippines to the northwest and Singapore to the northeast.

So, Sinaumed’s, our article about the maritime boundaries of the island of Kalimantan has been completed. After knowing the geographical location of the island of Kalimantan, the geographical conditions, the sea boundaries, the condition of the island of Kalimantan, is Sinaumed’s interested in learning more about the island of Kalimantan? Or are you interested in studying the geography of the islands in Indonesia?

sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits, participates in providing knowledge and information, therefore sinaumedia presents books that can add to the knowledge and information that readers need.

If sinaumedia friends are interested and want to learn more about the islands in Indonesia, then sinaumedia.com is ready to accompany and fill your reading with the books available at sinaumedia.

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Mutual

Reference:

• https://kumparan.com/berita-hari-ini/condition-geographical-island-kalimantan-berdasarkan-peta-1tosdHLLNpn/full
• https://travel.detik.com/travel-news/d-5804917/condition-geography-island-kalimantan-berdasarkan-peta- already-tahu
• https://regional.kompas.com/read/2022/05/16/060000378/mengenal-pulau-kalimantan-condition-geography-suku-dan-language?page=all
• https://tirto.id/condition-geography-island-kalimantan-berdasarkan-peta-bentang-alam-gjAy

Definition of Fair – Justice is one of the things that must be realized in everyday life. Every human being must act fairly so as not to take away the rights of others. As a result, if other people’s rights are taken away, that person will be miserable and experience difficulties in living life.

Justice is the right of all living things. If this is not achieved then there will be inequality in life. This can pose a threat of even prolonged conflict.

The following will explain the concept of fairness to its benefits for life. The following explanation has been summarized from various pages on the internet.

Fair Definition

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), fair is interpreted as equal weight; not heavy-side; impartial; side with the right; stick to the truth; duly; not arbitrary.

In general, fair is interpreted as an attitude of being honest, impartial to certain parties and acting objectively based on general truth. In language, the word “fair” comes from Arabic which means in the middle, straight, honest, and sincere. In being fair, humans must always consider the rights and obligations of everyone.

For example, a job in a team is divided not evenly, but according to the limits of each ability. Simply put, tasks are divided equally, according to their respective portions.

Meanwhile, the purpose of doing justice is to create harmony and synergy in human life. Justice must be done to anyone, both to God, oneself, other people, other living things, and the universe.

If justice cannot be obtained by all people, there will be inequality and even climate damage. For example, development on the island of Java is very advanced, while in Papua or other small islands it is not carried out too massively.

Even in nature, humans often behave unfairly. For example by building tall buildings or other developments by ignoring natural conditions. The result is global warming and the climate crisis.

Goenawan Mohamad in his writing in Tempo on the “Single Notes” rubric said that development is only felt by some people. The sparkling lights and technological advances are only felt by some humans. However, all humans, whether rich or poor, are affected by bad consequences, one of which is disease.

Meanwhile, the terminology of justice in the Qur’an is mentioned in various terms. Among them are ‘adl, qisth, mizan, hiss, qasd, or variations of indirect expression, meanwhile, the terminology of injustice is zulm, itsm, dhalal, and others. The word “justice” is often mentioned in the Koran after the words “Allah” and “Knowledge”.

Broadly speaking, fairness is interpreted as a condition in which there is equal treatment before the law, equal rights to compensation, right to live properly, right to enjoy development and no parties are harmed and there is balance in every aspect of life.

In Islam, justice is interpreted as not tyrannizing and not being wronged. In other Islamic treasures, the justice referred to is divine justice. This means that justice is inseparable from morality and is based on absolute values ​​revealed by God and human acceptance of these values ​​is an obligation.

Murtadha Mutahhari interprets justice as a state of balance. In a society there are various parts that lead to a certain goal. Therefore, there are many conditions. With the fulfillment of these conditions, the community group can survive and can give the desired influence from it, and can fulfill the tasks assigned to it.

 

Fair Types

In Islam, justice is grouped into several categories as follows.

• Fair to Allah SWT by making_ him the only substance that is worshiped and obeyed by all His commands and stay away from His prohibitions.
• Be fair to yourself by placing yourself in the right, good, and right way. Also be honest with yourself. Also, don’t hurt yourself, try to stay healthy, and fulfill your own needs both spiritually and physically.
• Fair to other creatures and the environment. All God’s creatures must get justice without exception. As a human being who has lust, of course it is very difficult to hold back. One way to keep behaving fairly is by prioritizing the interests of many parties, including the environment, rather than following their own desires.
• Fair to others. As social beings, humans need each other. Individually or in groups, humans must not take away the rights of other living things. The goal, so that each living creature can ensure the continuity of his life in peace.

Equitable Derivative Values ​​in Islam

The concept of justice is also contained in the Koran. In Islam what justice means is not tyrannical and not tyrannized. Therefore, fair can be derived to various derived values ​​as follows.

1. Compensation Equation

The compensation equation is the most commonly used sense of fairness. In this concept, justice is interpreted as someone who must provide commensurate compensation to other parties in accordance with the sacrifices that have been made.

It is this sacrifice that has been made that gives rise to the right of someone who has made the sacrifice to get a reward equal to the victim.

The following are fair terms according to Islam and the Koran.

Terms in the Koran	Understanding According to Islam
‘adl	· Equation of reply (Quantitative) · Human Equality (Qualitative) · Equality before the law and the law · Truth, Honesty, Proportional · Ransom and sanctification
qist	· Fair distribution · Act and behave fairly and proportionally
Qasd	· Honesty and straightness · Simplicity · Economical · Courage
Qawwam	· Straightness · Honesty
hiss	· Fair distribution · Clarity, brightness
Mizan	· Balance · Response equation
Wasat	· Moderate · Middle Best, selected, commendable

 

2. Legal Equations

Legal equality implies that everyone must be treated equally before the law. There should be no discrimination against a person before the law on any basis.

In the economic context, everyone must be treated the same in every transaction activity. There is no reason to exaggerate the rights of one group over another just because of the different conditions of the two groups.

 

3. Moderate

Moderate is interpreted as a middle position. Fair values ​​can be considered to have been applied when the person concerned is able to position himself in the middle position.

This gives an implication that someone must take a middle position. This means not making decisions that are too burdensome or lighten one party. For example in terms of compensation.

4. Proportional

Fair does not always mean equal rights. However, this right is adjusted to the size of each individual or proportional to the level of need, sacrifice, ability, responsibility or attribution given by someone.

Proportion is also related to income distribution. A distribution does not always have to be even. However, it is based on the size of each existing individual.

Example of Fair Deeds

Doing justice can be done from the smallest environment, such as family. Then, develop into a larger environment, such as schools, communities, and countries. Here are some examples of fair behavior as reported from the Lessons.co.id page.

• Give pocket money to children according to their needs and portions.
• Loves all family members impartially.
• Carry out rights and obligations in any environment in a balanced manner.
• Make friends and neighbors with anyone regardless of background.
• Doing trade honestly is like not reducing the measure of the scales.
• Trying a legal case with a wise attitude and the fairest decision possible.
• Study hard, diligently, and diligently.
• Help each other to all humans.
• Diligent tithe and pay taxes to fulfill the rights of others.

Benefits of Behaving Fairly

Being fair provides benefits for anyone who goes through it. Launching from the Maxmanroe.com page, here are some fair benefits that can be felt by every individual who practices it.

1. Prevent Splits

Someone who behaves unfairly has the potential to divide an organization, community, and even a country. In particular, those in positions of authority must act fairly.

If a leader or role model cannot do justice, division will occur. When injustice arises, it will potentially cause resistance or rebellion from those who feel aggrieved. This will pose a threat of division within a community group.

2. Simplify All Affairs

Fair becomes one of the commendable attitudes and is included in the act of righteousness. Therefore, every human being who is fair will always be facilitated in all his affairs. Those who behave fairly will put all things in their portion without any irregularities or mistakes. Thus, the burden that must be carried is the same or does not carry the burden of others.

3. Minimizing Social Jealousy

Fair behavior can reduce social jealousy in society. They will easily realize their obligations and rights as humans. Thus, social life will be harmonious, peaceful, and prosperous. In fact, mutual trust will easily grow.

 

Until now, most of the Indonesian people may still not really understand the origins of our ancestors. But even so, an understanding emerged that most of the Indonesian people came from the Indochina region. Well, actually there are 4 theories of the origin of the Indonesian nation’s ancestors that were coined by several experts. Starting from those from within the country to those from abroad. In this article, we will discuss one theory of the origins of the Indonesian nation’s ancestors, namely the archipelago theory.

As we know that Indonesia is a large nation with various ethnicities, religions and races in it. That is why it is only natural that the Indonesian people also have various cultures. This includes natural wealth, ancestral property, and intellectual property. From the size of this nation, have you ever thought about how the theory of the origins of Indonesian ancestors existed?

As a nation’s generation, we must know the history of the theory of the origins of Indonesian ancestors. This is so that we can learn more about the development of the lifestyle of the Indonesian ancestors. We may also be more popular with the history of our own nation, starting from the Dutch colonization until finally this country became independent.

In fact, long before the colonial period, we also had a history of how we ended up having various ethnic groups and cultures spread across several regions. Starting from Sabang to Merauke, they have a long history until they finally became part of the Indonesian ethnic group. There are several origins of Indonesian ancestors which are quite popular among experts. However, in this article we will focus more on discussing the archipelago theory.

Understanding Archipelago Theory

The Nusantara theory is one of the theories in the distribution of humans in Indonesia. Where this theory says that the origins of humans who inhabit this archipelago do not come from outside, but they have lived and developed in the territory of Indonesia itself. This theory is also supported by scholars such as J. Crawford, K. Himly, Sutan Takdir Alisjahbana, and Gorys Keraf. However, it seems that this theory is less popular and not widely accepted by Indonesian people. For the basic theory of the archipelago itself, namely:

a. Malay and Javanese have a very high level of civilization. This level can only be achieved after a long cultural development. This shows that the Malay people do not come from anywhere, but originate and develop in the archipelago.

b. K. Himly disagrees with the opinion that Malay is allied with the Champa or Kampuchea languages. For him, the similarities that apply in these two languages ​​is a phenomenon that is “accidental”.

c. Ancient Humans Homo Soloensis and Homo Wajakensis in Java. The discovery of these ancient humans on the island of Java shows that there is a possibility that the Malays descended from these ancient humans, that is, they came from the island of Java.
d. The language that developed in the archipelago is the Austronesian language family, which has a very large difference from the languages ​​that developed in Central Asia, namely Indo-European languages.

Weaknesses of the Archipelago Theory

Even though there is a lot of evidence that underlies this archipelago theory, this theory still has some weaknesses. Experts who support other theories have found several remains that strengthen the evidence that the Indonesian people came from outside Indonesia. For example, there are similarities in the remains of tools from ancient times and the massive migration of early humans to Indonesia.

Theory of the Origin of Indonesian Ancestors

As we have discussed above, that there are four theories that you must understand about the origins of the Indonesian nation’s ancestors. After we discussed one theory above, namely the archipelago theory, now we will discuss three other theories, including:

1. Greek theory

The Yunan theory is a theory that reveals the origin of the ancestors of the Indonesian nation from the Chinese region, to be precise in the Yunan region. They believe that Indonesia’s ancestors left the Yunnan region around the headwaters of the Salween River and also the Mekong River, which had fertile soil. It is estimated that due to natural disasters and also attacks from other ethnic groups, therefore they moved to change their place of residence.

The ancestors of the Indonesian people had a fairly good maritime culture, namely as the inventor of the original outrigger boat model which was the hallmark of Indonesian ships at that time. The Austronesian people who were still included in the archipelago area then settled and were eventually referred to as the Indonesian Malay people.

These people are the direct ancestors of today’s Indonesian nation. Experts who agree with this theory are JR Logon, RH Geldern, JHC Kern, and JR Foster. The main basis of Yunan’s theory is the discovery of an old ax in the Indonesian archipelago which has the same characteristics as an old ax in the Southeast Asian region. This discovery indicates that there is a process of human migration in the Southeast Asian region to the Indonesian Archipelago. The existence of human migration is caused by the pressure factor of a stronger nation. Based on this incident, this Yunan theory indicates that there were three waves of arrival, namely, Proto Malay, Deutro Malay, and Melanesoid.

The things that underlie Yunan’s subsequent theory are the discovery of similarities in the language used by people in the archipelago with the language used by Cambodian people, namely Polynesian Malay. This phenomenon indicates that the people of Cambodia came from Yunnan by way of going down the Mekong River.

The flow of migration or movement was then continued when most of them continued the movement to the archipelago. Thus, the similarity of the Malay language with the Cham language in Cambodia indicates that there is a connection with the Greek plains. In addition, this theory is also supported by domestic experts, namely Moh. Ali who said that the theory of the origin of the ancestors of the Indonesian people was that humans came from Yunnan. This was based on allegations of displacement or migration of people in the Mongol area to the south because of pressure from other nations, especially nations that were stronger or those in power at that time.

The three displacement waves in the Greek theory are explained in more detail as follows:

a. Proto Malay

Proto Malays or old Malays are people from the archipelago who came from Asia who first came to the archipelago around 1500 BC. The Proto-Malays entered the archipelago through two routes, namely the land route through Malaysia-Sumatra and the eastern route through the Philippines-Sulawesi. Where the Proto-Malays have a higher culture than the previous ancient humans. This culture is a new stone or what is called the neolithic era where the stones have been refined. Based on Van Heekeren’s research in Kalumpang, there has been a combination of the square and oval ax traditions.

This tradition was brought down by Austronesian people who came from the north, namely through the Philippines-Sulawesi. It should be understood that the descendants of the original Proto Malay people are the Toraja and Dayak tribes who belong to the Indonesian ethnic group.

b. Deutero Malays

The Deutero Malays or known as Young Malays have succeeded in pushing and eventually assimilating with their predecessor nation, namely the Proto Malays. This happened in the period around 400 to 300 S, to be precise during the second wave of Indonesian ancestors coming to the archipelago. These young Malays entered the archipelago through the western route by taking the route from Yunnan, to be precise the Gulf of Tonkin, Vietnam, Peninsular Malaysia, and finally arrived in the archipelago. This nation already has a more advanced culture compared to its predecessor nation, namely the Proto-Malays. Because, they can already produce goods from bronze and iron.

For example, funnel axes, shoe axes, and also the shape of a nekara. Apart from metal culture, this nation has also begun to develop a megalithic culture. For example, making menhirs or stone monuments and terraced punden. The descendants of the Deutro Malays are the Javanese, Bugis and Malays who belong to the Indonesian ethnic group.

c. Melanesoid

This Melanesoid nation began to appear in the Papua region at the end of the ice age, namely 70,000 BC.

d. Primitive Nation

Prior to the arrival of various Malay groups in the archipelago, there were already several human groups who had lived in the archipelago. This group belongs to a primitive nation with a culture that is still simple. The following are some explanations about the primitive peoples in the archipelago, including:

– Pleistocene (Ancient) Man

Early humans at that time always lived a nomadic life or moved from place to place with limited abilities. Likewise with the culture they have, so that their style of life cannot be followed again. Except for a few aspects, such as the technology which is still simple or what is known as paleolithic technology.

– The Wedoid tribe

The remnants of the Wedoid tribe still exist today, namely the Sakai tribe in Siak and the Kubu tribe on the border of Jambi and Palembang. This group of tribes survive by collecting forest products and cultivating in a simple way. That is why it is difficult for the Wedoid tribe to adjust to modern society.

– Negroids

In the territory of Indonesia, the remains of this Negroid tribe are no longer found. However, there are still people in the interior of Malaysia and the Philippines who are descended from the Negroid tribe. The tribes included in the Negroid Tribe are the Semang Tribe in Peninsular Malaysia and also the Negrito Tribe in the Philippines.

2. Out Of Africa Theory

This out of Africa theory is a theory of the origins of the Indonesian nation’s ancestors which is more different from other versions of the theory. Where this one theory reveals that the origin of the ancestors of the Indonesian people came from Africa. This assumption comes from the study of genetics through research on mitochondrial DNA of female genes and also male genes. They then migrated from Africa to Australia, which is already close to the archipelago. This theory then reveals an assumption that African peoples have migrated or made moves towards West Asia in 50,000 -70,000 years ago. Around this tofu, the Earth is entering the end of the glacial era, when the sea level becomes shallower because the water is still in the form of glaciers.

At that time, it was possible for humans to cross the sea using only simple boats. The migration of Africans to Asia was then split into several groups. There are groups who live temporarily in the Middle East or Southwest Asia and there are also groups who migrate past the coast of the Arabian Peninsula to East Asia, India, Australia, including Indonesia.

This phenomenon was reinforced by the discovery of a male fossil in the Lake Mungo region. Not only that, there are also two paths that are thought to be the areas traveled by Africans at that time, namely the route to the Nile River Valley. The region crosses the Sinai Peninsula, then northwards through the Arabian Levant and also the route through the Red Sea.

3. Out Of Taiwan Theory

The theory of the origin of Indonesian ancestors on this one is almost the same as the previous theory. Where the out of Taiwan theory reveals that the origin of the Indonesian nation comes from the Famosa Islands or the territory that is Taiwan. This theory is supported by an expert named Harry Truman Simanjuntak who underlies the argument in this theory. The main basis of the first out of Taiwan theory is the absence of the same genetic pattern between Indonesian human chromosomes and Chinese humans. Still based on this theory, the language used and developed in the archipelago is a language that belongs to the Austronesian language family.

The language of this Austronesian family was used by the ancestors of the Indonesian nation, especially for people who settled on Formosa Island. Thus, in terms of language, it is clear that the Indonesian nation adopted Austronesian culture and developed it to become the Indonesian nation it is today.

That is an explanation of the theory of the origins of Indonesian ancestors, especially the archipelago theory. Of the several theories described above, which theory do you believe in the most?

For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about other theories of sovereignty, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Muallaq’s destiny – Humans are creatures created by Allah SWT. In practice as humans, there are many interesting things that Sinaumed’s can learn from human life itself. Among the tens of millions and billions of people on this planet, there are many different personalities. Including their way of life or the flow of their lives on this earth which we then know as destiny.

Some people cannot accept the destiny that God has given them. There are people who go through all the destiny that God has given to make their life more meaningful, exciting and positive. In principle, not all destiny is irreversible. In Islam, destiny is divided into two forms.

Namely destiny that cannot be avoided such as human birth or death (mubram) and destiny that can be changed or mualaq . Muallaq’s destiny is God’s provision contained in the leaves of angels such as old age, food, health, mate quoted from Raul Mahfuz . Believing in destiny is one of the pillars of faith.

Muslims must also believe in destiny. Has Sinaumed’s ever heard of the term Mualaq destiny in Islam? We know that this destiny can change throughout life. Check out the article below for a full understanding and a wider example of the fate or fate of the converts.

Understanding Destiny Muallaq

As previously explained, destiny refers to the provisions or will of Allah SWT. According to Islamic teachings, this includes everything that exists and happens on earth. As stated in Surah Al An’am verse 96 as follows:

فَالِقُ الْاِصْبَاحِۚ وَجَعَلَ الَّيْلَ سient

It means “He wakes up the morning and makes the night for rest, and (makes) the sun and the moon for reckoning. That is the decree of Allah, the Mighty, All-Knowing” ( Al An’am: 96 ).

Destiny itself is actually divided into two, with Muallak and Mubram. Muallaq’s destiny is God’s destiny that can still be changed by humans. The path consists of striving and striving for the path that is pleasing to Allah according to Islamic law. The argument is in the following letter Ar Rad verse 11:

لَهٗ مُعَقِّبٰتٌ مِّنْۢ بَيْنِ يَدَيْهِ وَمِنْ خَلْفِهٖ يَحْفَظُوْنَهٗ مِنْ اَمْرِ اللّٰهِ ۗاِنَّ اللّٰهَ لَا يُغَيِّرُ مَا بِقَوْمٍ حَتّٰى يُغَيِّرُوْا مَا بِاَنْفُسِهِمْۗ وَاِذَآ اَرَادَ اللّٰهُ بِقَوْمٍ سُوْۤءًا فَلَا مَرَدَّ لَهٗ ۚوَمَا لَهُمْ مِّنْ دُوْنِهٖ مِنْ وَّالٍ

It means “For him (man) there are angels who always take care of him in turn, from the front and behind him. They guarded it at the command of Allah. Surely Allah will not change the condition of a people before they change their own condition. And if Allah wills evil against a people, then no one can refuse it and there is no protector for them besides Him” (Ar Rad: 11).

Based on the verses of the Qur’an, one must believe that one can obtain any destiny if one sincerely strives or fights for that destiny, even if it is not absolute.

However, we must understand that we have roles that must be changed, but the end result is still God’s power. Mubram’s Fate is an absolute destiny which can never be changed, encompassing Birth, Death, Marriage and More

1. Understanding According to Language

Muallaq’s destiny can also be interpreted linguistically as an attempt to change destiny through hard work, perseverance and fervent prayer. In other words, humans can still intervene and change the destiny given by God according to their wishes, which can still change according to one’s efforts and efforts.

In this case humans are given the opportunity to determine their own destiny. Including how they need to achieve it. Muallaq’s destiny shows Allah SWT’s love for his people to get what they want. In this case, of course, you must remain blessed and in the way of Allah and not oppose his prohibitions.

2. Understanding According to Terms

The definition of the term Muallaq’s destiny is God’s provision which can still change according to the efforts and endeavors made by that person. This term is the opposite of mubram destiny which means it cannot be changed at all by human effort.

 

 

3. Definition According to Experts

The definition of the destiny of muallaq has also been put forward by experts, especially religious experts and in accordance with the Al-Quran and hadith as follows:

a. Based on QS. According to Ar-Ra`d 11

لَهُۥ مُعَقِّبَٰتٌ مِّنۢ بَيْنِ يَدَيْهِ وَمِنْ خَلْفِهِۦ يَحْفَظُونَهُۥ مِنْ أَمْرِ ٱللَّهِ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يُغَيِّرُ مَا بِقَوْمٍ حَتَّىٰ يُغَيِّرُوا۟ مَا بِأَنفُسِهِمْ ۗ وَإِذَآ أَرَادَ ٱللَّهُ بِقَوْمٍ سُوٓءًا فَلَا مَرَدَّ لَهُۥ ۚ وَمَا لَهُم مِّن دُونِهِۦ مِن وَالٍ

It means:

For humans there are angels who always follow him in turn, in front of him and behind him, they guard him at the behest of Allah. Indeed, Allah does not change the condition of a people until they change what is in themselves. And if Allah wills bad for a people, then no one can refuse it; and there is no protector for them besides Him.

b. Books on Islamic Religious Education and Character Education

Muallaq’s destiny means an order. A place where people still have roles and opportunities to change their destiny. Believing in destiny is one of the pillars of faith. Muslims must also believe in destiny. There are two types of destiny in Islam: Mubram’s destiny and Muallaq’s destiny .

Muallaq’s destiny can be changed through human endeavors such as by praying. In the Qur’an, Allah SWT says:

لاَ يَرُدُّ القَضَاءَ شَىءٌ إلاّ الدُّعَاءُ (رواه الترمذي)

“There is nothing that can reject Qadha except prayer” ( HR. at-Tirmidhi ).

In the Qur’an, Allah SWT says:

وَإِذَا سَأَلَكَ عِبَادِي عَنِّي فَإِنِّي قَرِيبٌ أُجِيبُ دَعْوَةَ الدَّاعِ إِذَا دَعَانِ فَلْيَسْتَجِيبُوا لِي وَلْيُؤْمِنُوا بِي لَعَلَّهُمْ يَرْشُدُونَ (البقرة: ) 186)

“And if My servants ask you (O Muhammad) about Me, then indeed I am near (not in the sense of distance), I grant the request of the one who prays if he asks Me. So let them ask for prayer to Me and have faith in Me, so that they may receive guidance” ( Surah al-Baqarah: 186 ).

That is, the one who prays is not in vain. He will surely obtain one of the three virtues. His sins were forgiven, his requests were granted, and he was saved for the future. These three virtues were very precious to him. Whereas Mubram’s destiny is God’s provision, it must happen and cannot be changed.

This destiny is only in the knowledge of God and no one knows it except Allah SWT. Examples of Mubram’s destiny are Death in Kafir (asy-Syaqawah) and Death in Faith (as-Saadah), and the provisions for both cases remain unchanged. A man who has been ordained by Allah to die in a state of faith, that’s what happened to him, never changes.

 

 

Examples of Destiny Muallaq

If some destinies cannot be changed at will, some destinies can be changed by one’s inner motives. The following is an example of the fate of a convert that Sinaumed’s can understand so that he can motivate himself even more to improve a destiny that you find very difficult and problematic:

1. Poor People Become Rich

First, because poor people have an inner urge to be rich. The person then adapts himself to the right lifestyle. For example, work hard, work smart, work hard day and night, run a business, and save money.

2. From Stupid to Smart

In another example, some stupid people fail academically. So they are always operating and are in the lower ranks. However, with an inner motivation to get good grades, he actually studies and takes classes here and there. So it is quite possible to get the best value from the start.

3. Inability to Become Skilled

Including people who are completely unable because they realize their limitations. Then the person wants to be a person who has special abilities. For example, you want to be a writer. Of course, there are many other examples of the fate of a person with a disability besides those mentioned above.

In short, Muallaq’s destiny is a destiny that can be changed by the will, desire, and effort of each individual. So, even if we don’t have the skills, if we are aware of it and understand how to handle it, we can master certain things by practicing and learning.

4. Own Health

Death is an absolute necessity, but the path to death is generally within our control. If the body is healthy, by the will of Allah SWT, we will suffer at the time of death. Health initiatives including managing diet, exercising, and maintaining cleanliness are some of the things we can do for our own health.

5. Financial Regulations

Allah has arranged for Muslims to provide the best part for everyone. It’s just that you can’t get it without maximum effort. For example, God wants you to be a millionaire, but you give up without trying to make it happen.

6. Wise Human Nature

Wisdom is a quality that can be acquired with time and effort. This is not simply giving up to accept destiny or surrendering to the flow of life. You have to try to learn from mistakes and have a good mindset. In addition, the ability to be honest with oneself and others also plays an important role.

The difference between Muallaq’s destiny and Mubram’s destiny

Regarding destiny, did Sinaumed’s know the difference between the terms mubram destiny and mualaq destiny ? A place where destiny can be changed by prayer, while there are also other fates that cannot be challenged by us. However, in discussing the differences in the fate of Mubram and Muallaq, there are those who argue that God’s inviolable destiny can be minimized.

God bless you. والدعاء ينفع في القضاء المبرم والقضاء المعلق. God bless you

It means:

“Prayer is useful for what has come and what has not come (from the sky). Bala will come and meet with prayer. Both (bala and prayer) always ‘fight’ until the Day of Resurrection. Prayer is useful for qadha mubram and qadha mualaq. Regarding the second (qadha mualaq), it is not impossible to eliminate what (decision) whose omission is dependent on prayer and it is possible to bring forth what (decision) whose livelihood is dependent on prayer,” (Seeing Syekh M Ibrahim Al-Bajuri, Tuhfatul Murid ala Jauharatut Tauhid , [Indonesian, Daru Ihyail Kutubil Arabiyyah: without year note] page 91).

Daru Ihyail Kutubil Arabiyyah, Syekh M Ibrahim Al-Fatih a convert to Baijuri, Tuhfatul Siswa ala Jauharatut Tauhid revealed that every prayer or request we make can ‘change’ the power that Allah SWT has ordained for us. In fact, unlike Muallaq’s fate , Mubram’s destiny cannot be changed by prayer.

However, it is believed that by continuing to pray, we can minimize the impact of the disaster caused by the fate of Mubram, we must believe that it is the best episode that Allah has given us.

وأما الأول فالدعاء وإن لم يرفعه لكن الله تعالى ينزل لطفه بالداعى كما إذا قضى عليه قضاء مبرما بأن ينزل عليه صخرة فإذا دعا الله تعالى حصل له اللطف بأن تصير الصخرة متفتتة كالرمل وتنزل عليه

It means:

“As for the first matter (qadha mubram), even though (the role of) prayer cannot eliminate disaster, Allah brings His tenderness to those who pray. For example, when Allah determines someone’s mubram qadha, that is an accident in the form of being crushed by a large rock, when someone prays to Allah, Allah’s gentleness comes to him, that is, a large stone that falls on him becomes crushed into pieces so that he feels it as just a grain of sand that falls on him. ,” (See Syekh M Ibrahim Al-Bajuri, Tuhfatul Murid ala Jauharatut Tauhid, [Indonesian, Daru Ihyail Kutubil Arabiyyah: without year note] page 91).

Don’t speculate about “ this or not ” which ultimately leads to suudzon to Allah. On the other hand, the fate of the converts comes in the form of joy and success, thanks to our prayers and efforts. Faith must always be strengthened. Don’t let pride grow in your heart, even if it’s just a seed.

Many people despair when their prayers and efforts do not meet expectations. Keep up your prayers and efforts because that’s all we have as servants of God. Allah never asks us to be successful, because He loves people who are never tired of the process. If Allah SWT has ordained A, then A will still happen.

However, if the person prays and performs good deeds, the level of destiny drops a little. For example, a person who is destined by Allah to be hit by a large rock for the good deeds and prayers he has done, he is still hit by a rock. The difference is that they only hit small rocks, not boulders.

Muallaq’s destiny is a destiny that can change its nature with the effort and sincerity of that person. With discipline and persistence, one can become a better person. So what is done is the result.

Meanwhile, mubram destiny is a decree from Allah SWT which is absolute and definitely applies and humans are not given a role to realize this destiny.

In short, mubram destiny is certain to happen or humans cannot avoid it anymore.
Hopefully this small overview of the fate of Mubram and Muallaq will give you the treasure of faith and faith in Allah SWT.

 

 

The Obligation of Faith Against Qadha and Qadar

Sinaumed’s needs to know that the obligation of faith to Qada and Qadar has been mentioned in an authentic hadith.

Rasulullah SAW said:

الإيْمَانُ أنْ تُؤْمِنَ با above

“Faith is that you believe in Allah, His Angels, His books, His Messengers, the Last Day, and you believe in Allah’s Qadr, both good and bad. ” ( Narrated by Muslim).

Qada means creation and Qadar means destiny or at-Tadbir . In relation to the term Qadah, this means that Allah’s provision for all is subject to Allah’s knowledge (al-‘Ilm) and Allah’s will (al-Mashi’ah). The time determined and desired by him for an event.

Qadar , on the other hand, means whatever happens to living beings, or whatever is called al-Makmur. Qadar includes everything that happens to all these creatures. Evil and good, piety and evil, faith and disbelief, obedience and disobedience, and so on.

So, that’s an explanation about the fate of the converts that Sinaumed’s needs to know in order to make a better sense of life. There are many ways to continue studying religion, including reading reference books at sinaumedia that you can choose from at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Duties of the Supreme Audit Agency – The Supreme Audit Agency or BPK is a high state institution in the Indonesian state administration system that has the authority to manage and be responsible for state finances.

The Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia as an institution formed to examine the management and responsibility of state finances which was formed based on the Third Amendment to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia. Article 23E states that to examine the management and responsibility of state finances, an Audit Board is held. Free and independent finance.

BPK members are elected by the DPR while still considering the DPD and then inaugurated by the President. To support its duties, BPK RI is supported by a set of laws in the field of State Finance, namely:

1. UU no. 17 of 2003 concerning State Finance;
2. UU no. 1 of 2004 concerning the State Treasury;
3. UU no. 15 of 2004 concerning Examination of State Financial Management and Responsibility.

CPC history

In Article 23 Paragraph (5) of 1945 it has been stipulated that in order to examine responsibilities related to State Finances, an Audit Board of Finance is held where the rules are determined by law. Then, the results of the financial audit are submitted to the DPR.

Based on the mandate contained in the 1945 Constitution, a Government Decree No. 11/OEM dated December 28, 1946 which contains the establishment of the Financial Audit Board.

At first, the BPK began working on January 1, 1947, at the time of its formation, the BPK had 9 employees chaired by 1 chairman who also served as a member, deputy chairman and 7 members of the BPK. The term of office of BPK members is 5 years and can be elected for 1 term of office. BPK is domiciled in the national capital and has representatives in every province.

Vision and Mission of the Audit Board of Indonesia

Vision:

Become a driving force for managing state finances to achieve state goals through quality and useful audits.

Mission:

1. Examine the management and accountability of state finances freely and independently;
2. Carry out organizational governance with integrity, independence and professionalism.

Duties of the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia

The duties of the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia (BPK) are regulated in the Law of the Republic of Indonesia Number 15 of 2006. The duties are as follows:

1. The BPK has the task of examining the management and accountability of state finances carried out by the Central Government, Regional Governments, other State Institutions, Bank Indonesia, State-Owned Enterprises, Public Service Agencies, Regional-Owned Enterprises and other institutions or agencies that manage state finances.
2. The implementation of the BPK audit was carried out on the basis of the Law on auditing the management and accountability of state finances.
3. Audits carried out by the BPK include performance, financial and audits with a specific purpose.
4. In carrying out audits of state financial management and responsibility, the BPK conducts discussions on audit findings with the objects examined in accordance with state financial audit standards.
5. In the event that an audit is carried out by a public accountant based on the provisions of the Law, the report on the results of the audit must be submitted to BPK and published.
6. The results of audits on the management and accountability of state finances are submitted to the DPD, DPR and DPRD. And also submit the results of the examination in writing to the President, Governor and Regents/Mayors.
7. For the purposes of following up on audit results, BPK also submits written audit results to the President, Governor, Regent or Mayor in accordance with their authority.
8. If during the examination a criminal element is found, the BPK reports this matter to the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations no later than 1 (one) month after the existence of the criminal element is discovered.

Authority of the Supreme Audit Agency

The authority of the BPK is based on Law Number 15 of 2006. The BPK’s authority is as follows:

1. In carrying out its duties, BPK has the authority to determine the object of audit, plan and carry out audits. Determining the time and method of auditing as well as compiling and presenting reports is also under the authority of the BPK.
2. Request information and/or documents that must be provided by everyone, organizational units of the Central Government, Regional Governments, other State Institutions, Bank Indonesia, State-Owned Enterprises, Public Service Agencies, Regional-Owned Enterprises and other institutions or agencies that manage state finances .
3. Carry out inspections at places where money and goods are kept by the state, at places where activities are carried out, books and administration of state finances as well as examination of calculations, letters, evidence, bank statements, accounts and other lists related to the management of state finances .
4. Determine the types of documents, data and information regarding the management and accountability of state finances that must be submitted to BPK.
5. Establish standards for auditing state finances after consultation with the Central Government or Regional Governments that must be used in auditing the management and accountability of state finances.
6. Establish a code of ethics for auditing the management and accountability of state finances.
7. Using experts or auditors outside the BPK who work for and on behalf of the BPK.
8. Fostering the examiner’s functional position.
9. Give consideration to government accounting standards.
10. Give consideration to the design of the internal control system for the Central Government/Regional Government prior to being stipulated by the Central Government/Regional Government.

Duties and Authorities of the Chairman of the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia

The duties of the chairman of the BPK as well as members are:

1. Carry out audits of state financial management and responsibility in general together with the Vice Chair.
2. Carry out duties and authorities related to BPK institutions.
3. Carry out domestic and foreign institutional relations.
4. Carry out fostering the duties of the Secretariat General, Main Directorate of Planning, Evaluation and Development of State Financial Audit, Main Directorate of Legal Development and Development of State Financial Audit, Main Inspectorate, and State Financial Audit Education and Training Agency together with Deputy Chair.
5. Provides investigative audit briefings. The objects of their duties and authorities are BPK executors and stakeholders.

Duties and Authorities of Deputy Chairman of BPK

The duties of the deputy chairman of the BPK (concurrently as a member) are:

1. Carry out audits of state financial management and responsibility in general together with the Chairman.
2. Carry out Treasury Claims Council proposals.
3. Carry out the duties of the Secretariat General, Main Directorate of Planning, Evaluation and Development of State Financial Audit, Main Directorate of Legal Development and Development of Financial Audit
4. Provides investigative inspection briefings. The objects of their duties and authorities are BPK executors and stakeholders.

Duties and Authorities of Members of the Audit Board of Indonesia

Duties and Authorities of Members I

The task of BPK member I is to carry out audits of state financial management and accountability. The objects of duty and authority are the Coordinating Ministry for Political, Legal and Security Affairs, Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Ministry of Law and Human Rights, Ministry of Defense, Ministry of Transportation, Indonesian Attorney General’s Office, National Police, BIN, BNN, BMKG, National Defense Institute, Wantanas, National Cyber ​​and Crypto Agency, National Commission on Human Rights, KPK, KPU, Basarnas, BNPT, Bawaslu , Bakamla and the institutions formed and related within the entity.

Duties and Authorities of Members II

The task of member II of the BPK is to carry out audits of the management and accountability of state finances. The objects of duties and authorities are the Coordinating Ministry for Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Trade, Ministry of Industry, Ministry of PPN/BAPPENAS, Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs, BKPM, BPS, BI, OJK, PPATK, PT PPA, LPS, BSN, LKPP, KPPU and the institutions formed and related to the entity’s environment.

Duties and Authorities of Members III

The task of member III of the BPK is to carry out audits of the management and accountability of state finances. The objects of their duties and authorities are the MPR, DPR, DPD, MA, BPK, MK, KY, Coordinating Ministry for PMK, Ministry of State Secretariat, Setkab, Ministry of Social Affairs, Ministry of Tourism, Ministry of Manpower, Ministry of Communication and Information, Ministry of Administrative and Bureaucratic Reform, KPPA, Ministry of Youth and Sports, Ministry of Research and Technology-BRN, Ministry of ATR, Kemendesa PDTT, Bapeten, BATAN, BPPT, LIPI, LAPAN, National Library of Indonesia, BNPB, Bapertarum, BKKBN, BKN, BPKP, LAN, ANRI, PPK GBK, PPK Kemayoran, BNP2TKI, LPP RRI, LPP TVRI, TMII, BIG, ORI, BPN, Bekraf, Employment BPJS and the institutions formed and related within these entities.

Duties and Authorities of Members IV

The task of member IV of the BPK is to carry out audits of the management and accountability of state finances. The objects of duty and authority are the Coordinating Ministry for Maritime Affairs, Ministry of Agriculture, KKP, Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources, Ministry of PUPR, KLHK, BPH Migas, Peat Restoration Agency and institutions formed and related within these entities.

Duties and Authorities of Members V

The task of BPK member V is to carry out audits of state financial management and accountability. The objects of duty and authority are the Ministry of Home Affairs, Ministry of Religion, BPKS, BP Batam, BPWS, BNPP, regional financial management and responsibility in Provincial, Regency, City Governments and Regional Owned Enterprises in Region I (Sumatra and Java) as well as the institutions formed and related to the entity’s environment.

Duties and Authorities of Members VI

The task of member VI of the BPK is to carry out audits of the management and accountability of state finances. The objects of duty and authority are the Ministry of Health, Ministry of Education and Culture BPJS Health, BPOM, regional financial management and responsibility in Provincial, Regency, City Governments and Regional Owned Enterprises in Region II (Bali, Nusa Tenggara, Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Maluku and Papua) and institution formed and related in the environment of the entity.

Duties and Authorities of Members VII

The task of BPK VII members is to carry out audits of state financial management and accountability. The objects of duty and authority are the Ministry of SOEs, SKK Migas, SOEs and subsidiaries as well as institutions formed and related to these entities.

Functions of the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia

There are three functions of the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia, as follows:

1. Operative Functions

BPK’s operative function is in the form of inspection, supervision of investigations on the control, management and management of state assets.

2. Judicial function

The judicial function explains the authority to sue the treasury and claim compensation for the treasury and non-treasurer civil servants. The judicial function of the BPK is to authorize acts of violating the law or neglecting obligations to the detriment of state finances and assets.

3. Advisory function

The advisory function gives consideration to the government regarding the management and management of state finances.

CPC Core Values

In its implementation, BPK employees are guided by several basic values. This basic value must of course reflect the integrity of an institution that can be trusted by the community. The following are the basic values ​​held by the BPK institution:

1. The value of integrity

The value of integrity which includes being honest, objective and firm in the application of principles, values ​​and decisions.

2. The value of independence

Uphold independence both institutionally, organizationally, and individually. That way, in carrying out BPK audit activities, it must be from the attitude of personal and organizational disturbances that can affect the independence of the BPK.

3. The value of professionalism

The value of professionalism that applies the principles of prudence, thoroughness, accuracy and is guided by applicable standards.

Types of Examinations Performed by the Financial Audit Agency

There are three types of BPK-RI audits as stipulated in Law Number 15 of 2006 concerning the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia article 4, namely financial audits, performance audits and audits with a specific purpose.

1. Financial Audit

Financial audit as an examination of government financial reports (Central, regional, BUMN and BUMD) with the objective of the audit is to provide a statement of opinion/opinion about the level of fairness of the information presented in the financial reports of the central/regional government. The fairness of the financial information presented in the financial statements is based on four criteria:

• Compliance with Government Accounting Standards.
• Adequacy of disclosure.
• Compliance with laws and regulations
• Internal control system effectiveness.

The statement of opinion or opinion as a result of the audit referred to consists of an “Unqualified” opinion. “Unreasonable” Opinion, “Not Giving Opinion” Opinion and “Unfair” Opinion.

2. Performance Check

Performance inspection as an examination of state financial management consisting of examination of economic and efficiency aspects as well as examination of effectiveness aspects. In conducting performance audits, auditors also test compliance with statutory provisions and internal controls.

Performance checks are carried out objectively and systematically on various types of evidence/documents to be able to make an objective assessment of the performance of the organization or program/activity being examined.

As for examples of the purpose of examining results and program effectiveness as well as examining economy and efficiency are assessments of:

• The extent to which the objectives of legislation and organization can be achieved.
• Other possible alternatives that can improve program performance or eliminate factors that impede program effectiveness.
• Comparison between costs and benefits or cost effectiveness of a program.
• The extent to which a program achieves the expected results or causes unexpected impacts.

3. Examination with a specific purpose

Examination with a purpose is an inspection carried out with a special purpose, outside of financial audits and performance audits. Included in the inspection for this particular purpose is an examination of other matters related to finance, investigative examination and examination of the government’s internal control system.

This examination is intended to provide conclusions on a matter being examined. This examination is in the nature of examination, review or agreed upon procedures, covering the fields of finance, investigative examination and examination of the internal control system.

The purpose of auditing state finances is to assess whether the implementation of an activity and its financial management have been carried out in accordance with the applicable regulations and in accordance with the predetermined objectives. In this case, the inspection is carried out by the Internal Supervisory Apparatus (APIP) and the Financial Supervisory Agency.

So, that’s about history and the duties of the Supreme Audit Agency, Sinaumed’s. If Sinaumed’s is still confused, and needs references related to the complete duties and authorities of the Supreme Audit Agency, you can visit sinaumedia’s collection of books at sinaumedia.com .

We hope that after reading this article to the end, you can add insight and be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Healing Prayer – Sickness is a Test from Allah SWT. Humans certainly do not always live healthy. Maintaining a healthy lifestyle by eating nutritious foods plus vitamin supplements is part of our endeavor to stay healthy so we can carry out our daily activities.

However, that does not mean that we can avoid disease. Basically, humans can prevent disease by living a healthy life and getting enough exercise. In addition, don’t forget to pray to Allah SWT. In Islam there are many prayers related to health, one of which is a prayer for healing.

In this article, we will discuss further about prayers for healing that can be recited when you are sick. Here’s the full explanation.

Coming Sickness

Sometimes, there are people who have adopted a healthy lifestyle but can still get sick. In fact, Rasulullah SAW as the best human being on earth has ever experienced pain. Pain is a natural thing experienced by a human being.

Sometimes, Allah tests His servants with pain as a form of compassion. As people of faith, when we are experiencing pain, of course we must continue to seek medical treatment for birth.

As for inner endeavor, of course we do it by praying for healing to Allah so that the disease will be lifted soon. As Rasulullah SAW had done when his best friend was sick, he recited prayers for his best friend’s recovery.

When we are sick, there are two things we can try, namely by going to the doctor and praying to God. There are times when we try our best to do everything we can to recover from illness, but as humans, sometimes there are some things beyond our control.

When you have made an effort to go to the hospital or take medicine, then add a prayer asking for healing so that you will be healthy soon. Allah SWT loves those who pray to Him. Likewise, when you, your girlfriend, or parents are sick, practice praying for healing.

This makes us finally can only surrender to Allah SWT. There are several prayers that we can say so that the disease that afflicts us is removed.

Pain is a test from Allah SWT. Religion recommends reading prayers when feeling pain. Of course, asking for forgiveness and healing so that the pain or illness we experience can be healed. Read a prayer asking for healing when you are sick

In a hadith from Jabir bin Abdullah he said, Rasulullah SAW said that every disease can be overcome as long as asking for help from Allah SWT. The sound of the words of Rasulullah SAW as follows;

“Every disease must have a cure. If a medicine is in accordance with the disease, then he will recover with the permission of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala.” (HR. Muslim)

Allah SWT says in Surah Al Baqarah verse 186:

Then, in a hadith from Jabir bin Abdullah he said, Rasulullah SAW said;

“Every disease must have a cure. If a medicine is in accordance with the disease, then he will recover with the permission of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala.” (HR. Muslim)

Prayer for Healing

1. Healing Prayer for Yourself

Reading prayers when sick is also an effort to be given healing by Allah SWT because in truth only Allah can heal. In Islam, illness is the qada and qadar of Allah SWT. Illness can also mean a test for a servant.

However, it does not mean that we can only surrender when we are sick, but we also have to make an effort. In addition to medical treatment, we are also encouraged to read prayers asking for healing when sick so that the illness will be alleviated.

Read a healing prayer for yourself so that you get well soon. Try reading the following healing prayer, namely:

Meaning: “O Allah, God of mankind, remove this disease, heal it, only You are the Most Healing. There is no healing other than healing from You, healing that leaves no pain.”

In addition, Rasulullah SAW taught prayers for healing. Read this prayer while holding a certain part that hurts in our body:

Bismillah

Meaning: ” In the name of Allah.”

Meaning: “I take refuge in Allah and His power from the bad things that I feel and worry about.”

Or you can read a prayer from Surah Al-Anbiya verse 83 which reads:

Meaning: “O my Lord, indeed I have been overwritten by a disease and You are the Most Merciful God among all the merciful.”

2. Prayer Asking for Healing for a Sick Spouse or Girlfriend

The prayer is:

Meaning: “My Lord, give healing Sa’ad. My Lord, heal Sa’ad My Lord, heal Sa’ad.”

The word ‘Sa’dan’ in prayer asking for healing can be replaced by the name of your sick girlfriend.

Apart from that, you can also recite the prayer below:

Meaning: “O (mention the name of the sick girlfriend), may Allah heal you, forgive your sins, and benefit you in terms of religion and your physique throughout your life.”

3. Prayer Asking for Healing for Sick Parents

The prayer is:

Meaning: “O Allah, remove the disease and give him healing, You are the Most Healing Substance. There is no healing except healing from You, healing that does not leave other diseases.”

4. The Prophet’s prayer for his sick family

Meaning: “My Lord, God of mankind, remove disease. Give healing because You are the healer. Nothing can cure disease except You with healing that leaves no pain, “

The prayer above is as narrated in Bukhari and Muslim from Aisyah RA. (See Imam An-Nawawi, Al-Adzkar, [Damascus: Darul Mallah, 1971 M/1391 H], page 113).

5. Prayer for Healing When Visiting a Sick Friend

The prayer is:

Meaning: “I beg the great God, the Lord of the majestic throne to heal you.”

Rest assured by reading the prayer asking for healing can be immediately granted by Allah SWT, amen.

6. The Prophet’s prayer before a sick person

The prayer is:

Meaning: “I beg the great Allah, the Lord of the majestic Throne to heal you,”

Abu Dawud and At-Tirmidhi narrated that Rasulullah SAW recommended that the prayer above be read 7 times in the presence of a sick person. (See Imam An-Nawawi, Al-Adzkar, [Damascus: Darul Mallah, 1971 M/1391 H], page 114).

In addition to asking for healing of people who are sick. We can also pray for forgiveness, religious and physical protection for those who are sick.

Meaning, “O (mention the name of the person who is sick), may Allah heal you, forgive your sins, and benefit you in terms of religion and your physique throughout your age,”

The prayer above was recited by Rasulullah SAW when he visited his friend Salman Al-Farisi RA as reported by Ibn Sunni. (See Imam An-Nawawi, Al-Adzkar, [Damascus: Darul Mallah, 1971 M/1391 H], page 115).

7. Prophet Ayub’s Prayer When Tested Sick By Allah SWT

There is a history enshrined in the Qur’an which tells the story of the Prophet Ayub AS. The Prophet Ayub AS was tested by Allah SWT to suffer from a disease that could not be cured for many years.

However, the Prophet Ayub never gave up and continued to ask for healing by always reciting prayer readings so that he would be healed.

Prophet Ayub’s prayer to be given healing is immortalized in the Qur’an Surah Al Anbiya verse 83. The following prayer is recited to raise sickness:

“Robbi inni massani yad durru wa anta arhamar roohimiin.”

Meaning: “O my Lord, verily I have been struck by a disease and You are the Most Merciful God among all the merciful.”

Next, there is a prayer reading for sickness and other healing:

“Bismillah, bismillah, bismillah. A’udzu bi izzatillahi wa qudratihi min syarri ma ajidu wa uhadziru. As’alullahal ‘azima rabbal ‘arsyil ‘adhim an yasyfiyaka.”

Meaning: “In the name of Allah, in the name of Allah, in the name of Allah, I protect you thanks to the glory of Allah and His qudrah from the evil things that I feel and that I am worried about. I ask Allah the Greatest, the Lord of the great Throne to heal you.”

Dhikr Healing Diseases

There are a number of dhikr cures for all diseases that are important for every Muslim to know and practice. Certain dhikr practices can be a means of endeavoring to hope for healing so that Allah SWT will lift a disease.

Literally, dhikr means mentioning, telling, remembering, or understanding every good deed. According to the terms, dhikr is an oral utterance, physical movement or vibration of the heart in accordance with the ways taught by religion to get closer to Allah SWT.

Dhikr can be interpreted as praise that a believer does to Allah and recites it repeatedly. Not only saying praises, remembrance can also be done by reciting prayers or verses from Allah.

Dhikr can be a means of endeavor to hope for healing to be lifted from illness. Rasulullah SAW once said that for all diseases there must be an antidote or medicine. This reminds us that as a believer we should always be steadfast and never stop hoping in Allah when we are being tested in the form of illness.

There is no doubt about the truth of the letters in the Quran. There are several letters in the Al-Quran which are believed to cure diseases.

Practicing Surah Al Mu’awwidzat (Al-Ikhlas, Al-Falaq, and An-Nas)

In Islam, where the Al-Quran is a way of life, it is believed that some of its letters can be read to provide healing for ailments that are being suffered. As for the Al-Quran surahs in question, namely Surah Al Muawwidzat, including Surah Al-Ikhlas, Surah Al-Falaq, and Surah An-Nas. These three letters are the closing letters of the Koran and have great virtues and fadhilah.

This letter can be used as protection from the temptations of Satan, magic, and even to avoid human evil. Launching from the Tafsir Al-Quran page, these two surahs can be used as protection as well as medicine. This was explained by Wahbah Az Zuhaili in Tafsir al-Munir.

This view is based on the hadith from Aisha about the Prophet’s habit of reading surah al-Ikhlas, surah al-Falaq and surah an-Nas before going to bed.

Remembrance of the Prayer of the Prophet Ayyub AS

In surah Al-Anbiya Verse 83 explains the prayer of the Prophet Ayyub ‘alaihissalam when he was subjected to a severe test of many years of illness. Prophet Ayyub AS then munajat to Allah and enshrined in the Qur’an:

The prayer recited by the Prophet Ayyub AS as a means of munajat asking God for healing is as follows.

Meaning: “O Allah, my Lord, indeed, I have been afflicted with a disease, but You are the Lord, the Most Merciful of all the merciful.”

That is the dhikr that heals all diseases that can be practiced in order to get healing. Dhikr hoping for healing should be done sincerely solely to get closer to Allah so that the disease will be immediately removed. Wallahualam bisawab.

Closing

It has become everyone that health is something that is very desirable. Therefore, when you are sick, Muslims will read a prayer for healing so that the disease can disappear, so that the body becomes healthier and easier to move. Thus the discussion about prayer for healing, I hope the discussion in this article can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Sinaumed’s can get more information by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Geography is a basic science that is studied when we are in high school (SMA), this knowledge about geography is summarized by the author in an article that discusses the understanding according to experts as well as concepts and study material from geography. Let’s start with the general understanding of geography below.

Etymologically, the word geography comes from the Greek, geo meaning earth and graphein meaning writing. The merging of the two words then forms ‘ geography ‘.
The general understanding of geography is the science of the earth and all the principles, phenomena and aspects related to human life. Both caused by nature and by human activity.

Geography is a branch of science that is in great demand worldwide. Its important geographical position makes many scientists study it. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), geography is the science that discusses the earth’s surface, climate, population, flora, fauna, and the results obtained from the earth.

Understanding Geography According to Experts

1. Erathosthenes

The term geography was first introduced by Eratosthenes (276–104 BC). Geography according to Eratosthenes is writing about the shape of the earth’s surface. The term or word geography comes from the Greek, namely geo which means earth and graphien which means writing. Thus forming the word geography and developed into a science that discusses the shape of the earth’s surface.

2. Claudius Ptolemaeus

An astronomer and mathematician Claudius Ptolomaeus (87–150 AD) defined geography as a presentation through maps that present part or all of the earth’s surface.

3. Immanuel Kant

A geographer and philosopher, Immanuel Kant (1724–1821). According to Kant, geography is very close to philosophy, so Kant is interested in geography. According to him, geography is a science and the object of study is objects, things, or symptoms that are spread over areas on the earth’s surface.

4. Lobeck

According to Lobeck, geography is the science of the relationships that form between life and its surroundings.

5. Preston E. James

According to Preston E. James, geography is the mother of all sciences .

6. Karl Ritter

According to Karl Ritter, geography is the study of the earth as a place for human life. The scope of study of geography includes various phenomena that exist and occur on the surface of the earth.

In studying the intricacies of life on earth, the book SMA/MA Class X Geography: Specialization Book IPS Premium K13-R below provides complete, actual, and interesting information for Sinaumed’s.

 

7. Friedrich Ratzel

In his book entitled Politische Geographie. Friedrich Ratzel put forward a concept related to geography which was named Lebensraum which means a geographical area as a place of life for a people.

8. Elsworth Huntington

Huntington put forward a theory related to geography in which survival is strongly influenced by climate. This theory made Elsworth Huntington famous as a climate determinist (seeing climate as a determinant of life). Elsworth Huntington stated that geography is the study of phenomena that exist on the surface of the earth and the people who inhabit it.

9. Harstone

According to Harstone, geography is the science of the reality of the differentiation of the earth’s surface and what it is, not only in the sense of understanding differences in certain matters, but also in the sense of a combination as a whole or as a whole regarding phenomena that exist in every place different from the conditions in other places. other.

10.Alexander von Humboldt

Alexander von Humboldt argues that geography is identical or similar to physical geography. Alexander explained the relationship between the earth and the sun and the behavior of the earth in space, on weather phenomena and climates in the world, the types of the Earth’s surface and the processes that occur and matters relating to the hydrosphere and biosphere.

11. Ferdinand Von Richthofen

Ferdinand Von Richthofen defines geography as a science regarding the symptoms and characteristics of the earth’s surface and the people who live in it and are arranged based on their location.

12. According to Paul Vidal de la Blache

Paul Vidal de la Blache (1845–1918) was a French geographer. Vidal is a pioneer of posibilism in geography. Posibilism is a theory which states that even though the environment has set certain constraints or limitations, culture is determined by social conditions.

Vidal said emphatically that the environment offers several possibilities for humans to live and develop. It was on this basis that Vidal put forward a concept called  genre de vie  or  mode of live  or in Indonesian means “way of life”. In the concept put forward by Vidal, geography is defined as the science of the production process carried out by humans against the possibilities offered by nature.

13, Halford Mackinder

Halford Mackinder argues, geography is a science whose main function is to investigate human interaction in society and the environment which differ according to their location.

14. Richard Hartshorne

Geography according to Richard Hartshorne is a science that is able and able to explain the variable properties of the earth’s surface in a thorough, orderly, and rational manner.

15. Yeates and Hagget

In the opinion of Yeates and Hagget, geography is a science that plays a role in the development of a location and is influenced by the properties that exist on the surface of the earth for various rational reasons.

16. Vernor E. Finch and Glen Trewartha

Vernor and Glen argue that geography is an explanation that analyzes the surface of the earth and its view of things that are always changing.

17. Strabo

Strabo expressed the opinion that geography is closely related to the characteristics of places that pay attention to the relationship between various places as a whole. Geography, from the beginning of its development, started from telling about other regions, then more specifically, and already has the concept of a region or area that already has characteristics and relationships between regions.

18. John Hanrath

The definition of geography according to Hanrath is a science that investigates the distribution of physical, biological and anthropological symptoms in space on the earth’s surface and other phenomena according to the size of values, motives whose results can then be compared.

19. James E. Preston

Preston put forward the definition of geography, which is a science related to human interrelationships with their habitat and places more emphasis on interrelationships between humans.

20. Fielding

According to Fielding, geography is the study of the location and arrangement of phenomena that occur and exist on the earth’s surface and the processes that cause the distribution of these phenomena.

21. Sidney E. Ekblaw and Donald JD Mulkerne

Sidney and Donald define geography as the study of the earth and its life which influences the way people live, the food they eat, the clothes they wear, the houses they build, and the recreational activities they usually enjoy.

22. Halima Khan

According to Halim Khan, geography is the natural and social environment in the form of an area to carry out an activity, describe, analyze, and enjoy human behavior on earth for their survival.

23. Ulman

According to Ullman, geography is an interaction between spaces. The definition put forward by Ullman states that geography is related to space on the surface of the Earth.

24. Daljoeni

Daldjoeni is known for his books on geography. According to Daldjoeni, geography is a science that teaches humans about several scopes consisting of three main things, namely spatial coverage (space), ecological coverage (conditions), and region coverage (regions).

In terms of spatial, geography explains the distribution of natural phenomena, both natural and human on Earth. Then in terms of ecology, geography contains how humans must be able to adapt to their environment. In terms of region, geography contains areas as human habitation based on physiographical units.

25. Basri Mustofa

Basri Mustofa believes that geography is the science of similarities and differences, as well as geosphere phenomena from a regional and environmental perspective in a spatial context.

26. Herioso Setiyono

In 1996, Herioso Setiyono expressed his opinion regarding the notion of geography. According to Herioso, geography is the science of the mutual relationship between humans and their environment which refers to horizontal distribution patterns on the earth’s surface.

27. Harris

In 2012, Haris explained the meaning of geography, according to him geography is a field of science that examines all aspects on the surface of the Earth with spatial or spatial concepts for the utilization of developments on the surface of the Earth.

28. I Made Sandy

According to Sandy, geography  is a science that seeks to express, discover, explain and understand the similarities and differences that exist in the earth’s surface. Sandy emphasized that geography is more focused on a spatial perspective.

29. Indonesian Geographic Association (IGI) Workshop Seminar in Semarang 1988

Based on the results of the Workshop of the Indonesian Geographic Association (IGI) in Semarang in 1988, IGI formulated the notion of Geography as the science of similarities and differences in geosphere phenomena with a regional or environmental point of view in a spatial context.

30. Paul Claval

Paul explained that geographical phenomena are related to spatial relations.

31. UNESCO

UNESCO divides the notion of geography into 3 parts, consisting of:

• One synthetic agent
• A study of spatial relations
• Science in land use

32. James Fairgrive

James expressed the opinion that geography has educational value, namely educating people to be able to think critically and be responsible for the world’s progress.

33. John Alexander

John expressed the opinion that geography is closely related to location factors that have certain characteristics and the relationship between regions as a whole.

34. Barlow

According to Barlow, geography is a science that discusses and learns about processes that have a relationship with the environment. This relationship is explained by Barlow as natural phenomena and related natural patterns which will be discussed.

35. P Huggett, R. Hartshorne

Huggett and Hartshorne argue that geography is concerned with providing a thorough, orderly and rational description of the variable nature of the earth’s surface.

Based on the opinions of experts on the definition of geography above, it can be concluded that geography does not only discuss the physical nature of the earth and parts of the universe, but includes all phenomena that exist on the surface of the earth.

These phenomena can be physical phenomena or social phenomena. Basically, the core of the study of geography is the reciprocal relationship between humans and their environment. From some of the things above, thus giving rise to the term if geography is referred to as the mother of science ” Mother’s of Science “.

Objects of Geographical Studies and Their Analysis

The object of study of geography itself is material objects and formal objects. Material objects, namely geosphere phenomena which include inanimate objects and living things on earth and their environment. The geosphere is one of the natural phenomena related to its elements which consists of five layers, namely the atmosphere (the layer that protects the planets of the solar system from solar radiation.

the atmosphere layer prevents extreme temperatures on earth), lithosphere (the outermost layer of the earth’s structure), hydrosphere (as the name implies, this layer is in the form of waters that are on the planet or near the planet, such as rivers, seas, lakes and so on) , the biosphere (this layer includes land, air and water which affect biotic processes), and the anthroposphere (the central theme layer).

The atmosphere, lithosphere, and hydrosphere discuss inanimate matter on earth. The atmosphere discusses the air that envelops the earth, the lithosphere discusses the earth’s crust, while the hydrosphere discusses water. The biosphere and anthroposphere discuss living things on earth. The biosphere deals with animals and plants, while the anthroposphere deals with humans.

The formal object of geography discusses the human perspective on all materials on earth. This perspective is accompanied by a way of thinking and analyzing. The approach used regarding a perspective on material objects is through analysis. Analysis that can be applied in geography is spatial analysis, environmental analysis, and regional analysis.

• Spatial analysis or spatial analysis is a geographical approach to the diversity of the earth’s surface which is carried out by examining every spatial aspect. These aspects include location factors, natural conditions factors and social and cultural conditions of the community.

• Environmental analysis or ecology is one of the principles or sub-disciplines in biology that discusses the salient inter-relationships between living things and their environment. This ecological analysis examines the symptoms of interaction and inter-relationships between fiscal or natural components and non-physical or social components.

• Regional analysis or regional complex analysis is an approach that analyzes regional complexes by comparing the areas of the earth’s surface by paying attention to the spatial aspects and environmental aspects of each region.

Geography which is the science of studying the interrelationships between humans and their environment has various important data regarding knowledge of geography that must be understood and can be studied through the Dictionary of Geographical Terms which is below.

 

Geography Concept

Geography is encompassed by the following concepts,

• Location , is a concept regarding the existence of an object that exists on earth and is related to a place, location or area. This concept is divided into two, namely the concept of absolute location, which can be known by looking at latitude and longitude. As well as the concept of relative location, this location concept is used to determine geographic location.
• Distance, the concept of distance is divided into two, namely the concept of absolute distance and the concept of relative distance. The concept of absolute distance is expressed in units of meters or kilometers, while the concept of relative distance is expressed in units of time.
• Morphology is the concept of the shape of the earth’s surface. The concept of morphology connects natural processes and their relationship with activities carried out by humans.
• Affordability , is the ease of accessing mileage and is related to facilities and infrastructure.
• Patterns, forms of interaction between humans and the surrounding natural environment. This pattern is formed through the interaction between the environment around humans and other environments.
• Agglomeration, the concept of population grouping based on human activities in an area.
• Use value , is relative and related to the benefits provided by an area on earth to living things.
• Interdependence, is a concept regarding the nature of interdependence between one region and another. Each region can affect as well as be affected by other regions or regions.
• Area differentiation , related to comparisons between regions that can be known through differences.
• Room linkage, is a bond or connection that can explain the level of inter-regional spatial linkages that occur as a result of interaction.

To further explore the concept of geography and other geography that is important to understand, the Class 11 High School Geography book below can be studied by Sinaumed’s.

That is the understanding, object of study, analysis and geographical concepts that the author has summarized through various sources.

Geography Learning Books

1. Geography Dictionary (Thematic & Visual Edition)

2. Population Geography

Knowledge of the definition of geography according to experts can provide readers with knowledge about the ins and outs of the earth’s surface, know the distribution of natural resources on earth, as a guide for development, be able to know global climates, be able to study the distribution of flora and fauna and know the condition of the earth’s surface.

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Geography

Forms of Social Mobility – Humans are dynamic social beings. That is, every human being always experiences the name of change in order to meet the needs of his life.

To meet the needs of his life, humans always try to improve their lives and increase their social status. To improve their social status, one of the ways to do this is by doing social mobility.

In social life, every community must be involved with social mobility. Usually, this social mobility is described as a movement or movement that is capable of bringing about a change that is related to life in society.

Social mobility is a phenomenon that often occurs in social life, so it doesn’t only happen to individuals or groups of people, but everyone must experience social mobility in their lives without realizing it.

But what exactly is social mobility? Sinaumed’s must have known that mobility means moving, what about social mobility, and what forms of social mobility?

Let’s look at the following reviews, so you can better understand this.

Definition of Social Mobility

In general, social mobility is a form of change in the position of people in one social class to another. The notion of social mobility means a movement of individuals or groups through a hierarchical system or social stratification.

In KBBI, social mobility is defined as a change in the position of a member of society from one social class to another.

Following are some definitions of Social Mobility According to Experts.

1. Soerjono Soekanto

Social mobility according to Soerjono Soekanto is movement from one social position to another.

2. Robert MZ Lawang

Social mobility is defined as a gradual shift in the position of a person or group of layers and dimensions.

3. Horton and Hunt

Social mobility is a movement of movement from one social class to another social class.

4. Kimball Young and Reymond W. Mack

Social mobility is a movement within a certain social structure, namely certain patterns that govern the organization of a social group

5. Pitrim A. Sorokin

Understanding social mobility can be done through several channels called social circulation or social circulation . This social circulation can take the form of educational institutions, health institutions, political organizations, and others.

Thus, when talking about social mobility, what is meant is a form of transfer of status and role of a person or group of people from a lower social class to a higher social class, or from a higher social class to a lower social class (vertical ) . or movement of social class with a degree that is unidirectional or horizontal .

 

 

Forms of Social Mobility

Mobility takes several forms. The division of this form of social mobility is based on the influence or not of the results of the transfer of social status experienced with the social degree one has.

Forms of social mobility are basically divided into three, namely vertical social mobility, horizontal social mobility, and intergenerational social mobility. Come on, see the explanations one by one.

1. Forms of Vertical Social Mobility

The form of vertical social mobility means the movement of individuals or social objects from one social position to another in a position that is not equal.

Try to imagine, you are in the middle of a vertical line. When you are in that position, you have the opportunity to go up or down, right? Well, so does vertical mobility which is divided into two types, namely upward vertical social mobility and downward vertical social mobility.

a. Downward movement of social mobility (Social sinking )

There is a process of decreasing one’s social status or position from top to bottom. The reason for the occurrence of social sinking does not only occur because of dismissal, work errors, abuse of position or bad things.

However, social sinking can also occur due to retirement, experiencing chronic illness, and being unable to carry out a task.

An example of a downward social mobility movement, namely being dismissed from a job due to proven corruption, could also be a football captain turning into an ordinary soccer player, or a government staff member who officially retired from a government institution and now spends time looking after his grandchildren.

b. Upward social mobility movement ( Social climbing )

This upward vertical social mobility is characterized by an increase in one’s social status to a higher position or the formation of a new group that is higher than the pre-existing social layer.

This movement allows individuals to experience a rise in status that is not equal to their previous status, so there will be many things that must be adjusted to their previous life. Usually, individuals who experience social climbing have good performance.

For example a teacher who is appointed as a school principal, an ordinary employee who is appointed as a manager, a citizen who is appointed as an RT head.

 

 

2. Forms of Horizontal Social Mobility

The form of horizontal social mobility is the transition or movement of individuals from one social group to another in an equal position.

You are now trying to imagine again, if you are in the middle of a horizontal line. If you are there, whether you want to move to the right or to the left, surely you will be in a parallel place, right? Well, just like this horizontal mobility.

Usually, this form of horizontal social mobility occurs in a change of citizenship, a change in assignment location without changing positions. Well, because the displacement that occurs in this mobility does not change a person’s strata or degree, there is not much change in his previous life.

Even so, individuals who experience this mobility must still make adjustments and readjust to their new environment, even though the work they do is the same work they usually do.

Examples of forms of horizontal social mobility:

1. For example, someone who was originally a Polish citizen, then because of some circumstances he moved to become a citizen of another country through the naturalization process (citizenship).
   This form of citizenship transition is a process of changing the position or position of someone who is equal, so that this event is included in the form of horizontal social mobility.
2. Someone who changes profession from a job in a certain service agency, for example a transportation service bureau, then he switches professions to become a sales executive in a company, then this is also called horizontal social mobility.
3. Students who carry out community service activities must move to other villages in the same geography.
4. A transferred school principal becomes a school principal outside the city.

It should be noted that what is happening is a social shift of a person or group of people in patterns of equal position.

 

 

3. Forms of Intergenerational Mobility

This form of intergenerational social mobility is characterized by an increase or development in the standard of living within a lineage which does not only refer to its social position (status), from one generation to the next.

Forms of intergenerational mobility can also be understood as the difference in status achieved by someone who already has his own family, compared to the social status held by his parents.

An example of this form of intergenerational mobility is, someone who has mediocre economic conditions, as an adult, he manages to establish a successful business. Because of the child’s success, there is a change in social status between his parents and himself that is intergenerational.

Furthermore, forms of intergenerational mobility can be divided into two types, namely:

1. Mobility integration

Integrative mobility is a shift in social status that occurs between several generations. The description of this integration mobility can be seen from the social status between the generations of grandfathers, fathers and children, which are different.

For example, in one family, the grandfather works or works as a doctor, while the child works as a teacher, while the grandson works as a lecturer. Or it could be that the grandmother works as a civil servant, then her child works as a housewife, while her grandson works as a successful businessman.

2. Intragenerational mobility

Intragenerational mobility is a shift in social status that occurs within the same generation, from fathers, mothers, to their children.

For example, in one family, the father works as a private employee, the son works as a teacher. Or it could be, a mother works as a housewife only, while her child works as a doctor.

Factors Driving Social Mobility

After you know the definition of social mobility, as well as the forms of social mobility, of course there are driving factors that can cause social mobility. The following are several factors driving social mobility.

1. Individual factors

Social mobility can be caused by individual factors. This individual factor can be seen in terms of knowledge, attitudes, and skills, because basically humans are born with their own characteristics and characteristics. Even so, humans have the same desire to achieve a higher social status.

In Indonesia itself, the educational factor is considered a social elevator or a means that can make a person become a more qualified person and is also able to improve his social status in society.

2. Structural factors

Structural factors relate to a person’s opportunity to be able to occupy a position and the ease with which he can obtain it. In Indonesia, the opportunity to occupy a position with this structural factor is very large. Many people have the opportunity to occupy a higher position.

3. Political factors

Another driving factor, namely political factors. Political factors can be a trigger for social mobility because of the political situation in a country that is stable or will not affect its security conditions. Usually, a person leaves the area where he lives in order to obtain security guarantees.

4. Demographic/population factors

Based on data from the Central Statistics Agency (BPS) the population in Indonesia almost always increases from time to time. This factor refers to the increase in the number and density of population in a certain area.

This increase has had an impact on the narrowness of residential land, reduced employment opportunities, and worsened environmental quality. That problem can trigger someone to migrate to an area that they feel is better.

5. Economic factors

Economic conditions are one of the driving factors for social mobility. Good economic conditions will make it easier for people to obtain capital, education and other better opportunities.

However, if the economic conditions in a country are bad, then the people in it will have low or limited income, so that it will be difficult for them to meet all their needs and social mobility will not occur.

Factors Inhibiting Social Mobility

In encouraging social mobility, it is not only driving factors that occur, but there are also inhibiting factors, which can cause several impacts to occur. When the inhibiting factors appear, it will be difficult for the community to be able to carry out social mobility properly.

1. The poverty factor

People who experience poverty, and even find it difficult to earn income, will automatically find it difficult to achieve a certain status. Usually, the cause of poverty is a low level of education.

When the level of education in a community is low, then the human resources in that place are also low. So that there is no more effort that they can do to get or have the ability to be able to compete and in the end they will be limited in getting jobs.

2. Factors of discrimination

This factor is sometimes often overlooked, but in reality social mobility can be greatly hampered when there is discrimination. This discriminatory factor is an attitude that differentiates the treatment of others because of differences, namely ethnicity, religion, race, and class.

Usually, these differentiating factors have a big impact and can lead to conflicts which can then hinder social mobility.

3. Gender stereotype factor

This factor is a factor that differentiates gender or social position between men and women. There are still many people who think that the degree of men is higher than that of women. This can hinder social mobility.

Distinguishing gender will also prevent a person from being able to achieve, because stereotypes of social status are considered different, thus preventing a person from making efforts and carrying out social mobility in order to get a better social status.

Impact of Social Mobility

The occurrence of social mobility certainly has an impact on society at large. There are two impacts that could occur, namely positive impacts and negative impacts.

1. The positive impact of social mobility

The positive impact of the occurrence of social mobility is a beneficial impact and provides benefits for people who carry out social mobility. This positive impact can encourage someone to develop for the better.

Some of the positive impacts of social mobility are increasing the social integration of a person or a community. The occurrence of social change certainly has a different response, some respond as a challenge, some respond as a form of acceptance which ultimately affects integrity in society.

2. The negative impact of social mobility

It is undeniable that social mobility definitely has a negative impact. One of them arises social conflicts. This social conflict can occur because of competition between individuals or groups to get a higher position which leads to conflict.

Another impact is the risk of psychological disorders. Not a few people experience anxiety when they lose their position and cause psychological disorders. It can even harm itself if it becomes prolonged stress.

So, that’s an explanation of the forms of social mobility and other matters related to social mobility. Sinaumed’s can read sociology books so he can understand more about social mobility. As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so that Sinaumed’s can have #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Nurul Ismi Humairoh

Examples of Military Threats – Every country is not always peaceful and under control. Occasionally there are conflicts and some have continued to this day, such as Palestine and Israel. One threat to a country is a military threat.

This military threat has the potential to make a country divided and no longer conducive. Bullets, screams, worries, fear, and other things related to war. Indonesia is no exception, it has also experienced military threats.

The following will explain the meaning, coping strategies, and examples of military threats that have been summarized from various pages on the internet.

Concepts and Examples of Military Threats

Military threats are threats that use armed force and are carried out in an organized manner. This threat is considered to endanger state sovereignty, the safety of the whole nation, and territorial integrity.

To maintain defense and uphold state sovereignty is the duty of the Indonesian National Army (TNI). In Law No. 34 of 2004 concerning the Indonesian National Armed Forces, the TNI is tasked with maintaining territorial integrity, protecting national security, carrying out military operations for war and military operations other than war, and actively participating in regional and international peacekeeping tasks.

In Law no. 3 of 2022, the military threats facing Indonesia are military aggression, territorial violations, espionage and sabotage. Not only that, there are also domestic threats that have the potential to divide the integration of the Indonesian nation.

The TNI does not only protect the country’s defense from threats originating from abroad. However, there are also threats from within the country that have the potential to disrupt state sovereignty. In the “Indonesian Defense White Paper” published by the Ministry of Defense and the book “Citizenship Education”, military threats consist of the following points.

1. Arms Rebellion

TNI strength is applied in military operations other than war (OMSP) by developing an effective strategy. If there is an armed rebellion, the handling is carried out based on the government’s political decision and is protected by law.

As a handling of the Free Aceh Movement (GAM) which became an armed separatist movement in caeh. In handling it, the TNI also intervened. Peace is realized with a dialogical approach between GAM and the people of Aceh so that they mingle again in harmony and peace.

2. Military Aggression

Military aggression is the use of armed force from one country to attack another country. Military aggression never happened in Indonesia. Indonesia was subjected to military aggression by the Dutch after independence.

Indonesia experienced two military aggressions. Dutch Military Aggression I was launched on 21 July 1947 to 5 August 1947 with Java and Sumatra as the goal of the invasion. Meanwhile, the Second Dutch Military Aggression took place on 19-20 December 1948 in Yogyakarta, which at that time was the capital of the Republic of Indonesia.

3. Sabotage

Threats of sabotage are also handled by the TNI. For example, sabotage related to VVIP security and strategic national objects, government installations, or military installations. MOM strategies and patterns are also applied to handling sabotage threats.

The strength given in this operation is in accordance with the level of risk and the mission being carried out. From non-military groups, they can report to the authorities if they see any potential to lead to acts of sabotage.

4. Separatist Movement

In Indonesian history, there have been several separatist movements. Such as, the Free Aceh Movement (GAM), DI/TII, PRRI, Permesta, Kahar Muzakar, and G30S/PKI.

5. Espionage

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), espionage is interpreted as a secret investigation or spying on military data and economic data from other countries; everything related to the nitty-gritty; spying.

Espionage, also known as spying, searches or steals information to obtain military secrets from other countries. This must be done by an expert who looks undercover and conveys information secretly too.

This threat, usually handled by using force and military capabilities. The strategy applied is a special operation pattern to dismantle, paralyze and clean up espionage networks.

Military and non-military groups must work together in dealing with espionage. Non-military groups can monitor suspicious activity in their environment. Then, report it to the authorities.

Launching from the Tirto.id page, Indonesia experienced espionage in 1982, at that time Alexandre Finenko, a Soviet intelligence officer, was in charge of Operation Aeroflot to extract secret documents from a high-ranking Indonesian military officer, Lt. Col. Soesdarjanto. Alexandre Finenko was arrested on 6 February 1982. He went on a hunger strike until he was deported on 13 February 1982 and it was decided to end Operation Aeroflot.

6. Threat of Riot

Economic disparities or coercion of the interests of certain groups can be the cause of riots. If riots erupt and are accompanied by violence, it will divide society.

Indonesia often experiences riots that result in the loss of many lives. Such as the 1998-1999 riots, the 1974 Malari riot, the 1965 tragedy (G30S), the 2022 Kanjuruhan tragedy, and other tragedies.

7. Armed Terror

Handling the threat of domestic or international terrorism is part of the TNI’s duties. This is regulated in Law No. 34 of 2004 concerning the TNI. The task is prioritized with a preventive approach and can be carried out repressively/coercively.

The intelligence function in gathering information about acts of terrorism must work properly and precisely so that acts of terrorism can be prevented. The TNI usually exchanges information with other countries because the terrorist network is an international network.

8. Territory Violation

Territorial violations are carried out by entering the sea or land border areas of a country by another country without the permission of the border officer. Territorial violation cases that have occurred in Indonesia are in the Ambalat Block area. Malaysian war planes have arbitrarily entered Indonesian territory 9 times.

9. Security Disruption

Security disturbances can occur at sea and in the air. In practice, the TNI can handle three-dimensional forces, namely the Army, Navy and Air Force. If you need help from another country, it will be done on the basis of the country’s political decisions.

Therefore, it is necessary to have a system arrangement. The arrangement includes signs in shipping lanes for navigational purposes to controlling sea shipping lanes. Then, the arrangement of the air corridor system was also carried out for the sake of aviation security.

10. Communal Conflict

When dealing with communal conflicts, military power holds three things. First, the use of military force is based on political decisions. Second, implemented through OMSP. Third, the use of force and strategy is carried out with MOM and the conditions of communal conflict they face.

11. Non-Military Threats

Domestic threats can be non-military, namely in the form of poverty, corruption, socio-cultural problems, socio-cultural problems, drugs, and the spread of hoax news. The TNI has a TNI Manunggal Entering the Village (TMMD) program which often repairs uninhabitable houses or builds public facilities, as well as conducts outreach to villages or schools.

When dealing with a threat fails to use diplomacy, the state can carry out a military operation strategy of war (OMP) and military operations other than war (OMSP). The TNI is the main force in efforts to deal with threats.

However, the state also has a defense and security system that involves all components of the people. Launching from the Bola.com and Detik com pages, here are several ways to deal with military threats.

• Tightening restrictions with other countries.
• Tackling and overcoming military threats in the country.
• Train soldiers to be more disciplined in guarding the border area.
• Increase defense equipment.
• The community is expected to play an active role in efforts to maintain and care for sovereignty.
• Dealing with the threat of the separatist movement through dialogue and improving the welfare of the people and the perpetrators of the separatist movement.
• Handling inter-tribal wars by means of mediation, bringing together traditional leaders, to equitable development.
• Prevent extreme right and left ideologies by instilling and increasing the practice of Pancasila values ​​among the people.
• Increase intelligence work and cooperate with various parties to prevent or detect as early as possible potential threats that could endanger the defense and integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.
• Even distribution of development throughout the country as an effort to prevent the emergence of conflicts.

How to Overcome Domestic Threats

In the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia, a strategy has been set out to regulate the defense and security of the Indonesian nation in overcoming the threat of national integration.

Article 30 paragraph (1) to (5) of the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia states that:

1. Every citizen has the right and obligation to participate in the defense and security of the state.
2. State defense and security efforts are carried out through the defense and security system of the entire people by the Indonesian National Armed Forces and the Indonesian National Police of the Republic of Indonesia, as the main force, and the people, as the supporting force.
3. The Indonesian National Armed Forces consist of the Army, Navy and Air Force as state instruments tasked with defending, protecting and maintaining the integrity and sovereignty of the country.
4. The National Police of the Republic of Indonesia as an instrument of the state that maintains security and public order are tasked with protecting, protecting, serving the community, and enforcing the law.
5. The composition and position of the Indonesian National Armed Forces, the Indonesian National Police, the relationship between the authorities of the Indonesian National Armed Forces and the Indonesian National Police in carrying out their duties, the conditions for citizens’ participation in defense and security efforts are regulated by law.

Also read:

Examples of Honest Behavior – Honest is an attitude that must be possessed by someone. Maybe Sinaumed’s is still confused about examples of honest behavior. The following are examples of honest behavior that Sinaumed’s can practice at home and in other environments. To do so, Sinaumed’s also needs to learn the meaning and examples. Honesty is one of the attitude steps that must be taken by everyone in carrying out their life so that it is more meaningful.

In practice, this honest attitude must be applied in our lives wherever we are. Actually, someone can plant a seed of trust in us. By being honest, this will enable Sinaumed’s to become someone who can be trusted at all times and trusts many people.

So how do we show that we are honest individuals? This can be achieved by providing several examples of honest behavior at the slightest detail. Sometimes many people ignore or blame a small honest attitude because they think it will not have an impact on their life. Even though this is the beginning or basis for greater honesty and greater impact.

To understand honest behavior further, Sinaumed’s can refer to this article which discusses how honest behavior is, the benefits, and examples of good honest behavior even to be learned from childhood as follows:

Definition of Honest Behavior

• Be honest with yourself
• Honest in words
• Honest in behavior
• Be honest when you promise

On the other hand, the obligation to be honest at all times has also been stipulated in the Qur’an. According to Imam Ghazali, honesty must be done with intention and will. In another sense, his actions should not be provoked by other people, but Allah SWT. People who practice with honest behavior then deserve to enter heaven. In Islam, honesty is divided into two parts.

The first is honesty in words, namely conveying the message that Sinaumed’s hears or conveys. Every word in an information must be maintained and conveyed the truth. Sinaumed’s needs to know that honest behavior shows purity of mind. Other people will see it if they want to tell us something. An example of this honest behavior is keeping promises.

The second is honesty in deeds or deeds. An attitude of honesty is manifested in actions that show the sanctity of a person’s day. This form of behavior can be seen as someone’s trust to entrust us to do something. An example of honest behavior in this type of honest action is when Sinaumed’s delivers money or alms in its entirety.

Based on this explanation, it can be concluded that honesty is a noble deed and should be used as an example in our daily lives. So honesty means conformity between words and deeds. Honesty also means telling what is. So if we make a small, big, or trivial mistake or crime, we must admit it, whatever the risk is for what we have done.

Example of Honest Behavior

1. Admit Mistakes

When we make a mistake, we must be honest to find peace in our hearts by feeling guilty and admitting it is for the good of ourselves and others. Hiding big things and small flaws can make our hearts and minds anxious. So, if we don’t act honestly, make sure that the mistake doesn’t turn into a fireball that will destroy us in the future. Admitting what is wrong with us is an honest action.

Doing this in society will make Sinaumed’s’ mind feel better. Of course, if we hurt ourselves, punishment can come at any time. If we are really punished, it must of course be acknowledged. For example, if we disobey traffic, it can endanger other people’s lives. In this case, it is best to admit mistakes and tell the truth.

Some people may find it difficult to admit their mistakes due to several factors. Besides choosing to choose honest behavior, a person tends to cover up his mistakes because he is afraid, worried, or is deliberately behaving badly. This is actually natural for the human mind to have, but choosing to be honest is a wise attitude as a dignified creature. Even though it is difficult to admit mistakes, what you need to do is make peace with yourself and believe that mistakes are natural so that it is okay to admit them.

So admitting a mistake needs to start from yourself. This means that we must first be honest with ourselves that what we are doing is a mistake. With this understanding, it may be easier for us to admit to others because we are already aware of these mistakes and already understand the risks that must be faced. In this case the attitude of honesty is always continuous with other things within us, because honesty is actually only ourselves and God who knows it.

2. Returning What Is Not Right

The honest action to take and observe is to return something that is not right. For example, if Sinaumed’s finds a wallet on the street. It is recommended that Sinaumed’s contact the person concerned directly and return the wallet. Or when someone entrusts Sinaumed’s to help them shop. If any changes are found, Sinaumed’s is obliged to publish the changes in full.

This example of honest behavior may seem trivial or simple, but if the context is expanded it will be a big responsibility for someone to carry someone’s trust, for example if Sinaumed’s becomes a minister or tasks with bigger responsibilities rely on honest behavior in their implementation practices. .

3. Not Steal Other People’s Items

One example of honest behavior that Sinaumed’s must do in everyday life is not to steal other people’s things. This often occurs in the family and the wider community. Maybe not 100% taken, however, renting family stuff without permission is not a noble thing.

Many families fight about borrowing things without the owner’s permission. So it’s best to stop this unhealthy trait. Sinaumed’s may feel like he’s trying to put on something from the family. However, the person who owns the item is not always willing to lend it without permission. So make it a habit to ask permission every time Sinaumed’s wants to lend something from someone.

4. Examples of honest behavior at school

Many say that school is a second home for children. That is why in school we also need to apply honest behavior in various matters. Even as a place of learning, we can also learn about honest behavior while practicing it well at school. The following is an example of honest behavior that Sinaumed’s needs to do while at school:

• Acknowledge when Sinaumed’s doesn’t do a certain lesson’s homework by providing an honest reason or explanation
• Promise not to lie to teachers and schoolmates
• Do not steal things from classmates or other people at school
• Be honest when giving money according to the price of food in the school canteen
• Don’t cheat on a test
• Do not use school tuition money for other things

5. Examples of honest behavior at home

Even at home, sometimes we also make mistakes and are reluctant to admit it. Even within our homes and families we lie a lot or are dishonest with one another. Whereas home and family should be a place that is open to our true selves. The following are examples of honest behavior in a home or family environment:

• When we are wrong, admit the mistake to our parents, brothers and sisters.
• Without going overboard to provide information about the true value of what information is obtained
• Return the remaining total shopping money to parents
• Do not steal or use family property without permission
• Be honest when making mistakes outside the home that might harm other people or your family
• Not lying on behalf of the family
• Not lying where to go dna with whom

6. Examples of honest behavior in the local environment

Basically, honest behavior will have an impact on our wider environment, namely the honesty that we learn at school and at home. The following is an example of honest behavior that Sinaumed’s can practice in your community:

• Do not spread rumors or gossip whose truth is unclear
• Carry out the tasks given by village officials honestly and not excessively
• If Sinaumed’s finds an incident that requires follow-up, he is ready to become a witness
• If a guest comes to your house, report it to the RT and RW
• Be kind and honest to your neighbours
• Don’t lie to avoid going to events Sinaumed’s might actually attend
• Be honest when trading or when Sinaumed’s is a buyer

Benefits of Behaving Honestly

If we are honest with everyone but not ourselves, then it is unfair to ourselves. When we practice honesty, we naturally benefit from honest behavior in our daily lives. So try to discover the benefits of honest behavior in everyday Sinaumed’s life and it is very useful to apply to children from an early age. The following are the benefits of being honest, no matter how small and wherever we are:

1. Can Achieve Success

Someone certainly very well behaved to be honest. It’s not uncommon for honest people to succeed. One of the benefits to be honest, it’s not just success at work, even Sinaumed’s can be successful in many things around the world. An honest person must have principles in his life to continue to do good, including good for himself. An honest person’s chart will gain a lot of people’s trust and make it grow to become a successful person.

2. Trusted by Many People

One of the benefits of being honest in everyday life is being able to gain the trust of many people. When someone has trust, it can also benefit us. For example, let’s say we are honest and someone hires us. From there we can get jobs and food. The benefits of behaving honestly show how positive it is to be honest with others.

3. Avoid Slander

One of the benefits of being honest is being able to create us to avoid slander. When we are always trustworthy when conveying something, then people will place their trust in us. Then, if someone tries to behave badly by slandering us, then other people will not be easily influenced because they already know how honest we are. Sinaumed’s needs to underline that trust is an important thing for someone to socialize, so being honest is someone’s wise way to socialize.

4. Experience Peaceful and Dangerous Life

Another advantage of being honest is that Sinaumed’s can easily earn the trust of others. The more we get used to speaking and acting honestly, the happier and more peaceful our lives will be. When there is nothing to hide, the mind is calm. Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to hide what happened.

Only honest actions give us positive energy. The positive energy that surrounds us has a happy effect. So if you want to feel happy and calm, we can start by behaving honestly. We must be honest not only with others, but also with ourselves. After knowing the benefits of honest behavior, it’s a good idea to practice various honest behaviors in our daily lives.

Teaching Honest Behavior in Children

This happens because children are afraid of being punished if they make mistakes. In addition, children are also afraid of disappointing their parents if their expectations are not met. In addition, children at this age do not fully understand what is right and what is right. So, as parents at this age, it’s good for Sinaumed’s to pay more attention to children’s behavior.

Sinaumed’s can start introducing honest behavior with simple things, such as openness by frequently asking what they have just done. Such little attention is able to make children closer and open to their parents, so they are not afraid to be honest about what they are doing.

Well, that’s an explanation of examples of honest behavior and its benefits in everyday life. Positive meaning right? So there is no longer any reason not to behave honestly. If Sinaumed’s is interested in learning about honesty and other emotional management, you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.

 

 

• Understanding Fasting: Types, Terms, Pillars, and Conditions
• Prayers Ask for Matchmaking and Practice to Accelerate Matchmaking
• Types of Compulsory Fasting: Definition, Intentions, Time and Conditions
• 10 Benefits of Reading Al-Quran, Lots of Fadhilah!
• Prayers Before and After Studying with Adab and Benefits

Function of the Endometrium – Sinaumed’s, did you know that the endometrium is one of the most important parts of the female reproductive system? The function of the endometrium in a woman’s body is closely related to the reproductive process. This section has an important role in the menstrual cycle during pregnancy.

The endometrium or uterine wall has three layers named perimetrium (outer layer), myometrium (middle layer) and endometrium (inner layer). The endometrium consists of tissues that are arranged into layers of the uterine wall from the outermost layer to the innermost layer. This disorder can develop into serious conditions such as endometriosis, hyperplasia, and even cancer.

If there is no embryo attached to the endometrial lining, the embryonic lining will be damaged and cause bleeding. This bleeding is what we call menstruation. Before knowing the function of the endometrium, consider the following explanation about the function of the endometrium and the menstrual phase that causes changes in the endometrium.

Menstrual Cycle

1. Menstrual or Menstrual Phase

This cycle begins with the discharge of menstrual blood through the cervix and vagina. Menstrual blood is a mixture of old blood and decaying uterine lining tissue. The normal duration of menstruation is 2 to 8 days with an average of 5 to 6 days

2. Proliferative Phase

In this phase when the ovaries mature the follicles (follicular phase) which contain the egg, the uterus responds to the estrogen produced by the follicles. Estrogen triggers the lining of the uterus to thicken again after it decays during menstruation. This phase is called the proliferative phase.

In fact, the endometrium is at its thinnest during menstruation and gets progressively thicker during this phase until ovulation occurs. This phase is the preparation of the uterus for the implantation and growth of the fetus in case there is a fertilized egg during ovulation.

3. Secretory Phase

In this phase, the lining of the uterus prepares itself to support the pregnancy process or decays as menstrual blood. This phase itself is commonly referred to as the secretory phase because the lining of the uterus secretes or produces and releases many types of chemicals. When the egg is fertilized, substances secreted by the endometrium function to assist the implantation process in early pregnancy. If the egg is not fertilized, the substances released will trigger the lining of the uterus to decay.

In parallel with this phase, the ovary enters the luteal phase and the follicle that has released the egg (ovulation) turns into a corpus luteum. The corpus luteum will then produce the hormones progesterone and estrogen.

If there is no fertilization, the corpus luteum will stop producing progesterone and estrogen. However, if fertilization occurs, the corpus luteum will continue to produce progesterone to support the pregnancy process.

Endometrial function

From the explanation above, it can be seen that the endometrium is the tissue where implantation occurs. Implantation is the process that occurs when the fertilized egg attaches to the wall of the uterus. This process is an early marker of pregnancy.

In addition, during pregnancy, the glands and blood vessels in the endometrium can provide oxygen, nutrients and other substances for the fetus to continue to develop. The endometrium fuses and forms the placenta with the outer layer of the embryo.

Abnormalities that can arise in the endometrium and their causes

If the function of the endometrium above cannot run properly, it means that the endometrium is considered to have a disorder or abnormality in it. This condition is characterized by the emergence of problems with menstruation. The following is an explanation of the abnormalities that may arise in the endometrium that you need to be aware of

1. Endometriosis

Endometriosis is a condition that occurs when endometrial tissue that is supposed to grow in the uterus actually grows outside the uterus. This condition can cause severe pain, especially during menstruation. Endometriosis most often involves the ovaries, fallopian tubes and pelvic tissue.

Endometriosis can also cause problems with female fertility. This condition can get treatment such as taking drugs, hormone therapy to surgery. To avoid endometriosis you can also do regular exercise, maintain an ideal body weight, reduce caffeine and alcohol consumption.

The exact cause of endometriosis is still unknown, but there are several things that are thought to trigger this condition, such as:

a. Retrograde menstruation

this condition is a condition when menstrual blood does not flow out of the body through the vagina but reverses direction and enters the pelvic cavity through the fallopian tubes or fallopian tubes.

This condition causes endometrial cells to stick to the pelvic wall and the surface of the pelvic organs. These cells will then continue to grow thick and cause bleeding during the menstrual cycle.

b. Immune system disorders

In this condition, the body’s immune system fails to recognize and instead gives up endometrial cells that mistakenly grow outside the uterus.

c. Immature cell changes

These immature cells can turn into endometrial cells during puberty. This can occur due to hormonal changes in the body, one of which is the hormone estrogen.

d. Endometrial cell migration

This condition is because endometrial cells can move to other parts of the body through the blood and lymph, which are the main part of the immune system.

e. Operation

Procedures such as caesareans and hysterectomies can cause endometrial cells to stick to the incision area so that endometriosis can occur.

2. Endometrial Hyperplasia

Endometrial hyperplasia can occur due to excessive thickening of the endometrial lining. This disorder is believed to occur due to hormonal imbalances in the body in the form of excess production of the hormone estrogen

These hormonal abnormalities can trigger the thickening of the endometrial lining. The condition of unbalanced hormones is also characterized by the lack of production of the hormone progesterone which disrupts the process of egg fertilization.

For women who experience endometrial hyperplasia, the endometrial lining does not shed even if fertilization does not occur. This can cause the cells contained in it to multiply continuously.

Symptoms that can be seen in this condition include irregular menstruation, too much menstrual blood volume, menstrual pain, prolonged menstruation or more than 10 days, less than 21 days between the first menstruation this month and the next month’s first menstruation, menopause but experiencing vaginal bleeding.

There are ways to cure or do some treatments such as progestin preparations, this drug can be given in the form of tablets that are taken orally, injected or in the form of creams for the vagina.

Other treatments can also be done, such as performing a curettage by ‘scraping’ the endometrial tissue to reduce its thickness. This condition can also lead to cancer, so the process of removing the uterus can also be done. This is done if the consideration is not wanting to have children.

3. Endometrial cancer

Endometrial cancer can also be referred to as uterine cancer. Because uterine cancer generally appears more often in the lining of the uterine wall or the endometrium.

In some cases uterine cancer can also start from abnormalities in the muscles in the uterine wall. This type of uterine cancer is also known as uterine sarcoma. Just like other abnormalities that occur in the endometrium, endometrial cancer can also occur due to hormonal imbalances in the body. This can be characterized by excess levels of the hormone estrogen. Other conditions can also occur such as obesity which can cause this disease to occur.

Usually some people with this cancer can experience some of the following signs:

1. Abnormal bleeding, after menopause or between menstrual cycles.
2. Pelvic area pain, or pelvic heaviness.
3. Drastic weight loss
4. Prolonged fatigue
5. Easy nausea
6. Feel pain during sexual intercourse
7. Pain in several parts of the body including the legs and back.

All women have the potential to develop endometrial cancer, but there are several factors that can increase the risk, such as:

a. Changes in the balance of female hormones

The amount of the two hormones estrogen and progesterone produced by the ovaries is not always stable. The hormones estrogen and progesterone can experience ups and downs or fluctuations that can cause changes in the endometrium

When the hormone estrogen increases but the hormone progesterone does not, a woman can be at risk for endometrial cancer

The conditions that most often cause an increase in the hormone estrogen are irregular ovulation in diabetics, obesity and polycystic ovary syndrome.

b. Having long menstrual periods

A woman who starts having menstruation or menstruation before the age of 12 and menopause at an advanced age or above 55 years can be at risk of experiencing endometrial cancer.

This is because the longer the menstrual period, the more exposure to estrogen will disrupt your endometrium.

c. Never been pregnant

Women who have never been pregnant have a higher risk of endometrial cancer. Meanwhile, women who have conceived at least once in their lifetime can avoid the risk of this cancer.

d. Elderly

With increasing age, the risk of endometrial cancer also increases. Endometrial cancer most often occurs after menopause or stopping menstruation.

e. Obesity

Overweight or obesity can also increase the risk of endometrial cancer. This is because excess fat in the body can change a woman’s hormonal balance.

f. Hormone therapy for the treatment of breast cancer

Women who have just recovered from breast cancer treatment are at increased risk of developing endometrial cancer. That’s because of the side effects of hormone therapy during breast cancer treatment.

This therapy is in the form of taking the oral drug tamoxifen. Indeed, this is still rarely found, but if Sinaumed’s is undergoing this treatment then you should consult a doctor.

g. Lynch syndrome

This syndrome is a disorder in people that causes the risk of colon cancer. This syndrome is caused by a gene mutation that is passed from parent to child.

If any of your offspring are diagnosed with this syndrome, immediately discuss this with the doctor.

In addition to colon and rectal cancer, people who have this syndrome can also range from ovarian cancer, stomach cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, to endometrial cancer.

4. Too Thin Size

Thick and fertile endometrium is needed so that implantation or pregnancy can occur. Generally, the endometrium is about 8-13 millimeters thick. Even so, some cases of women experience abnormal size of the endometrium.

The size becomes too thin if the thickness is under 7 millimeters. If the endometrium is too thin, implantation will not run optimally. The embryo will experience nutritional deficiencies so that the pregnancy cannot continue and can pose a risk of miscarriage.

5. Hormonal Disorders

Hormonal disorders or imbalances can occur at any time. It often affects women who are overweight or obese or who suffer from PCOS. Estrogen levels in women with one of these conditions are usually out of balance with the hormone progesterone.

When the endometrium does not have stable hormones, it will make it difficult for the fertilization process.

6. Uterine Polyps

Excessive growth of the lining of the uterus can result in polyps. Polyps are growths like “fingers” attached to the wall of the uterus. They can be as small as a sesame seed or larger than a golf ball.

The exact cause of endometrial polyps is still not known with certainty. However, it tends to grow when the hormone estrogen in the body exceeds its limits.

There are several other factors that can increase the risk of endometrial polyp disorders such as being overweight or obese, tamoxifen or treatment for breast cancer, postmenopausal hormone replacement therapy, family history of lynch syndrome, cowden syndrome.

The symptoms that initially appear in sufferers of this condition can vary. However, in general, uterine polyps can be recognized by the following symptoms.

• Irregular menstrual cycles
• Excessive length or volume of menstruation
• Bleeding from the vagina between two menstrual cycles
• Spotting and bleeding appear after menopause
• Bleeding after intercourse
• Difficult or unable to get pregnant.

Uterine polyps can certainly be cured with several treatments, such as using drugs to balance hormones, hysteroscopy or curettage, hysterectomy or uterine removal surgery.

Most cases of polyps are not cancerous, but the correct diagnosis is when Sinaumed’s goes to the doctor.

7. Asherman’s syndrome

This syndrome is a fairly rare genetic disorder of the uterus. It is characterized by the presence of bands of scar tissue that line the uterine wall. The cause can be triggered by various factors such as uterine tissue surgery and endometrial infection

A person may experience a variety of different symptoms depending on the severity of the disease including reduced menstrual flow, increased cramping and abdominal pain, missed periods (amenorrhea), infertility.

Treatment options for this syndrome are hysteroscopic surgery, insertion of a Foley catheter, and restorative therapy (hormone treatment).

8. Pelvic Inflammation

It could be that bacteria or microbes enter the cervix and spread to the upper female reproductive tract.

The infection can affect one or more of the pelvic organs, including the uterus, cervix and fallopian tubes.

There are several symptoms starting from the occurrence of pelvic inflammation or (PID) such as pelvic pain, urgent need to urinate, pain when urinating.

Treatment that can be lived is to take drugs such as antibiotics.

Closing

So, that was Sinaumed’s’ explanation of the function of the endometrium and also the abnormalities that might occur. As previously explained, this endometrium can cause several abnormalities.

Even so, the disorder can be prevented by undergoing reproductive health. So, women must maintain the health of their reproductive organs, Sinaumed’s, to avoid these problems.

Electromagnetic induction is a symptom of the emergence of an electric current in an electric conductor due to a change in the magnetic field around the conductor. The concept of electromagnetic induction is based on the discovery of Michael Faraday and Joseph Henry in 1831. A changing magnetic field produces a potential difference called an induced electromotive force and the resulting electric current is called an induced electric current.

Understanding Electromagnetic Induction

Electromagnetic induction is the occurrence of an electric current due to a change in magnetic flux. Magnetic flux is the number of lines of magnetic force that penetrate a field. A scientist from Germany named Michael Faraday had the idea that magnetic fields can produce electric currents. In 1821 Michael Faraday proved that a changing magnetic field can give rise to an electric current.

Galvanometer is a tool that can be used to determine whether there is an electric current flowing. The electromotive force that arises as a result of changing the number of lines of magnetic force is called an induced emf, while the flowing current is called an induced current and the event is called electromagnetic induction.

Factors that affect the amount of induced emf include:

• The speed of change in the magnetic field, the faster the change in the magnetic field, the greater the induced emf that arises.
• The number of turns, the more turns, the greater the induced emf that arises.
• Magnetic strength. The stronger the magnetic phenomena, the greater the induced emf that arises.

Electromagnetic Induction Concept

Induction electromotive force is the emergence of an electromotive force in the coil which includes a number of flux lines of magnetic field force, when the number of flux lines of force is varied. In other words, an electromotive force will arise in the coil if the coil is in a magnetic field where the field strength varies with time.

In general, electromagnetic induction is a symptom of the emergence of an electromotive force in a coil or conductor when there is a change in the magnetic flux in the conductor or when the conductor moves relatively across a magnetic field.

When the north pole of a magnet is moved into the coil, the galvanometer needle deviates in one direction (eg to the right). The galvanometer needle immediately returns to zero (does not deviate) when the magnet is placed in the coil for a moment. When the bar magnet is removed, the galvanometer needle will deviate in the opposite direction (eg to the left).

The galvanometer needle deviates due to the current flowing in the coil. An electric current arises because a potential difference arises at the ends of the coil when the bar magnet is moved in or out of the coil. The potential difference that arises is called “Induction Electromotive Force (induced emf)”.

When the bar magnet is moved in, there is an increase in the number of lines of magnetic force that cut the coil (the galvanometer deviates or there is current flowing). When the bar magnet is silent for a moment, the galvanometer needle returns to zero (no current flows). When the bar magnet is removed there is a reduction in the number of lines of magnetic force cutting the coil (the galvanometer deflects in the opposite direction).

So, due to changes in the number of magnetic force lines that cut the coil, a potential difference or induced emf arises at both ends of the coil. An electric current caused by a change in the number of magnetic lines of force cutting a coil is called an induced current.

The magnitude of the induced emf depends on three factors, namely:

• Number of coil turns.
• The speed in and out of the magnet from and out of the coil.
• The strength of the bar magnet used.

The Law of Electromagnetic Induction

1. Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic Induction

Faraday’s law of induction states that an electric circuit has an induced electromotive force whose value is directly proportional to the speed of change of the magnetic flux surrounding it. The line of magnetic force enclosed by a certain area in a perpendicular direction is defined as the magnetic flux.

Faraday found that induction is very time dependent, that is, the faster the magnetic field changes, the greater the induced emf. On the other hand, the emf is not proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic field B, but is proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic flux, ΦB, moving across a loop of area A, which is expressed mathematically as follows:

Φ = BA cos θ

With B equal to the magnetic flux density, that is, the number of flux lines of magnetic force per unit cross-sectional area penetrated by the lines of force of magnetic flux perpendicular to it, and θ is the angle between B and the line perpendicular to the surface of the coil. If the surface of the coil is perpendicular to B, θ = 90o and ΦB = 0, but if B is parallel to the coil, θ = 0o, so:

ΦB = BA

The coil is a square with side i as wide as A = i2. Line B can be drawn in such a way that the number of lines per unit area is proportional to the field strength. So, the flux ΦB can be considered as proportional to the number of lines passing through the coil. The magnitude of the magnetic flux is expressed in units of webers (Wb) which is equivalent to tesla.meter2 (1Wb = 1 T.m2).

From the definition of the flux, it can be stated that if the flux through the conducting wire loop with N turns changes by ΦB in the time Δt, then the magnitude of the induced emf is: What is known as Faraday’s Law of Induction, which reads: “electromotive force (emf) induces arising between the ends of a conducting loop is directly proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic flux enclosed by the conducting loop. The negative sign in equation (6.3) indicates the direction of the induced emf. If the change in flux (ΔΦ) occurs in a short time (Δt → 0).

2. Lenz’s Law of Electromagnetic Induction

If the induced emf is connected to a closed circuit with a certain resistance, an electric current will flow. This current is called the induced current. The induced current and induced emf exist only as long as the changing magnetic flux occurs.

Lenz’s law describes induced currents, which means that it applies only to closed conducting circuits. This law was stated by Heinrich Friedrich Lenz (1804-1865), which is actually a form of the law of the conservation of energy. Lenz’s law states that: “an induced emf always generates a current whose magnetic field is opposite to the origin of the change in flux”.

The change in flux induces an emf which creates a current in the coil, and this induced current creates its own magnetic field. The application of Lenz’s Law is in the direction of the induced current. The magnet is stationary so there is no change in the magnetic flux enclosed by the coil. The main magnetic flux that penetrates the coil in a downward direction will increase when the magnetic north pole is brought closer to the coil. The direction of induction can also be known by applying Lenz’s Law.

Application of the Concept of Electromagnetic Induction

In electromagnetic induction there is a change in the form of motion energy into electrical energy. Electromagnetic induction is used in the generation of electrical energy. Electrical energy generators that apply electromagnetic induction are generators and dynamos.

Inside the generator and dynamo there are coils and magnets. A rotating coil or magnet causes a change in the number of lines of magnetic force in the coil. These changes cause emf induction in the coil.

The mechanical energy provided by generators and dynamos is converted into rotational motion energy. This causes the induced emf to be generated continuously with a pattern that repeats periodically.

1. Electromagnetism

Electromagnetism is a branch of physics that studies the relationship between electric and magnetic fields in electric circuits that produce electromotive forces and electromagnetic fields. The main concept in electromagnetism is electromagnetic induction which is based on Faraday’s law of induction. The principle of electromagnetism is applied to the working systems of transformers, inductors, electric motors, electric generators and solenoids.

2. Alternating Current

Alternating current is an electric current whose direction changes periodically. The alternating current curve is represented by a sinusoidal shape. The principle of electromagnetic induction is used as the basis for the formation of alternating currents. Making alternating current in a power plant utilizes a permanent magnetic field that rotates a turbine. Types of power plants that utilize the principle of electromagnetic induction are hydroelectric power plants, coal steam power plants, wind power plants, and nuclear power plants.

3. Magnetic Field

Electromagnetic induction can be used to create a magnetic field. The flow of electric current to a conductor will cause a magnetic field which can be calculated based on the Lorentz force. The formation of a magnetic field through electromagnetic induction utilizes the force between two magnets that have been given an electric current. In addition, the creation of a magnetic field through electromagnetic induction is based on the use of the Biot-Savart law and Ampere’s law.

Practical Applications of Electromagnetic Induction

1. Power Generators

An electric generator is a machine that converts kinetic energy into electrical energy. The working principle of an electric generator is based on Faraday’s law of induction. Electric generators can produce two types of electric current, namely direct current and alternating current.

Electric generators that produce direct current are called direct current generators, while generators that produce alternating current are called alternating current generators and direct current generators. The number of glide rings in an electric generator determines the type of electric current it produces. An alternating current generator has two glide rings, while a direct current generator has only one glide ring.

If a coil with N turns is rotated with an angular speed w, then the induced emf generated by the generator is:

ε = BAω.N.sinθ

The induced emf will be maximum if θ = 90 ^o  or sin θ = 1 , so that:

ε max = BAω.N , so the equation above can be written as:

ε = ε max sin θ

ε = induced emf (Volts); εmax= maximum induced emf (volts)

N = number of coil turns; B = magnetic induction (T); A=area of ​​the coil (m2)

ω = angular velocity of the coil (rad/s); t = time (s); θ = ω.t = angle (o).

2. Electric Motors

An electric motor is a machine that converts electrical energy into mechanical energy. The working principle of an electric motor is based on electromagnetism and dynamic electricity. Mechanical energy is obtained from electromagnets which convert electrical energy into magnetism. The motion is produced by means of repulsion and attraction between like and dissimilar magnetic poles.

Changes in the type of energy only occur if the magnet is placed on a shaft that can rotate. This mechanical energy is used for industrial and household purposes. Industry generally uses electric motors in pumps, fans, compressors, and conveyors, while in households, electric motors are used in mixers, drills, and fans.

3. Transformer

A transformer or transformer is a device for changing (increasing or decreasing) AC voltage based on the principle of electromagnetic induction, namely transferring electrical energy by induction through the primary coil to the secondary coil. The transformer creates an emf in the secondary coil due to the changing magnetic field due to the flow of alternating electric current in the primary coil which is induced by soft iron into the secondary coil.

There are two types of transformers, namely step-up and step-down transformers. The step-up transformer functions to increase the AC source voltage, the number of turns in the secondary coil is more than the number of turns in the primary. The step-down transformer serves to lower the AC source voltage, the number of secondary windings is less.

If the output terminal voltage is greater than the changed voltage, the transformer used functions as a voltage booster. Conversely, if the output terminal voltage is smaller than the changed voltage, the transformer used functions as a voltage stepper. Thus, the transformer (transformer) is divided into two, namely step-up transformer and step-down transformer.

Step up transformer is a transformer that functions to increase the AC voltage. This transformer has the following characteristics:

1. The number of primary turns is less than the number of secondary turns.
2. The primary voltage is less than the secondary voltage.
3. The primary current strength is greater than the secondary current strength.

Step down transformer is a transformer that functions to lower the AC voltage. This transformer has the following characteristics:

1. The number of primary turns is more than the number of secondary turns.
2. The primary voltage is greater than the secondary voltage.
3. The primary current strength is smaller than the secondary current strength.

Examples of Electromagnetic Induction Problems

Question:

A coil with 100 turns in 0.01 seconds causes a change in magnetic flux of 10-4 Wb, how much is the induced emf that arises at the ends of the coil?

a. 1 Volt
b. 5 Voltc
. 50 Volt
d. 7.5 Volt
e. 300 Volts

Discussion:

It is known that

N = 100 turns
dΦ /s = 10-4 Wb/ 0.01 s = 10-2 Wb/s
ε = -N (dΦ/dt)
ε = – 100 (10-2)
ε = -1 volt
(sign negative only indicates the direction of the induced current)

So, the total electromagnetic induction emf generated at the ends of the coil is 1 Volt.

Conclusion

The emergence of an electric force (EMF) on the coil only when there is a change in the number of lines of magnetic force. The electromotive force that arises as a result of changing the number of lines of magnetic force is called an induced emf, while the flowing current is called an induced current and the event is called electromagnetic induction. There are several factors that affect the amount of induced emf, namely:

1. The speed of change of the magnetic field. The faster the magnetic field changes, the greater the induced emf that arises.
2. The number of turns The more turns, the greater the induced emf that arises.
3. Magnetic strength The stronger the magnetic field, the greater the induced emf that arises.

The concept of electromagnetic induction can be applied in technology products such as:

1. Generator is a device that can convert motion energy into electrical energy. The principle used is the change in angle based on Faraday’s law resulting in a change in magnetic flux.
2. A transformer or transformer is a device for changing (increasing or decreasing) AC voltage based on the principle of electromagnetic induction, namely transferring electrical energy by induction through the primary coil to the secondary coil.
3. An inductor is a component whose way of working is based on magnetic induction. The inductor, also known as a spool, is made of thin enameled wire. An inductor is a wire that is wound into a coil. The ability of an inductor to generate a magnetic field is called conductance.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Reference

• Abdullah, M. (2017). Basic Physics II . Bandung: Bandung Institute of Technology.
• Bagia, IN, and Parsa, IM (2018). Electric Motors . Bandung: CV. Rising Constellation.
• Kanginan, M. (2007). Physics 3 for Class XII High School . Jakarta: Erlangga.
• Soebyakto. (2017). Applied Physics 2 . Tegal: Publishing Agency of Pancasakti University of Tegal.
• Yubert. (2017). Basic Physics Material Concepts 2 . Bandar Lampung: AURA Printing & Publishing.

Example of an Essay – Writing an essay, in a scientific setting, is often used as an Indonesian language assignment (for schools) or a routine assignment from a lecturer (for students). Meanwhile, in a broader scope, writing an essay is a way to communicate and exchange ideas about a topic.

Essays can also be used as an effective medium to spread knowledge to many people. Meanwhile, essay writers have a designation, namely essays. An essayist can get many benefits during the essay writing process. Especially in writing and reading skills.

Therefore, an essay is not just a task that must be completed in order to get a grade from the teacher or lecturer. Why is that? To find the answer, see the explanation of the essay below.

Definition of Essays

There are many experts who write down the definition of an essay, such as Wijayanti who said that an essay is an essay or writing that contains the author’s arguments and views regarding an event in society.

Meanwhile, according to Widyamarta, an essay is an effort to generate views on a topic in a short form and the best way of telling. From these two meanings it can be concluded that the essay is closely related to the author’s personal experience in living everyday life.

But what is even more interesting, Emha Ainun Nadjib or Cak Nun, in the book This Is an Essay by Muhidin M. Dahlan (Gus Muh) refers to an essay as “Essays are not poetry. However, essays are not allowed to appear without a sense of proteika. Essays are not short stories, not novels, not theater repertoires, but essays are required to tell a story, are required to express an atmosphere, and even then the story and atmosphere must contain implicit, implied, or vague content. Because if not, he is accused of being a poem or a short story or a novel or a theatrical repertoire.” Gus Muh himself considered essays to be a “nonsense” style of writing, meaning neither poetry nor scientific work.

Regardless of its meaning, essays are considered to have an important role in encouraging the self-development of a student, both students and students, because by writing essays the writer must express his thoughts and reasons by following an appropriate framework.

And to do this, of course, writing techniques, high willpower, and good quality thinking are needed. In other words, an essay is an attempt to gather pieces of knowledge that the writer has acquired while studying so that they become a complete form. As explained by Agus Widayoko M.Pd.,Gr. in the book Writing Scientific Articles and Essays which he wrote in 2020.

So, it’s clear, the notion of an essay as a task that must be completed in order to get grades at school or campus is wrong and everyone who is in the learning process should at least try to write an essay.

The reason is, essays can help you learn to explore a topic or issue and convey a personal assessment of that topic. Apart from that, you also learn to build arguments with support based on reason and evidence. Finally, you will find out how to produce an interesting essay.

Essay structure

No matter how long or short an essay is, its structure only consists of three parts, namely the opening/introduction; Content/core; and finally Conclusion. The following is a complete explanation of the three sections:

Opener/Introduction

The opening section can be written in two short paragraphs or one long paragraph. In this section you provide a little background, a description of the latest situation regarding the topic to be discussed, or interesting information related to the topic.

Yup , essays should be made as interesting as possible to make readers curious and want to continue reading until they’re finished. Because of this, some people think that the opening section is the most difficult part of an essay.

To make an interesting opener, you can tell the reader what argument you have and why you believe that the argument is true or correct. Also, try to start with a general explanation and then move on to a narrower one.

Essay Core/Content

The main part of the essay contains the development of the main ideas mentioned in the opening section by adding a few supporting sentences. Of course, this supporting sentence must contain information that is in accordance with the main topic. In addition, try to write the main part in a structured and logical manner.

Sinaumed’s can develop body paragraphs in a number of ways, such as:

• Give examples of the topics covered
• Describe events or events related to the main topic chronologically
• Add anecdotes related to the topic
• Describes certain terms that are important for readers to know and are still relevant
• Analyze the causes or origins of the topic being discussed
• Add some effects or consequences related to the topic
• Describe the physical or character of the person, item, place, or utterance being discussed
• Use a combination of the above techniques.

In short, write down as much knowledge or information as you have about the topic being discussed.

Conclusion

Conclusion is a section that contains a summary of the discussion or reinforcement of the topics that have been mentioned in the opening and main sections. The goal is to let the reader know that they are at the end of the essay. Therefore, some writers often use transitional words such as “in short”, “finally”, and so on in this section.

Also, make sure you don’t add new information in the conclusion because it will make the essay incomplete or floating. If indeed you have new information that is considered important, it is better to write it in the opening or content section.

How to Write an Essay

To write good and interesting essays, Sinaumed’s needs to practice continuously until they become used to it. However, for starters, you can learn to write an essay that is finished and contains all the sections that must be included. You can see the method below:

1. Choose a Topic

Just like writing a paper, diary, or other writing, the first step in writing an essay is to choose a topic first. You can choose a topic that is specific, close to everyday life, or according to your own experience to make it look interesting.

After getting the topic, spend a few days reading articles, books, blogs, or other references that can add to your knowledge about the topic. Make sure you read as needed. This means that the sources read must be useful for your topic or argument and can support the answers you prepare.

You can learn how to choose interesting topics from Kang Maman through his book entitled I Write So I Exist. In this book, Kang Maman explains his experience as a writer who has produced 24 books in 8 years. He also revealed a simple secret “ fishing 100 ideas a day ”.

 

 

2. Gathering Material

When reading references you might get some material that is relevant to the topic to be discussed. Gather all of the material as completely and clearly as possible, don’t do it in half. If necessary, look for factual data about the topic as this will be useful in supporting your argument.

You can collect material by paraphrasing from other people’s opinions or using a summary containing the main points that you will later develop yourself.

3. Make an Outline or Draft

After determining the topic and gathering material, you can proceed to the outline or draft stage. This stage helps you to provide an overview of the essay that will be made and the points that will be written.

Sinaumed’s can write a description of the arguments or points that you prepared in the previous section. The goal is that you can sort out information that is truly useful and usable.

If necessary, add examples related to the main topic then choose which points will be discussed first, second, third, and so on. In this way, you will get a rough draft of the essay you will make.

4. Start Writing Essays

After making an outline or draft, the next step is to start writing an essay. In this section you will “knit” all the pieces of information, evidence, data, or examples that have been collected when making an outline.

How to write it can be started from the opening / introduction or starting from the content first. If you already have a clear picture of the topic to be discussed, it’s best to start with the introduction first.

Conversely, if you don’t have a clear picture and still don’t fully understand the topic, you should start from the content section. That way, you can write the right introduction and support the body part, so that readers will more easily understand the arguments you write.

Don’t forget, write a good conclusion without adding new information. This means, conclusions must be written in a concise, concise, clear, and not long-winded manner.

5. Re-Edit the Essay That Has Already Been Written

If you have written all of the essay sections, leave the writing for a few hours or a few days. Forget all the arguments, points, and information you’ve written down. After completely forgetting, carefully re-read the essay from beginning to end.

In this way, you will be able to assess the quality of the essay objectively and thoroughly. You might find some sentences that don’t fit, aren’t interesting, or aren’t complete. Fix any flaws you find when rereading so you get good quality results.

To help you read your essay carefully, here are some questions you can ask yourself:

• Is the essay that I wrote complete in all its parts?
• Is each paragraph and argument related to each other and relevant?
• Are my arguments balanced?
• Are the examples and data relevant to the topic and main idea?

Example Essays

In order for Sinaumed’s to understand essays better, here are some examples of essays taken from essay anthology books that you can use as references:

 

Here are some examples of essays that you can use as references. With the discussion of the essay examples, the essay discussion in this article ends. Hopefully the discussion in this article can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

If you want to find books about essays, you can find them at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best! sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information . Hope it’s useful!

Definition of customs – Indonesia is a country with a heterogeneous population, each of which has different traditions, culture and habits in each region. It’s no wonder that our beloved country has various customs.
These different customs include norms and values ​​that the community must uphold in their daily life. The values ​​in question, for example, social, religious, cultural, and so forth.

Meanwhile, these norms, traditions, and values ​​should still apply today. Sinaumed’s, in order to recognize and ultimately preserve customs that have been painstakingly maintained for generations, it is important to know in advance the meaning of the customs themselves.

Definition of Customs

Below is the definition of customs according to various sources, such as the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), experts, to the official website.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) , custom is a code of conduct that is passed down from one generation to another as an inheritance, so that its integration is strongly related to patterns of community behavior.

As for etymology, the word custom comes from Arabic, adah which means habit or method. So, it can be interpreted that custom is an act that is repeated so that it becomes a habit that must be obeyed by the community in an environment.

Thus, customs are basically cultural behavior or rules that have been attempted to be implemented in a community environment. It is called by this name because it is a rule that applies with certainty and steadily, covering various consequences that govern human actions or actions in their social life.

Indonesian Customary Law

 

Definition of Customs According to Experts

The following is the understanding of customs from the perspective of experts. Let’s find out, Sinaumed’s!

Raden Supomo

Customs are interpreted as a synonym of unwritten law or customary law. In state legal entities, this law applies as a convention and life also becomes a rule with habits in village and city life.

Jalaludi Tunsam

According to Jalaludi Tunsam, customs come from the word adah which means ways or habits, this term also refers to an idea which contains cultural values, norms, customs and laws of an area. There are also written and unwritten sanctions if the customary law is not obeyed.

Notopura Harjito

Harjito said that customary law is an unwritten law. For the community, these customs are a way of life to achieve prosperity and justice.

Soekarno

Strong ties and influence in society are owned by customs. This bond depends on and supports habits in society.

Customary law

There are so many meanings that carry the term “customary law”. What is customary law?

Habits that are done repeatedly create customs. Then, these habits were passed down from generation to generation. After the emergence of customs, there will be customary law that develops in the community’s traditions. This law is quite different from the written law that exists in state law.

For Van Vollenhoven, a Dutch anthropologist, customary law is the whole rule that binds the way people behave. This rule applies to certain areas, complete with appropriate sanctions.

Meanwhile, Ter Haar said that customary law is the whole of the regulations that are embodied in customary decisions.

From the various definitions of customs put forward by these experts, it can be concluded that customary law is an unwritten regulation or norm whose creation functions to regulate people’s behavior. In customary law, there are sanctions and this law is even regulated in the 1945 Constitution, article 18B paragraph (2).

In other words, the state also recognizes the existence of customary law as the Indonesian legal system.

Elements of Customs

Sinaumed’s, the following are the elements included in a custom, as quoted from the Textbook of Customary Law , Yulia (2016).

• There is a person’s behavior
• Do it continuously
• There is a time dimension
• Followed by others

As for several other elements as expressed by Koentjaraningrat who divided customs into four special parts, namely as follows:

Norms

Cultural values ​​related to a person’s role in his environment and life are the meaning of the norm system. Everyone has a role in the values ​​and functions in social life.

Cultural values

Interpreted as a shared view embodied in habits passed down from generation to generation. In Indonesia, the hallmark of inter-community cooperation is mutual cooperation.

Law

Of course, we know enough about the law. In social life, the legal system is quite clear because it is a set of rules that can be seen clearly. This system has been implemented in people’s lives for a long time in order to create an orderly atmosphere.

Special rules

This is a rule that regulates very limited and clear activities within the scope of social life.

Examples of Customs

After getting to know customs better through understanding, customary law, and elements of customs, let’s find out and understand the existence of various examples and forms of very diverse customs in Indonesia!

Javanese Customs

In Java, the people are identical with the attitude of upholding the customs of their ancestral heritage. Javanese people also have various traditions and customs, from marriage, pregnancy, to death, they still preserve them.
Here are some examples of customs from Java to know:

1. Sekaten

Sekaten is a ceremony held to commemorate the birthday of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Every year, this ceremony is held at the North Alun-Alun of the Yogyakarta Kraton and is attended by thousands of residents, even tourists.

There, the Palace will carry out a procession or parade of mountains of local people’s produce paraded by royal courtiers and Kraton soldiers.

2. Marriage

We know that for the Javanese people, marriage is indeed considered very sacred with quite complicated customs. Today, many people have abandoned this tradition for various reasons.

On the night before the ceremony, the bride and groom need to do midodareni and siraman. Not only that, there is also the custom of surrender, when the groom gives the bride’s belongings. After the contract procession, there is also the tradition of balang ordering or throwing betel leaves, panggih or the meeting of the bride and groom, and dhahar klimah or bribing each other, and sungkeman.

Sumatran Customs

As one of the largest islands in Indonesia, Sumatra also has various customs which are still highly respected by its people. Sumatra consists of several provinces that have various traditions, for example North Sumatra with different customs from Aceh Province, and also different from South Sumatra Province.
Here are some examples of Sumatran customs:

1. Mangongkal Holi (North Sumatra)

The Batak people are still preserving the Mangongkal Holi custom. This tradition itself is a ceremony to dig up old graves and then take the bones of the corpse to be transferred to a new grave.

The Batak people believe that people who have died do not mean they are really gone. It is believed, they step on a process that is more perfect, namely the eternal realm. In fact, the spirits are also believed to be able to gather with other family members who have died.

The Mangongkal Holi custom has been passed down from generation to generation, and sometimes it is accompanied by the creation of a Marga Monument.

2. Nganggung (Bangka Belitung)

This custom from Bangka Belitung Province is carried out to commemorate Islamic holidays, such as the Prophet’s Birthday, Isra’ Mi’raj, to welcoming important guests. Community members in this custom must bring trays filled with food to the mosque.

Before eating it, the contents of the dulang are prayed for by local religious leaders.

Judicial Practice Handling Cases of Traditional Law of Archipelago Tribes

 

 

Kalimantan Customs

Not only the islands of Java and Sumatra, Kalimantan, which holds various cultural treasures, of course, also has its own customs which are still being preserved by its people.
Consisting of several provinces allows Kalimantan to have various traditions and customs. Not only in the form of traditional ceremonies, this cultural wealth also includes language, traditional clothing, special food, dance, music, and so on.

Here are some examples of customs from Kalimantan, Sinaumed’s:

1. Maccera Tasi

This tradition is still maintained by the people of Kalimantan today. In the form of a ceremony, the Maccera Tasi tradition involves a procession of slaughtering sacrificial animals, such as buffalo, goats or chickens at sea. The blood from these animals is thrown into the sea so that it becomes a symbol of giving blood to marine life.

This custom is carried out aiming to get abundant marine products.

2. Bath Tian Mandaring

To commemorate the 7th month of one’s pregnancy, this Tian Mandaring Bathing ceremony is performed. This tradition, which resembles Mitoni for the Javanese people, requires a mayang fence made of tied sugarcane stalks. Inside the fence, placed mayang water, flower water, kamal acid shampoo, and so on.

Sulawesi Customs

Sulawesi is one of the Indonesian islands which includes various tribes. Not surprisingly, in it there are various customs, cultures, and traditions that the people adhere to. Among them, there are several traditions related to Islam.
The following are examples of Sulawesi customs:

1. Mappalili

The tradition in the form of a traditional ceremony called Mappalili is usually held to start the rice planting season. Led by an ancient Bugis priest known as Bissu, this ritual is performed by gathering Puang Matoa at the arajang house, where the rice field heirlooms are stored.

Bissu Puang Matoa, wearing a striped shirt combined with a plain white sarong, will lead the event.

2. Pregnancy Customs

Of course, the period of one’s pregnancy really needs special attention, especially for the Bugis community. The time from the beginning of pregnancy to the fourth month is called by the local community as angngerang. At this time, the families of both parties must fulfill the wishes of the expectant mother, especially if it is in the form of food.

After entering 7 months, it is necessary to hold an anynyapu battang ceremony in which both families prepare various foods with certain symbolic meanings. As for this ceremony, the prospective mother and father will be bathed and dressed in traditional clothes and then side by side.
They will also be surrounded by their families and choose certain foods.

Balinese custom

Not only the people of Indonesia, Bali is widely known, even almost universally. This island, which is also known as the Island of the Gods, is still steeped in tradition even though it has been visited by various people. The people consistently preserve their traditions from generation to generation.

In Bali, even the wealth of customs and culture is one of the attractions for domestic and foreign tourists to witness it firsthand.
Geographically, Bali is indeed small. Even so, its cultural wealth is never inferior to other regions in Indonesia. As the dream island of many people, Bali also has traditions that are very well known to various parts of the world. For example, the tradition of cremation alias cremation which is always crowded with visitors.

Sinaumed’s, here is an explanation of some Balinese customs.

1. Ngaben

As we know, cremation is a funeral ceremony that has become an ancestral heritage and has been carried out by the Balinese people for hundreds of years. Balinese people who are Hindus believe that the ancestral spirits will become holy and rest in peace by burning the bodies.

Financially, this ceremony requires relatively large costs. Because it involves a lot of people and there needs to be a burning stage. For this reason, people who are less fortunate usually wait for some time to be able to carry out the cremation at the same time.
That way, the cost of this ceremony will be lighter because it is shared between several families.

2. Omed-Omedan

The Omed-Omedan tradition is quite unique. Balinese people hold the Omed-Omedan ceremony, in which young people aged 18-30 years will face each other after celebrating Nyepi. In this ceremony, they will be splashed with water, fight, then kiss each other to end it.

It has been around for decades, this tradition is still being preserved today.

Papuan Customs

Who doesn’t know Papua? This easternmost region of Indonesia has a variety of cultures that are very interesting not to be missed. Very famous for the Dani tribe who have quite unique customs, this can actually add to the uniqueness of culture in Indonesia.

Here are some examples of Papuan customs that you need to know:

1. Rock Party

One of the celebrations carried out by the Dani tribe is a rock-fired party. This party is held to celebrate marriage, birth, until victory over war. In a rock-fueled party, people will cook various types of food, from tubers to pork for consumption together.

Meanwhile, the food will be put into a hole filled with rocks and leaves. Later, food will be distributed to all villagers. When starting the process, the Dani tribe will start a fire by rubbing stones until sparks appear; the traditional way.

2. The Mummy Tradition

As a final example, there is also the tradition of mummification which is carried out as the name suggests: preserving the corpse. This is a custom of the Dani tribe. The difference is that they don’t bandage the corpse, but dry it in the sun and then store it in the cave.
One of the oldest mummies of this tradition is around 300 years old, which was left in the house and sometimes removed when tourists were interested to see it. Even though it seems terrible, this tradition is very interesting, isn’t it?

Conclusion

Sinaumed’s, those are various explanations related to customs , especially in Indonesia. Apart from getting to know the meaning, laws, and elements, we are also familiar with various kinds of customs in Indonesia which will be very much to explain in this article, so many and varied.

Of course, we can preserve our regional customs by first getting to know, learn, get used to, and consistently apply them in life. Don’t let many traditions slowly disappear because of apathy and reluctance to do things that aren’t too ordinary, OK?

Customary Criminal Law

A person who has a confident attitude will be able to easily improve his own quality, be it his own quality, quality in learning, quality in work, and so on. By having a confident attitude, a person will not feel ashamed or inferior in doing anything.

However, do you know what the definition of self-confidence is? What are some examples of this self-confidence? The following contains a complete discussion of self-confidence and examples of self-confidence. Let’s pay attention to the discussion of the explanation below.

A. Definition of Confidence

Self-confidence is someone who is able to think positively and believes that the abilities they have have quality. So that it can be beneficial for yourself, others, and also the environment. Someone who has a confident attitude will not think that he is a hindrance or obstacle in doing everything.

Confidence is formed not from heredity or from birth, but this confident attitude is formed by a socialization process that has been carried out during his life’s journey. Well, in other words, self-confidence is formed from various kinds of experiences that occur when a person carries out social interactions both in a new environment and in an old environment.

You can do this social interaction starting from the family environment. Because this family environment is generally the closest environment that is owned by someone. In a family a child gets an education that can be useful for his life in the future.

The education referred to here, for example moral education, skills education, and ethics education. You get all of this education in practice in everyday life and will always develop over time.

That way, to train and improve this confident attitude you can start from the family environment. This self-confidence can make you feel more confident and confident in yourself. And make yourself happy.

B. Factors that influence Confidence

Factors that influence self-confidence are divided into two parts, namely internal factors and external factors. So, what are the factors, let’s pay attention to the following discussion.

 

 

1. Internal Factors

Within these internal factors there are several factors that can impact a person’s self-confidence.

a. Self-Esteem and Feelings

Self-esteem and this feeling are necessary for individuals to feel happy. If needed by others, then the fulfillment of self-esteem, appreciation, and good adjustment is something that is very important in the formation of self-confidence.

If these needs cannot be fulfilled, then the individual will feel inferior. Increasing self-esteem in a healthy way can have a positive impact on the development of self-confidence.

b. Success

Success in the field, arts, sports and others can have an impact on how individuals see themselves. The more often individuals get success, it will be easier for him to have self-confidence. If failure continues to be experienced, then the individual will tend not to dare to step back and feel insignificant.

c. Physical condition

Physical condition is a condition that is seen either directly or has been attached to oneself. Confidence in each individual begins with a physical self-knowledge, how individuals assess, reject or accept an image of themselves. Individuals who feel satisfied and proud of their physical condition will have high self-confidence.

d. Experience

Experience is something that has been experienced by individuals and can have an impact on the next life. Bad experiences experienced by individuals in the past can have an impact on future lives, as well as self-confidence. The experience of failure that has been experienced will tend to reduce self-confidence. While the experience of success will make individuals more confident in their abilities. So that it can strengthen self-confidence.

2. External Factors

Within these external factors there are several factors that can impact a person’s self-confidence.

a. Parent

Parents’ assessment and expectations of individuals become an assessment in looking at themselves. If the individual is not able to meet most of these expectations or if his success is not recognized by his parents, a feeling of inadequacy or lack of self-confidence will arise.

b. School

School is a role model for children after the family. Students who often receive punishment and reprimand will tend to find it difficult to develop confidence and self-esteem when compared to students who receive a lot of praise and appreciation for their achievements.

c. Friend

Recognition from friends will determine the formation of an image of each individual. If an individual feels respected by a friend, he will tend to feel confident and feel motivated in developing his potential.

C. Benefits of Confidence

There are several benefits of self-confidence that you need to know about, including the following:

 

 

1. Emotionally Healthier

The first benefit of being confident you can get is feeling healthier emotionally. One study showed that people with self-confidence tended to be healthier and were more likely to live longer. This is evident from someone who is confident and has positive emotions, such as optimism, satisfaction, and others.

2. Never Afraid of All Challenges

The second benefit of being confident that you can get is that you are never afraid of any challenges. Because by having a confident attitude, you will feel able to go through all these challenges. Thus making the mind more focused and able to think positively. Besides that, you will be able to calm down properly and reduce the risk of mistakes happening.

3. Feel Easy in Facing All Challenges

The third benefit of being confident that you can get is that it feels easy to face all challenges. Because as explained in the first benefit that increases the emotion or attitude of optimism. Through this optimism will make you able to go through all obstacles with the abilities you have. In addition, you are also able to face various difficulties more calmly.

4. Develop Self Abilities

The fourth benefit of being confident that you can get is developing your own abilities. Because once you feel it is easier to face all challenges, you will be more courageous to step up and develop self-abilities that you did not have before.

5. Helps in Making a Decision

The fifth benefit of being confident that you can get is that it helps in making a decision. For example, as you know, not a few people find it difficult to make a decision. However, if you have a confident attitude, you will have a confident attitude and you will feel more secure in the abilities you have.

6. Optimizing strengths and accepting deficiencies

The next benefit of being confident that you can get is optimizing your strengths and accepting your weaknesses. Besides that, you shouldn’t make the shortcomings you have as a weakness. In fact, you will use the strengths that you have to the fullest in achieving a goal.

7. Growing Enthusiasm

The next benefit of being confident that you can get is growing enthusiasm within yourself. Because one of the injections of enthusiasm is by increasing self-confidence. With a big and strong spirit, you can overcome boredom and fatigue in carrying out the struggle to reach your goals.

8. Be a Good Communicator

The eighth benefit of being confident that you can get is being a good communicator. Often encountered people who are confident to be a good communicator. They feel unafraid to come clean when needed. In addition, a confident attitude can promote better and honest communication.

9. Motivate

The ninth benefit of being confident that you can get is motivating yourself. Because with a confident attitude, you will be able to look back on the achievements and successes that you get. You can use that as material to generate enthusiasm in achieving goals now, into the future.

10. Respected

The last benefit of being confident that you can get is being respected by friends, family, and those around you. Because it is no longer a secret that people will tend to respect people who have a fairly good level of self-confidence. In fact, someone who is confident is someone who can listen to other people’s perspectives and respond wisely to criticism.

D. Example of Confidence

Here are some examples of self-confidence that you need to know about, including:

 

 

1. Focused on problem solving

The first example of self-confidence that you need to know is directed towards problem solving. Basically, every problem is a hindrance or obstacle in achieving success. Someone who doesn’t have self-confidence when in a situation like that, will think negatively or even think about the failure that happened to come because he didn’t solve the problem.

However, if someone who has a confident attitude will think otherwise. This means that someone who thinks positively will be able to solve problems and find solutions or solutions.

2. Use positive language

The second example of self-confidence is using positive language when interacting with other people. Positive language can be said to be language that has polite and constructive elements. So that when using positive language interactions with others will be closer and can build positive behavior both for yourself and for others.

3. Use positive body language

Body language is very important when communicating with other people. Positive body language will make the other person feel happy and comfortable. However, if the body language of communicating with other people shows negative body language, it can result in a feeling of disappointment in the other person.

Positive body language comes from a positive mindset. Therefore, someone who has self-confidence will try to maintain a positive mindset so as not to use negative body language when interacting with other people.

4. Self Introspection

The third example of self-confidence is self-introspection. Confidence is not only related to other people. In other words, self-confidence is related to oneself, for example self-introspection.

Intro itself, includes a person’s way of realizing the shortcomings he has. By understanding the deficiencies that exist within you, then you can develop these deficiencies as an advantage. So you will feel confident in yourself.

E. How to Grow Self-Confidence

It’s never too late to understand everything, including understanding how to increase self-confidence. So that your self-confidence can increase.

Sometimes the method is not easy and cannot be immediately practiced thoroughly. However, gradually. Here are some ways you can try to increase your self-confidence.

1. Build a Positive Mindset

The first way to increase self-confidence is to build a positive mindset. If you always felt like you couldn’t do something, from now on try to form a positive mindset and mindset within yourself. So whenever you have doubts, just say “I can learn and do this if I want to.”

2. Recognize Weaknesses and Strengths

The second way to increase self-confidence is to recognize weaknesses and strengths. You need to instill in yourself that everyone has their own strengths and weaknesses. If you make a mistake or have a deficiency, don’t consider it stupid.

You need to remember that everyone has made mistakes and no one is perfect. You just need to improve and learn not to repeat these mistakes.

Not only that, you also need to focus on the strengths you have and develop those abilities. So that you can feel that you have room to grow. When you succeed in getting something, then respect and praise yourself for the efforts and successes you have achieved.

3. Focus on Small Steps or Changes

The third way to increase self-confidence is to focus on small steps or changes. As previously stated, building self-confidence cannot be done in an instant. Therefore, know that you need to appreciate every process or small change that has been achieved and carried out.

Don’t feel discouraged if this condition doesn’t improve as quickly as you thought. Maybe right now you still lack self-confidence, but the small steps or changes you make right now will eventually grow into big changes and keep you moving forward and growing.

4. Doing What You Like

The next way to increase self-confidence is by spending your free time doing all the activities you like. Whenever possible try to understand or learn a new skill that you previously wanted to try. In addition to creating a sense of happiness, new activities can also make you able to master new skills. That way, you can focus on the positives rather than your weaknesses.

This is information regarding self-confidence that you can practice. Hopefully this information related to self-confidence can help you to be more confident again and be useful for all.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Excel Multiplication Formula – For students, students, especially office workers, Microsoft Excel is a lifesaver that makes assignments and work completed faster. The formula (formula) in it facilitates the difficult, simplifies the difficult. One of the most widely used is the multiplication formula.

Therefore, the multiplication formula is usually taught from the start because everyone must understand it. Moreover, how to implement it is simple, easy, and also fast. With this formula, we can process data automatically.

So, in this article, we will discuss the excel multiplication formula in full and the problems that often arise when applying it. Listen to the end, OK!

Get to know Formulas (Formulas) in Microsoft Excel

Before learning the multiplication formula in Microsoft Excel, you must first understand what is meant by a formula or formula. Because the formula is a very important thing in excel.

In general, the formula (formula) in the Ms. Excel is an equation that is used when you do calculations and also process certain values ​​or data to get the results you want.

So if you want to do multiplication, you can write =3*2 and then press enter.

You can also add brackets “()” or other auxiliary signs in a table or range that has a specific address, alias cell reference. Well, generally writing formulas always refers to cell addresses such as A1, B1, C1, and so on.

As in the picture above, to multiply A1, B1, and C1, you can write =(A1*B1)*C1 or if you want you can also combine it with a certain value, for example =(A1*B1)+3. That’s more or less a brief description of the formula or formula in the Microsoft Excel software.

Complete Excel Multiplication Formula

There are many Excel multiplication formulas with different functions that you can use. Starting from being typed directly (manually), automatically, with the PRODUCT function, calculating percentages, multiplying money, and so on. Here is the full explanation.

Manual Excel Multiplication Formulas

1. Typed Directly

To do multiplication in Ms. Excel manually, you can type the numbers (data) directly into the cell by using the multiplication arithmetic operator (*).

For example, if you want to multiply the number 3 x 8 x 12, then write the formula directly in one of the cells. Because each formula in excel is written equal to (=), the writing becomes:
=3*8*12

After that press enter and you will get the result which is 288.

2. Numbers (Data) in Cell

You can also multiply numbers or data in cells. Usually this method is used when you make personal expense records, office financial reports, or the like.

As in the example below, to multiply the numbers you can write the formula =D1*D2*D3 in cell D4 then press enter, then you will get the result, which is 60.

3. Numbers (Data) from Other Sheets

In fact, you can multiply numbers on other sheets in Microsoft Excel. The trick is to write “=” in the cell you want, click all the cells that you will multiply until they run out, then press enter. To make it clearer, check the example in the image below.

Here we will use two sheets, namely sheet 1 and sheet 2. On sheet 1 there are numbers 3 and 4 while on sheet 2 there are numbers 2 and 12.

To multiply all these numbers, the formula is:
=D1*Sheet2!C1*Sheet1!D2*Sheet2!C2

after pressing enter, the result obtained is 288.

Automated Excel Multiplication Formulas

Apart from writing the cell names (eg D1, D2, and D3) manually, you can also do another method, namely type “=” then click the cell you want to multiply (D1), then type “*”, then click again on cell D2 , type “*” and click cell D3. Finally press enter.

You can use this formula to calculate multiple numbers in multiple cells at once. The trick is to first write a formula with the name of the cell in the cell where the results will be stored. After that point the cursor to the lower right corner of the cell until the cursor is in the + shape, then drag it down to the last cell. Like the example below:

After you get the multiplication result in cell C1 (=A1*B1), you can fill in cells C2, C3, C4, and C5 automatically in the above way. So the results you will get are as follows:

Automated Excel Multiplication Formulas with PRODUCT

Furthermore, you can use the special function “PRODUCT” to calculate multiplication in Microsoft Excel. It’s easy, really. Just click on the cell where the result will be stored later, then type “=PRODUCT” and click on the cell that you want to calculate, then type a comma “,” or a semicolon “;” (depending on the language you use). After that, click again what you want to calculate, then press enter. As in the example below:

So the formula obtained from this method is: =PRODUCT(A1;B1). After that, all you have to do is drag it down as explained earlier to fill cells C2 to C5.

You can learn other functions and their use in the book Mastering Microsoft Office Excel 2019 by Johan Arifin. This book is here to give you a solution to learn new things at ms. The new Excel 2019 is practical, effective, efficient and packaged in an attractive way so that you can operate Excel optimally.

Excel Multiplication Percent Formulas

1. How to Display Percent (%) in Ms. Excel

In Microsoft Excel, Sinaumed’s can also multiply by percent. But before that, you should know that Microsoft Excel cannot display the percent (%) format automatically.

Therefore, you must convert data or numbers into percent before multiplying them. You can do this by:

1. Type the percent symbol (%) in the cell directly
2. Use the “percentage” format in the Format Cells dialog box, or
3. Change the writing format in cells using the Tab Number -> Percent (%) menu. You can also use the CTRL+SHIFT+% key combination on the keyboard.

Of all these methods, the most frequently used is the second method.

2. Replacing the Amount by Percentage

You can use this method if Sinaumed’s wants to increase or decrease the amount with a percentage. For example, you want to reduce your weekly expenses by 15%, use the formula to calculate it:

=amount to reduce*(1-percentage deduct)

To make it clearer, look at the image below:

=B1*(1-C1) then after pressing enter, the result obtained is IDR 170,000.

In this formula, the number 1 used has a value equivalent to 100%. So automatically Ms. Excel will first calculate the data or numbers in brackets, namely 1-C1 (100% -15%) and get a value of 85%. After that, the result is just multiplied by B2 (Rp. 200,000. This means that if you write it manually the calculation will be like this:

100%-15%=85%
IDR 200,000 x 85%= IDR 170,000

If you want to increase your expenses by 15%, simply replace the minus sign (-) with the plus (+) to get the formula:

=B2*(1+C1)

After that press enter. From here, all you have to do is fill in cells C2, C3, and C4 automatically by moving the cursor in cell D1.

3. Multiplying Numbers in Multiple Cells by Percent

Sinaumed’s can also multiply the numbers in multiple cells by percents. For example like the image below:

1. First enter the numbers you want to multiply by 15% in cells A1-A5
2. Type “15%” or the percentage you want in an empty cell then copy this number with the CTRL C combination
3. After copying, select the cell A1 to A5 by dragging the mouse cursor down.
4. Right click on the cell that you have selected, then click paste special or paste special and select Value>multiply then click ok

5. You will get the multiplication of the numbers in cells A1-A5 by 15% as below:

Excel Multiplication Formula with Rupiah or Other Currency

Sinaumed’s can also calculate multiplication with rupiah or other currencies in Excel. For example, to calculate the total expenses for one week. You can multiply the price of each item you buy by the amount.

The calculation formula is =(price of the item you buy*number of item). So, to make it easier, try to check the formula image below:

So the formula is =B2*C2 or IDR 85,000 x 2 = IDR 170,000. After filling in cell D2, all you have to do is drag the cursor down to fill in cells D3, D4, and D5. In this way, you will get the following results:

Where did the IDR 670,000 figure come from? The answer is from multiplying the numbers in cells D2 – D5 using the formula:

=SUM(D2:D5)

Excel Multiplication Formula Sideways (Constant Number)

Sometimes when using the Excel multiplication formula we want to calculate the data in a cell with the same number in another cell. Cases like this are usually referred to as multiplication of constant (fixed) numbers. Now, to calculate the multiplication, you can add the $ symbol into the formula in the cell before copying it. To make it clearer, check the sample image below:

In the example above, you want to multiply all the numbers in cells A2 through A6 by the number 5 in cell C2. You will write the amount in cells B2 to B6. So, to get the result, you can write the formula =A2*C2 in cell B2.

To fill in cells B3 to B6, you cannot copy the formula down from cell B2 because Ms. Excel assumes that cell C2 references (which are multiplied) change to C3, C4, and so on, for which there is no data, so the results in cells B3 to B6 will be zero.

So for the formula to work, you need to add a “$” symbol in front of the cell name you are multiplying (C2-C6) so the formula becomes: =
A2*$C2 and so on

Why do you have to add the “$” symbol in the formula? Because the symbol is in charge of telling Ms. Excel that the reference to C2 is absolute, so when you copy the formula from B2 to B3 to B6, the cell reference will always go to cell C2.

Sinaumed’s can also use applied formulas and functions in Microsoft Excel. You can see the formulas and functions in the book Formulas and Functions Applied to Microsoft Excel for Processing Data and Reports compiled by Madcoms.

Why is the Excel Multiplication Formula the Result #Value?

Sinaumed’s should know that when using the Excel multiplication formula, the result can show a #VALUE error. #VALUE itself is Ms. Excel to tell you that there is something wrong with writing the formula or cell that you are referencing. This error occurs very often and can be caused by several reasons, namely:

1. There are text characters or symbols that cannot be read by Excel formulas
2. Error in the use of a period or comma in the decimal number format
3. When you combine numbers and text in one cell
4. There are spaces in the Excel multiplication, addition, or other formulas
5. There is invalid data
6. Use of Plus and Minus signs
7. The cells to be counted are empty, meaning they don’t have numbers
8. Error in Array Formula

The question is, how do you solve the #VALUE error in this Excel multiplication? Here are some ways that you can apply based on information written by Nur Awaluddin in his book Excel Troubleshooting, 100+ Microsoft Excel Problems and Solutions.

How to Solve the #VALUE Error in the Excel Multiplication Formula

1. Replacing periods with commas

You can use this method when multiplying decimal numbers. Usually if you write a decimal number with a period (.), Excel will treat it as text, not a number. For example you are 234.5.

To fix this, please replace the full stop with a comma, so instead of writing 234.5 you can write 234.5. After that, just enter it into the formula you will use.

2. Change the Text Format to Number (Number)

You can also solve the #VALUE error by changing the text format to number. You can do this through the Format Cell or the Custom sub menu on the Format Cell menu.

3. Separating Numbers with Units

The third way is the easiest way to do it, namely by separating numbers with units in different cells. The aim is that Ms. Excel can read the numbers you enter into the cells as numbers, not text.

Tips for Avoiding #VALUE Errors in Excel Multiplication Formulas

1. Write or input all numbers (data) into cells carefully. Make sure there are no other symbols, text, or non-numeric in the cell.
2. Use the =ISERROR(value) function. If the results that come out are correct, then Ms. Excel will show a FALSE result, otherwise if the result is wrong then what is shown is TRUE.
3. Check the data source. You should check the data source that you are going to calculate, who knows, the source is set with Merge & Center–a function to combine several cells at once. Errors like these can result in a #VALUE error in Excel multiplication formulas.

The #VALUE error often occurs, especially when you have to calculate a large amount of data. In addition, beginners or those who are just learning Ms. Excel also often encounters this #VALUE error due to ignorance. Therefore, you can apply the methods above to overcome the #VALUE error.

Closing

Thus the discussion about the excel multiplication formula , all multiplication formulas will make it easier for you to process data, so that the data is not wrong. Hopefully all the discussion in this article is useful for Sinaumed’s.

If you want to find various kinds of books about excel, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Understanding Collision Theory in Chemical Reactions – Chemical reactions can occur anywhere, even around us, anywhere and anytime. Not only in the laboratory, materials that interact to form new products are called chemical reactions. For example, cooking or cleaning the house also involve activities that can cause chemical reactions.

Chemical changes also occur in the human body, for example during exercise or even breathing. Chemical reactions are an integral part of technology, culture and human life. Iron smelting, glass making, tea and cheese making are examples of activities involving chemical reactions that have been used for thousands of years. Many chemical reactions occur on Earth, in the atmosphere, and in the oceans.

Chemical reactions or chemical changes occur everywhere, from the body’s metabolism of food to the absorption of sunlight into the human body. There are two kinds of changes, namely chemical changes and physical changes. A chemical reaction is a series of processes in which one or more substances change into one or more substances and produce new products. Substance is a chemical element or compound. Chemical reactions rearrange the atoms of the reactants into different substances. Chemical reactions usually occur in connection with physical changes, heat production, color changes, etc. The rate at which a reaction changes depends on and is affected by factors such as pressure and temperature.

However, do you know that one of the theories that discusses the series of chemical reaction processes is the collision theory? If you don’t know and want to find out more, in this discussion we will try to discuss the collision theory in full.

Furthermore, we will review the discussion of the collision theory in this chemical reaction below!

Definition of Collision Theory

Collision theory is a theory proposed independently by Max Trautz in 1916 and William Lewis in 1918 that qualitatively explains how chemical reactions occur and how reaction rates change in various reactions. Collision theory states that when closely matched reactant particles collide, only a certain percentage of collisions result in a real or significant chemical change; This successful change is called a successful collision. In a successful collision, there is enough energy at the time of impact, also known as activation energy, to break the existing bonds and form all the new bonds. This produces reaction products. Increasing the concentration of reactant particles or increasing the temperature,

When a catalyst is involved in collisions between reacting molecules, less energy is required for the chemical change to occur, and therefore more collisions have sufficient energy for the reaction to occur. Hence the rate of reaction increases.

Collision theory is closely related to chemical kinetics, collision theory qualitatively explains how chemical reactions occur and how reaction rates change in various reactions. Max Trautz and William Lewis found that when suitably reacting particles collided, only a certain percentage of the collisions caused a real or significant chemical change; This successful change is called a successful collision. This is the basic idea behind the collision theory formation process.

Very successful collisions have sufficient energy, also called activation energy. On collision, it breaks the existing bonds and forms all new bonds. This produces reaction products. Increasing the concentration of reactant particles or increasing the temperature, which results in more and therefore more successful collisions, increases the rate of reaction.

When a catalyst is involved in collisions between reacting molecules, less energy is required for the chemical change to occur, and therefore more collisions have sufficient energy for the reaction to occur. Thus, the rate of reaction increases by

Originator of the Collision Theory

• Max Trautz (19 March 1880 – 19 August 1960) was a German pharmacist.

He was very prolific and published more than 190 scientific publications mostly in the field of chemical kinetics. He was the first to study the activation energy of molecules, combining Max Planck’s new findings about light with observations in chemistry.

Max Trautz Born March 19, 1880 Karlsruhe, Baden Died August 19, 1960 (aged 80) Karlsruhe, West Germany German Nationality German Alma mater Karlsruhe University Known as Theory of Collision Career Karlsruhe Institute of Chemistry University of Heidelberg Heidelberg also known as British PhD. collision theory with Lewis. While Trautz published his work in 1916, Lewis published it in 1918. Due to World War II, however, they were not aware of each other’s activities.

• William Cudmore McCullagh Lewis, FRS (29 June 1885 – 11 February 1956)

William Lewis was an English pharmacist and academic. He is the Brunner Professor of Physical Chemistry at the University of Liverpool.

He was born in Belfast to Edward Lewis, a linen merchant, and his wife Francis Welsh McCullagh. He studied at Bangor Grammar school. Together. Down and the Royal University of Ireland, Belfast, where he studied physics and chemistry. After receiving his master’s degree in 1906, he became a demonstrator for one year and then moved to England to study physical chemistry at the University of Liverpool. There he received a scholarship to work for one year at the University of Heidelberg.

He was appointed the Brunner Professor of Physical Chemistry in 1913 (until 1937, when he entered the Chair of the Association of Inorganic Chemistry). In 1918, he presented his theory of chemical reactions, which was later called the “collision theory”. Max Trautz proposed a similar theory in Germany in 1916, which Lewis was not aware of because of the First World War.

In 1926 he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society. The candidate quote describes him as follows: Respect his research in physical chemistry. He made the most valuable and important studies of the energy relations of chemical change, and was among the first to apply the quantum theory of energy to chemical reactions. His pioneering work in this area proved invaluable and opened up a very promising field of research. Author: “Physical Chemical Systems.” Published a number of original publications on many issues in physical chemistry, as well as a long series of publications on the theory of radiation reactions.

He was appointed the first Grant-Brunner Professor of Physical and Inorganic Chemistry in 1937, a position he held until 1948.

He died at Malvern in 1956. He married Jeannie Waterson Darrock, with whom he had a son, Ian, who became a physicist at the Harwell Atomic Energy Research Institute.

Theory of Collisions and Chemical Reactions

According to the collision theory, chemical reactions occur when molecules collide. But according to this theory, not all collisions cause chemical reactions. This is because every moving molecule has kinetic energy, the faster the molecule moves, the greater the kinetic energy. If a molecule has high kinetic energy to begin with, the molecules collide harder, so the chemical bonds break. The breaking of these chemical bonds is the first step in forming a product. If the molecule has a low kinetic energy, the movement of the molecule is slower, the bonds are difficult to break to form products.

For a reaction to occur, the total kinetic energy of the molecules must be equal to or greater than the activation energy. Activation energy is the smallest amount of energy required to start a chemical reaction. If the energy is low, the molecule stays intact and no changes occur as a result of the collision.

From the explanation above, it can be concluded that there are two conditions for the collision to produce a reaction. First, the collision has the correct orientation and has a kinetic energy equal to or greater than the activation energy.

In case of a successful collision, there is enough energy, e.g. activation energy, when bonds are broken and new bonds are formed. During the process, reaction products are formed. An increase in the concentration of reactants or an increase in temperature causes an increase in collisions, which increases the number of successful collisions and thereby increases the reaction rate.

If the catalyst is involved in the collision process of the reacting molecules, the energy required to continue the chemical reaction is lower. Therefore, the number of collisions that have enough energy to complete the reaction, so the rate of reaction increases.

Collision Theory and Reaction Rates

Do you know? It turns out that we often apply the principle of reaction speed in our daily life. For example, when our mothers fry meat. Be sure to cut the meat into small pieces, the goal is to increase the contact surface. So that the reaction of raw meat becomes tender faster.

Sometimes mom adds unripe papaya to the meat stew to cook the meat faster. Because papaya contains the enzyme papain which acts as a catalyst and speeds up the decomposition of meat.

In addition, the principle of the reaction is also used in industry. For example, in the production of sulfuric acid using a vanadium pentaoxide catalyst, in the production process of ammonium fertilizers with an (Fe) catalyst, in the process of forming natural gas into various alcohol products using an active zeolite catalyst, etc. .

Reaction rates are also used in the automotive industry. The principle of operation of motorized vehicles, gasoline from the tank flows through the carburetor to the combustion chamber. The gasoline that enters the combustion chamber is already in the form of a gas with a smaller particle size than in liquid form. So it’s easier to burn. The reaction rate in collision theory has a meaning as a theory which states that reacting particles or reactants must collide for a reaction to occur. The reaction rate is the change in the concentration of a reactant or product per unit time. The measurement of the speed quantity can be seen as a fast or slow quantity based on a chemical reaction. The reaction rate has units.

The reaction rate indicates the rate of decrease in the number of reactants or the rate of increase in the number of products per unit time. Units for the amount of a substance are different, such as grams, moles, or concentration. The units of time are seconds, minutes, hours, days or years. In chemical reactions, many chemical substances are used as solutions or gases in a confined space, in this case the rate of reaction is used as a unit of concentration (molarity).

At the beginning of the reaction, the reactants are at their maximum, while the products are at their minimum. After the reaction occurs, more products are formed because the reactants decrease with time, especially M/s (molars per second).

Factors Affecting Reaction Rate

Several factors affect the speed of the reaction. Here we explain some of these factors.

– Temperature

Kinetic energy increases with increasing temperature. Therefore, the number of molecules whose energy is higher than the threshold energy also increases. Consequently, the number of effective collisions between reacting molecules also increases. However, the rate of reaction is not always equal to the increase in temperature. Certain reactions, such as biological reactions catalyzed by enzymes, can be slowed down by increasing the temperature because the enzymes can lose their activity.

– The concentration of the reactants

The speed of the reaction is directly proportional to the concentration of the reactants. theoretically, the reaction rate should increase with increasing concentration, since the rate is directly proportional to the frequency of collisions. The rate of reaction decreases with time as the concentration of the reactants decreases.

– Surface area

The rate of reaction increases as the surface area of ​​the solid reactants increases. Solid surface can be improved by turning it into a fine powder. For example, the reaction between zinc and hydrochloric acid occurs in seconds when zinc metal is reduced to a fine powder.

But the reaction is slower if it is in the form of zinc wire. This also applies to solid catalysts, which are usually used in chemical reactions as fine powders. For example, finely ground nickel is used in the hydrogenation of crude oil.

• Catalyst

A catalyst is a substance that changes the rate of a reaction without consuming it or causing a chemical change to occur during the reaction. Catalysts increase reaction rates by providing new pathways with lower activation energies for reactions.

In a reversible reaction, the catalyst lowers the activation energy of the forward and reverse reactions at the same rate and helps to achieve a correct balance. Certain substances can slow down the reaction rate.

These are usually called negative catalysts or inhibitors. They prevent reactions, form relatively stable complexes and require more energy. Thus, the reaction rate decreases.

Chemical reactions occur when there are collisions between particles with sufficient energy, this energy is called activation energy. Not all elements of chemical compounds can react with each other, only elements with sufficient activation energy can carry out reactions, most of these elements do not have sufficient activation energy. Well, for such conditions, we need a substance that allows all the particles to reach the activation energy to react with each other, increasing the reaction rate. In these conditions, the addition of a catalyst is required, the addition of a catalyst provides a significant change in activation energy. Catalysts provide a special pathway for a reaction to take place, these special pathways have a low activation energy so that they can increase collisions between particles. As a result, the reaction rate increases.

Conclusion

This is a brief discussion of the definition of collision theory. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of collision theory but also discusses the biography of the originator of collision theory, the relationship between collision theory and chemical reactions and the rate of reactions that are interrelated. Understanding the meaning of collision theory makes us understand more about what a chemical reaction is and its effects through several examples of chemical reactions that without us realizing it, we also always do it in our daily activities.

This is a review of the meaning of collision theory. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn everything about the meaning of collision theory and other knowledge related to chemistry, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram

 

Understanding Auguste Comte’s Theory in the Field of Sociology-Sociology in the field of science plays an important role in developing knowledge that is increasing rapidly today. Humans themselves are social beings who in their daily life must socialize with each other with other humans. This is what gave rise to a branch of science called sociology whose main focus is studying social activity between humans. In social life, humans must always apply sociological values ​​in their activities such as buying and selling transactions, establishing business relationships, or even looking for a life partner requires social activities that are based on sociological values ​​because it is impossible for humans to carry out all activities without need the help of others in their daily activities.

However, when discussing sociology, do you know who was one of the originators of the first sociological theory in the world? Namely a philosopher named Auguste Comte who introduced the science of sociology through his thoughts. In this discussion we will try to discuss the theory put forward by Auguste Comte.

Furthermore, we will describe the discussion below!

History of Sociology

Sociology was founded by the ancient Greeks. Sociology was originally combined with social philosophy. Separate, because then community discussion revolves around issues that attract public attention, such as war, social conflict. In the book Sociology: Society Diving in Society (2007), 19th-century French philosopher Auguste Comte expressed his concern about the state of French society after the burgeoning French Revolution. The impact of the revolution brought positive changes with the birth of an atmosphere of democracy, but it also brought negative changes. Negative changes in the form of class conflicts that lead to anarchism in society. Conflicts are caused by a lack of understanding to deal with changes or laws such as Social Security. Under such conditions, Auguste Comte suggested that the study of society be developed into an independent science. Sociology was born there as the youngest branch of social science. The term sociology was popularized by Auguste Comte in his book Cours de Philosophie Positive (1830). The book explains that the object of sociology is people or society at large. Sociology then became a science that developed in Europe, especially in Germany and France.

In its development stage, sociology can be separated from other social sciences such as economics and history. Sociology, which thinks about society, has slowly developed into an independent science. Many efforts, both scientific and non-scientific, have made sociology an independent science. The main factor for the emergence of sociology is the increasing attention to the welfare of society and the changes that occur in it.

Sociology Terms

Sociology is a science that studies social phenomena. The main goal of sociology is to understand patterns of behavior and social interaction. The father of world sociology is Auguste Comte. Why is Auguste Comte called the father of sociology? Because he first introduced science by using society as the object of his study.

Sociology is also known as a science that studies various aspects of society and its impact on human life. The term sociology was first used by Auguste Comte and later expanded into a scientific discipline by Herbert Spencer. The development of sociology as a science is divided into four stages, namely the Middle Ages, the Renaissance, the period of sociology as a social science that uses scientific methods from other sciences (18th century AD) and the sociology period. science with an independent scientific method (19th century AD). Sociology has a clear object of study that can be studied using the scientific method and can be arranged into a rational and interconnected system. The main research object of sociology is the structure of society, social elements, socialization and social change.

Get to know Auguste Comte

Auguste Comte (full name: Isidore Marie Auguste François Xavier Comte; 19 January 1798- 5 September 1857) was a French philosopher who is best known for introducing the fields of sociology and positivism. By using the principles of positivism, Comte built the foundation used by academics today, namely the application of the scientific method in the social sciences as a means of obtaining truth. Comte was also the first to coin the term sociology, earning him the nickname the father of world sociology.

One of his contributions to sociology concerns the law of the development of society’s culture, which is divided into three eras, namely: The Theological Age is the age when people have magical beliefs, they believe in spirits, amulets and religion, the world moves in the afterlife, to worship ancestors. , a world where the dead rule the living. The metaphysical era is the age of society when human thought is still limited by abstract and universal philosophical concepts. The positivist era was the time when all explanations of social and natural phenomena were made in terms of scientific descriptions (scientific laws).

According to Auguste Comte, sociology is a scientific discipline that studies human beings. As humans, we have the instinct to always live with other people.

Comte’s ideas in sociology are known as the law of the three stages of human thought. The stages mentioned by Auguste Comte are the theological stage, the metaphysical stage and the positivist stage. The word sociology comes from the Latin socius which means friend or friend. While logos means knowledge. Interpreting these two words, sociology is the science of friends.

In general, sociology is the study of interactions in society. This science was known in the 19th century and was separate from philosophy. Sociology studies the relationship between humans and life. In addition, sociology studies class, society, customary ties, customs, beliefs, behavior and culture.

Auguste Comte’s Life Background

Comte was born in Montpellier, a small town in southwest France. After attending school there, he continued his studies at the Ecole Polytechnique in Paris. ECole Polytechnique became known for its adherence to republican ideals and a philosophy of process. In 1816, the university of applied sciences in which he had studied was closed due to a reorganization. Comte graduated and continued his studies at the Montpellier Medical School.

Soon after, he saw such a significant discrepancy between his Catholic faith and the thinking of the ruling monarchy that he was forced to leave Paris. Then, in August 1817, he became a pupil and secretary to Claude Henri de Rouvroy, Comte de Saint-Simon, who brought the Comte into intellectual circles. In 1824, Comte left Saint-Simon, again feeling that their relationship was at odds.

At this point, Comte knew what he had to do next: study the philosophy of positivism. This plan was later published as Plan de travaux scientifiques nécessaires pour réorganiser la Société (1822) (Indonesia: Plans for Scientific Research to Reorganize Society). But he failed to secure an academic position, which hampered his research. Then his life and research began to depend on sponsorship and financial assistance from some friends.

He later married a woman named Caroline Massin. The Comte was known for being arrogant, cruel, and cunning, so that in 1826 he was committed to an asylum, but fled before recovering. Later, when Massin’s wife’s condition stabilized and he returned to work as planned. But sadly she divorced Massin in 1842 for reasons that are still unknown. Between the renewal of plans and the divorce, he published Le Cours de Philosophie Positive.

In 1844, Comte fell in love with Clotilde de Vaux, a relationship which remained platonic. After Clotilde’s death, this love story becomes almost religious. Shortly after that, Comte published his book Systeme de politique positive (1851-1854).

Comte died in Paris on 5 September 1857 and was buried at Cimetière du Père Lachais.

Theories Put forward by Auguste Comte

Born in 1842, sociology became significant when Auguste Comte published his Positive-Philosophy. Many of Comte’s ideas and theories have been known from that time to the present day. According to Comte, sociology must be formed based on observations or observations of society, not just speculation about society. The most famous thought of this man who was born 215 years ago is his thinking about the three stages of intellectual development. Namely, the first theological or fictional stage, the second metaphysical stage, which is the first stage of development, and the third positive stage, which is the final stage of human development. Auguste Comte divided sociology into two parts, namely social statics and social dynamics. Social statics is intended to study the laws of action and reaction between the parts of a social system. Social statics is the most basic part of sociology, but not the most important part of the study of sociology, because basically social statics is the result of growth.

According to Auguste Comte, the most important part of sociology is what he called social dynamics, which he defined as the theory of the development and progress of society. Because social dynamics is the study of history, which eliminates speculative philosophy from history itself. Comte Dividing sociology into these two parts does not mean separating them from each other. While social statics is the study of the interconnectedness of society and constitutes the most basic of sociological approaches, the study of the social relations between its parts can never be studied without understanding them as developmental outcomes. Therefore, Comte argued that this cannot be achieved, a proper understanding of social problems without using a social dynamics or historical approach.

As the founding father of the study of Sociology, Comte characterized that sociology should consist of two main parts, namely Social Statistics and Social Dynamics, namely:

Auguste Comte divided sociology into two parts, social statics and social dynamics.

• Theory of Social Dynamics

Social dynamics is a theory of social development and progress, because social dynamics is the study of history, which removes speculative philosophy from history itself. In the section on social dynamics a theory was born known as The law of three stages or (the law of three stages).

• The Law of Three Stages

Comte stated that in society there is continuous development, but the development of society as a whole does not take place in a straight line. Many things hinder the development of a society, such as race, climate and political activism. Comte argued that the answer to social development must be sought in the characteristics that distinguish humans from animals, namely the development of intelligence. Comte put forward three levels of human intelligence, namely the theory of development or what is commonly called the law of three phases or stages, namely:

1) The theological phase

Beginning before 1300 and characterizing the world. At this stage, everything that happens in this world is believed to be controlled by gods, spirits or supernatural powers of gods. This thought is the absolute basis for explaining all phenomena around humans in such a way that they seem absurd. In this theological stage, society has three beliefs. The first is the fetishism (everything) and the dynamism that this universe has a soul. Then animism, which believes the world is the place where spirits or ghosts live. The second is polytheism (choice), a little more advanced than the previous belief. Polytheism classifies things and natural phenomena based on the similarities between them. Thus, polytheism simplifies the diversity of the universe. example of polytheism, before each rice field had different gods in different villages. Polytheism assumes that every rice field where it is located has the same god, the Javanese say that the god of rice is Dewi Sri. Finally, monoism is the belief that there is only one God. In the theological phase, we can give the following example of the roar of thunder made by the giants in battle.

2) Metaphysical Phase

This phase occurred between 1300 and 1800. At that time, people experienced a change in the way of thinking. At this stage abstract concepts or abstract forces other than God appear, namely nature. Everything that happens on earth is an immutable law of nature. For example, a government official is an educated person who knows science, but still believes in the supernatural and believes in the power of shamans.

3) Positivism Phase

At this stage, all phenomena or natural phenomena that occur can be studied, tested, and proven empirically or scientifically. This stage makes science develop and everything becomes more rational, creating a better world, because people tend to stop looking for absolute causes (God or nature) and focus more on studying the social and physical world, trying to discover the laws that govern it. For example, rice plants bear fruit not because of the will of Dewi Sri, but because of good care and fertilization.

• Law of the Hierarchy of Knowledge

Having created the structure of knowledge, Comte realized the level of development of human thought in all the behavior it embodied. So often occurs in human thought that we find a scientific level of thinking. At the same time, thinking is seeing the symptoms or reality of theology.

• The Law of Practical Activity Correlation

Comte believed that there was a natural connection between theological thought and militarism. The theological way of thinking encourages the birth of efforts to answer all problems with violence. That is why power and profit have always been the goals of primitive society in relation to each other. At the metaphysical stage, legal principles (especially natural laws) form the basis for social organization and human relations. This legalistic metaphysical stage is a transition to a positive stage.

• The Law of Emotional Correlation

Comte believed that only emotions could unite people. Thus, history has demonstrated the relationship between human thinking and the formation of social feelings. At the theological stage, feelings and social sympathies are limited to local communities. In the Middle Ages, however, the social scene expanded more and more with the development of Christianity. The Middle Ages is a century that Comte considered a century in a metaphysical phase. But in the positive/scientific phase, social sympathy is growing in general. Comte believed that a positive and scientific attitude of the human mind could develop an altruistic spirit (respect for superiors) and universalize social feelings (social sympathy).

• Theory of Social Statics

What is meant by social statics is a theory about the foundations of society. Comte divided sociology into two parts with different positions. Although social statics is an important part of sociology, its position is less important than social dynamics. The task of social statistics is to search for the laws of action and reaction in various parts of the social system. At the same time, in social statics, we seek laws about social phenomena that occur at the same time. There is a doctrine in social statics, namely the doctrine of the individual, family, society and state.

Conclusion

This is a brief discussion of the definition of the theory put forward by Auguste Comte. The discussion this time does not only discuss Auguste Comte’s theory but also discusses the history of sociology, the definition of sociology, and a brief biography of Auguste Comte himself. Understanding the meaning of the theory put forward by Auguste Comte makes us understand more about the study of sociology in depth and try to apply its benefits in social life.

This is a review of the understanding of Auguste Comte’s theory. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the understanding of Auguste Comte’s theory and other knowledge related to sociology, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram

The associative property is usually found in the area of ​​algebra and can be applied to two types of operations namely addition and multiplication. This type of mathematical property certainly does not depend on the way in which the numbers are located or grouped. This means that regardless of how the different numbers in a given operation are put together, addition and multiplication will always give the same result regardless of the order. Grouping in this way has nothing to do with the results obtained from mathematical operations.

What is an Associative Property?

The associative property is a property that usually exists in the area of ​​algebra and can be applied to the arithmetic operations of multiplication and addition. Where the associative property indicates that when there are three numbers or more in an operation, the result will not depend on the way in which the numbers are placed.

History of Associative Properties

In the 1830s, Treaty of Algebra was published in an attempt to explain the term as an equivalent logical treatment to Euclid’s elements. Here, there are two types of algebra explained, namely arithmetic algebra and symbolic algebra. In his book, there is an explanation of symbolic algebra as the science that deals with free combinations of signs and symbols in ways defined by arbitrary laws.

Which is true is that it is very difficult to give an exact date as to when it was created. Because, people already know that for example 2+3+3+2 since ancient times. But eventually people realized that this was a general property that could be related to operations other than multiplication and addition. Then it becomes something interesting to study more deeply. It can be said that no one person made the discovery.

The Associative Property of Addition

Associative addition or the addition property tells us that changing the order in which the numbers are added will not affect the result of the addition. This is because the application of the associative property in addition does not in itself have any visible or important effect. Some doubts arise about their usefulness and importance, but having knowledge of the principles can help us to perfectly master all these operations. Especially when combined with others, such as subtraction and division. What’s more, in the division to achieve the correct use of mathematics.

Problems example:

The following are several ways that are quite easy to understand, for those of you who want to understand the associative nature of addition, see the full explanation below:

(a + b) + c = a + (b + c) = d
To understand more, let’s look at the example questions below:

There is a problem (7 + 5) + 4 = ?

Of course, we will work on this problem by first adding up the numbers in brackets. Only later will the result be added to the number outside the brackets.

(7 + 5) + 4 =
12 + 4 = 16

If we use the associative property then we can also do it in the following way:

7 + (5 + 4) =
7 + 9 = 16

So, (7 + 5) + 4 = 7 + (5 + 4) = 16

The Associative Property of Multiplication

Multiplication is a mathematical arithmetic operation that has various properties. One of them is the property in the case of multiplication. This shows a way of grouping factors that will not cause any kind of change in the final product of the product. Regardless of the number of factors found in the operation.

Problems example:

Ana has 2 toy boxes. Where each box will be filled with 3 packs of marbles. Each pack contains 4 marbles. How many marbles does Ana have? There are two ways you can count Ana’s marbles.

The first way is to count the number of packs. Then, the result is multiplied by the number of marbles in each pack.

Number of packs × number of marbles per pack

(3 packs + 3 packs ) × 4 items = (3 + 3) × 4 = (2 × 3) × 4 = 24 items

The second way is to count the number of marbles per box first, the result is multiplied by the number of boxes.

Number of squares × number of marbles = 2 × ( 4 + 4 + 4) = 2 × (3 × 4) = 24 items.

Calculation method I : (2 × 3) × 4
Calculation method II : 2 × (3 × 4).

The results of calculations in both ways are the same.

So, (2 × 3) × 4 = 2 × (3 × 4)

This multiplication method uses the associative property of multiplication. In general, the associative property of multiplication can be written:

(a × b ) × c = a × (b × c)

With a, b, and c integers.

Example:

a. (2 × 4) × 3 = 2 × (4 × 3) = 24
b. (4 × 5) × 8 = 4 × (5 × 8) = 160
c. (4 × (-3)) × 6 = 4 × (-3 × 6) = – 72
s. (5 × (-2)) × 4 = 5 × (-2 × 4) = -40
e. (-3 × 2 ) × 8 = -3 × (2 × 8) = -48
f. (-4 × (-6)) × 10 = -4 × (-6 × 10) = 240

Problems example:

Here we will do the operation: 5 x 4 x 2

The first step that must be taken is to group the first two numbers, in this case it will be 5 and 4. By doing this one step, we will obtain the following equation:

(5 x 4) x 2
20 x 2
40

Now, if we group 4 and 2 together, we will get the following result:

5 x (4 x 2)
5 x 8
40

As can be clearly seen in the previous operation, even if in reality the numbers are positioned differently, the result will still be the same. Another example that you can understand is as follows:

(2 x 3) x 5 = 2 x (3 x 5)
6 x 5 = 2 x 15
30 = 30

Book Recommendations:

Book Description:

Mathematics is a basic science that plays a very important role in the development of science and technology and advances human thinking. The presence of this book is expected to add to the reference and become a reference for students in particular and those who are interested in mathematics in general.

Book Description:

This Logic & Mathematics book can be used as a textbook or reference to support the learning of Discrete Mathematics courses. By studying this book, students are expected to be able to improve their ability to think logically, creatively, and critically. This capability will certainly be very useful for students/readers in supporting information system developers, multimedia/game developers, and relevant competencies.

Book Description:

When the scores and values ​​of the evaluation results of students are in the range of 4-5, it becomes a warning for educators to review and realign the learning strategies, evaluation strategies used during INl, to then conduct research on what kinds of strategies are actually right for students. The role of renewal of this learning can only be raised to the surface when data on the results of learning evaluations are informed in a clear and transparent manner. We no longer have to be ashamed of the evaluation data as it is, because that is for the sake of future improvement for poor results. Reflection will be interesting for educators to do to achieve the goals of high student learning achievement.

Book Description:

The introductory book on Mathematical Analysis for tertiary institutions can be used by students from various departments, especially those majoring in mathematics. Mathematical analysis requires students to understand more about theorems in mathematics along with their proofs and be able to solve standard problems in mathematics analytically and formally. In thinking deductively and analyzing comprehensively, students must have an understanding in developing the concepts of the material they are studying.
Some of the material from this Introduction to Mathematical Analysis is an in-depth study of calculus course material which is studied rigorously and adapted to the existing syllabus, especially in the mathematics department in college. In compiling it, the author also refers to related books as references.

Understanding Anabolism – The process of anabolism is very important for the body. Without this process, the continuity of growth and cells in our tissues and organs will not occur. Anabolism is the metabolic pathway that arranges several simple organic compounds into complex chemical compounds or molecules.

Broadly speaking, anabolism requires external energy, in this case including light energy and chemical energy. This energy is then used to bind the resulting simple compounds to become more complex compounds.

In this process the required energy is not lost, but is stored in the form of chemical bonds in the complex compounds that are formed. Check out a more complete explanation about Anabolism below, Sinaumed’s:

Definition of Anabolism

The macromolecules formed can be nucleic acids, fats, carbohydrates and proteins. Anabolism consists of three basic steps, including the production of precursors such as amino acids, monosaccharides, and nucleotides; activation of compounds into reactive forms using energy from ATP and the incorporation of these precursors into complex molecules, such as proteins, polysaccharides, fats, and nucleic acids.

The results of anabolism are useful in essential functions. These results, for example, glycogen and protein as fuel in the body, nucleic acids for copying genetic information. The process of anabolism can be disrupted if there is a problem with the hormones involved in it. Among the several problems that may occur with each of these hormones are insulin resistance, growth hormone deficiency (GHD), abnormal testosterone levels and others. Anabolism is distinguished from catabolism in several ways:

• Anabolism is the process of synthesizing small chemical molecules into larger molecules, while catabolism is the process of breaking down large molecules into smaller molecules.
• Anabolism is a process that requires energy while catabolism is a process that releases energy.
• Anabolism is a reduction reaction while catabolism is an oxidation reaction. Often the end result of anabolism is the starting compound for the catabolic process.

In studying macromolecules there is a science called molecular biology which has very broad implications for human understanding of living phenomena. Sinaumed’s can study Molecular Biology books to better understand this.

 

Process Anabolism

This energy is then used to bind these simple compounds and become more complex compounds. So, in this process the required energy is not lost, but instead is stored in a form of chemical bonds in the complex compounds that are formed.

In anabolic reactions, energy is needed which is also obtained from catabolic reactions. The reactions in these cells can or can be grouped into two categories: the anabolic reaction is a formation reaction, in which the synthesis of large molecules from simple or small molecules occurs.

The anabolic process requires energy, and the process is known as an endogenic reaction. This catabolic reaction is a breakdown reaction. This catabolism is the breakdown of large molecules into simpler ones accompanied by the release of energy which are known as exergonic reactions.

The total sum of the reactions of anabolism and catabolism is called metabolism (formation and breakdown). An example of this catabolic process is respiration, while an example of an anabolic process is photosynthesis (Green et al, 1988). The results of anabolism are useful in essential functions.

These results, such as glycogen and protein, namely as fuel in the body, nucleic acids for then copying genetic information. These proteins, lipids, and carbohydrates then make up the structure of living things, both intracellular and extracellular. If the synthesis of these materials is faster than the reshuffling, then the organism will then grow. The anabolism includes 3 basic stages:

• Production of precursors such as amino acids, monosaccharides, and nucleotides.
• The activation of these compounds then becomes a reactive form using energy from ATP.
• The combination of these precursors will then become complex molecules, such as polysaccharides, proteins, fats, and also nucleic acids. Anabolism that uses light energy is known as photosynthesis, while anabolism that uses chemical energy is known as chemosynthesis.

Anabolism is often also referred to as part of the constructive metabolic process. This relates to the function of anabolism as a builder of new cells, maintaining healthy tissues in the body, and storing energy for future use.

Another function of anabolism is to convert small molecules into more complex forms, such as carbohydrates, proteins and fats. To carry out this task, the process of anabolism involves certain hormones, such as: Insulin: a hormone made in the pancreas and is responsible for regulating the level of glucose in the blood. Without the presence of insulin, the body will not be able to absorb glucose.

In studying various things that happen to other human bodies, Sinaumed’s can use the SMA/MA book Interactive Book Kl.11 Biology Specialization Smt.1 Rev.202 as a reference.

Growth hormone: a hormone made in the pituitary gland and functions to stimulate growth in the human body. Testosterone: a hormone that influences male characteristics, such as a deeper voice, hair growth (mustache and beard), to stronger muscles and bones.

Estrogen: this hormone is present in both men and women and plays a role in building female characteristics, such as breast growth. This hormone is also responsible for strengthening bone mass. The disruption of hormones in this anabolic process will greatly affect your overall metabolism. In intentional cases, such as limiting energy to burn body fat, then there are anabolic changes that occur in your body.

Studies say that people who intentionally limit energy intake on their anti-fat diet, growth hormone and insulin levels also fall. In men, the level of the hormone testosterone will also decrease, even if he consumes foods or drinks that are high in protein during the diet.

In other words, you need to understand more about how anabolism works so that weight loss doesn’t affect your overall metabolism. If necessary, consult a doctor or nutritionist to follow a diet that is safe for the body.

In studying various kinds of hormones, and how these hormones work in the human body, the book Latest Science: Ddotty & Sleepground – Hormones, Important Substances in the Human Body comes packaged in an attractive way just for you!

 

Characteristics and Examples of Anabolism

1. Characteristics of Anabolism

Anabolism is a process of synthesizing small chemical molecules into larger molecules, whereas catabolism is a process of breaking down large molecules into smaller molecules. Anabolism is a process that requires energy while catabolism is a process that releases energy.

Anabolism is a reduction reaction whereas catabolism is an oxidation reaction. Often the end result of anabolism is the starting compound for the catabolic process.

(Wiradikusumah, 1985), Anabolism allows the body to be able to build or grow new cells and maintain body tissues.

This process then uses the energy produced by catabolic reactions, and is then influenced by all kinds of hormones and enzymes to be able to form and repair cells and tissues. Examples of an anabolic process include growth and bone mineralization, as well as an increase in muscle mass.

2. Examples of Anabolism

Anabolism occurs when simple compounds and elements are reacted in living things to produce more complex organic compounds. Anabolism uses energy sources such as sunlight or chemicals, so that these compounds and elements can or can be combined into complex compounds. An example of anabolism is photosynthesis that occurs in plants.

Photosynthesis is a process used by plants where energy from sunlight is used to convert carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) into molecules of sugar or glucose (C6H12O6) needed for growth. The process is then assisted by enzymes and chlorophyll. Chlorophyll is a green leaf pigment found in chloroplasts, organelles in plant cells.

The chemical reactions of photosynthesis include: 6 CO2 (Carbon dioxide) + 6 H2O (water) + sunlight –> C6H12O6 (glucose) + 6 O2 (oxygen)

Anabolism is a metabolic process that converts simple compounds into complex compounds. For example, such as the formation of glycogen from glucose, the formation of proteins from amino acids, the formation of triglycerides from fatty acids and glycerol which you can learn together with other human foundations in the Basic Human Biology book.

 

Hormones Play a Role in Anabolic Processes

Anabolism is the process of forming complex molecules in the body from simpler cells that require energy. Meanwhile, catabolism is the breakdown of complex molecules into simpler cells so that they release energy. In the body, anabolism processes simultaneously with catabolism. This process is then known as metabolism.

Anabolism is often also referred to as part of the constructive metabolic process. This relates to the function of anabolism as a builder of new cells, maintaining healthy tissues in the body, and storing energy for future use. Another function of anabolism is to convert small molecules into more complex forms, such as carbohydrates, proteins and fats. To do this job, the process of anabolism involves certain hormones, such as:

1. Growth Hormone

This hormone is made in the pituitary gland (a small gland at the bottom of the brain). Its function is to regulate body growth. Too much growth hormone in childhood can cause a person to grow taller than average (gigantism). Meanwhile, if too little can cause body height less than average (dwarfism).

2. Insulin-like growth factors (IGF-1 and IGF-2).

Insulin-like growth factors stimulate the production of protein and fat. IGF-I and IGF-2, which work together with growth hormone, play an important role in the growth and development of bones and various body tissues, including the mammary glands and in the process of reproduction (procreation). This hormone controls the production of growth hormone by the pituitary gland (pituitary), as well as blood sugar levels.

3. Insulin

This hormone is made by the pancreas gland. Insulin is in charge of regulating glucose (sugar) levels in the blood, helping the body convert the food consumed into energy, and helping to store energy reserves. Body cells cannot utilize glucose without insulin.

4. Testosterone

Testosterone is a male hormone which is produced in the testicles. Testosterone causes sperm to form and the development of male sex characteristics, such as a deeper voice, larger muscles, and growth of facial and body hair. The hormone testosterone plays an important role throughout the body because it affects the brain, bone and muscle mass, the vascular system, fat distribution, organs, energy levels, and sexual function. Not only in men, the hormone testosterone is also produced in women’s bodies, but the amount is smaller. In women, this hormone is produced in the ovaries.

5. Estrogens

Estrogen is a female hormone that is produced in the ovaries (and the placenta during pregnancy). The hormone estrogen is responsible for strengthening bone tissue, developing female body shape characteristics, such as breasts, playing a role in thickening tissue in the uterus (endometrium), and regulating the menstrual cycle. In small amounts, estrogen is also produced in fat and muscle tissue. It is the main source of estrogen in women who have gone through menopause. Men also produce the hormone estrogen, but the amount is smaller.

Anabolic Disease

Disturbances in hormones in the process of anabolism will greatly affect the overall metabolism. In intentional cases, for example limiting energy to melt body fat, then there are anabolic changes that occur in the body. Studies say that people who intentionally limit energy intake on their anti-fat diet, growth hormone and insulin levels also fall. In men, the level of the hormone testosterone will also decrease, even if he consumes foods or drinks that are high in protein during the diet. Here are some other problems that may occur due to disruption of anabolic processes:

 

1. Insulin resistance

This condition occurs when cells in the body cannot respond to signals sent by the insulin hormone. As a result, the body cannot convert the sugar (glucose) in the blood into energy. To make up for this energy shortage, the pancreas produces more insulin. If this continues, blood sugar levels will increase and you are at risk of developing type 2 diabetes, obesity, high blood pressure, high cholesterol, and metabolic syndrome.

2. Growth Hormone Deficiency (GHD)

Growth hormone deficiency (GHD) occurs when the pituitary gland doesn’t produce enough growth hormone. Growth hormone deficiency (GHD) is most common in children and can result in a child’s below average height and delayed puberty. After puberty, growth hormone will play its role as a helper in the process of anabolism. This hormone deficiency can also make adults suffer from growth hormone deficiency (GHD), although this case is rare.

3. Abnormal Testosterone Levels

The testosterone hormone that is too high is usually caused by the consumption of certain drugs, for example anabolic steroids in athletes. In men, testosterone levels that are too high will cause many health problems, such as low sperm count, prostate swelling, to headaches and mood swings. In women, testosterone that is too high can also cause polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS).

This condition is characterized by the appearance of a mustache and beard, irregular menstrual cycles, and weight gain. Conversely, the hormone testosterone can also shrink and disrupt the anabolic process. This is usually marked by hair loss, impotence, and an increase in breast size.

4. Abnormal Estrogen Levels

If the level of the hormone estrogen in the body is too high, it will cause thyroid disease, blood clots, heart attacks, strokes, to breast and uterine cancer. In men, high levels of estrogen can cause depression. Conversely, if the hormone estrogen in the body is too low, mood swings, fatigue, and difficulty focusing. Bones also become more prone to fracture because their density decreases along with less estrogen in the body, Sinaumed’s.

Also read articles related to “Anabolism” :

• Biochemistry and Biomolecules
• Catabolism
• Movement System in Humans
• Excretion System in Humans
• Network in Plants
• Great Circulatory System
• Small Circulatory System
• Cell
• Hormone System
• Evolution Theory
• Genetic Material
• Biotechnology
• Evolution
• Cell Reproduction
• Human Respiratory System

Source: from various sources

Alif lam syamsiah – In reading the Koran, we are not only required to simply read the letters written in this holy book belonging to Muslims. Every Muslim must certainly begin to understand and know tajwid and also the law of reading properly.

Thus, reading the Al-Quran can also be done properly and correctly in accordance with Islamic teachings. What’s more, reading each letter in the Koran has its own reward. So it will be better if we can understand the recitations so that the reward we get is also perfect.

One of the laws of reading that we must know is the letter alif lam syamsiyah. Where Syamsiyah itself comes from the word syamsun which means the sun. In the Syamsiyah letters, it is likened to the sun.

Meanwhile, the letters lam are likened to the stars that exist during the day and cannot be seen when there is the sun. To understand clearly what the alif lam syamsiyah letter is, its characteristics, and the letters, let’s look at the summary below.

Reading Al-Quran Tartil and Correct

As we understand that reading the Al-Quran is the obligation of all Muslims. Reading the Al-Quran is not just reading the text or words in the Al-Quran, but also reading the contents and meaning of the book. There are many people who think that reading the Koran is just learning the recitation of the tajwid.

In fact, more than that, the Al-Quran as its function can provide guidance. If humans only read and do not understand the content or meaning, then they are the same as reading traffic symbols but do not understand what the rules are for.

The Al-Quran itself contains and teaches about how if humans have faith, with the benefits of believing in Allah and the benefits of trust, as the Prophet and other believers have done. This happened because in the Al-Quran there is a history of the life stories of the Prophets and Apostles as well as believers who lived in the past. Surely this is not yet known if Muslims do not read it in depth.

So, in order to understand the Al-Quran properly and completely, you can start from the basics first. Reading the Al-Quran can be started by studying the law of reciting the Al-Quran or its tajwid. There are many tajwid laws and the rules themselves can be understood and obtained the correct meaning in accordance with the intentions that Allah SWT wants to convey in Arabic.

Therefore, starting to study the Koran can be started with a discussion of the law of reciting the Koran or tajwid. Certainly not difficult if accompanied by intention and sincerity to study the Koran.

Reading the Al-Quran correctly is an obligation and duty for every Muslim. To be able to read the Koran tartil and correctly, you don’t need to be in a hurry. Pronouncing it must be with the correct and correct reading lafadz and the appropriate reading law.

Therefore, before reading the Koran, you must be able to master and understand tajwid in reading the Koran first. This is in accordance with what is in the following paragraph.

“Do not move your tongue to (read) the Koran because you want to quickly (master) it” . (QS. Al-Qiyamah: 16)

To be able to master Al-Quran reading, it is better if you have instilled Al-Quran education from an early age. There are a lot of tajwid readings and if you only understand or study them when you are an adult, you will not have enough time and the process will be slow.

In order to achieve that target, you must learn as soon as possible from an early age. In fact, children are still very easy to accept lessons. Therefore, the most appropriate time to teach Al-Quran recitation is from childhood.

In the Al-Quran itself there are various kinds of problems that we must understand, especially regarding the basics of religion itself such as the pillars of Islam and also the pillars of faith. The other important things related to humans are the purpose of human creation, how the process is done, the concept of human in Islam, the nature of human creation, and other things.

Because, it is a basic thing in human life. Meanwhile, it is very difficult to understand if you don’t learn the basics of the Al-Quran first.

Definition of Alif Lam Syamsiyah

Before discussing further about the letter alif lam syamsiyah, it is better if we first understand what the letter alif lam syamsiyah is. So, the alif lam syamsiyah letter is an alif lam which is strung with a noun or isim and begins with one of the syamsiyah letters.

That means, the reading law will occur if alif lam meets one of the syamsiyah letters. The alif lam syamsiyah letter consists of 14 letters, including:

1. tha (ط)
2. tsa (ث)
3. shad (ص)
4. ra (ر)
5. ta (ت)
6. dha (ض)
7. dzal (ذ)
8. nun (ن)
9. dal (د)
10. zai (ز)
11. sin (س)
12. zha (ظ)
13. shin (ش)
14. lam (ل)

The Law of Reading Tajwid Alif Lam Syamsiyah

Alif lam syamsiyah is one of the readings or tajwid laws in the Al-Quran. Therefore, alif lam syamsiyah as one of the laws of reciting tajwid must also be understood before reading the Koran or doing tilawatil of the Koran. There are a few wrong readings, so it will have a different meaning or meaning.

In a sense, alif lam syamsiyah is a law or procedure for reading alif lam letters when meeting with syamsiyah letters. This alif lam syamsiyah reading law can be referred to as Idgham Syamsiyah . As for how to read the alif lam syamsiyah, it must be entered or memorized in the syamsiyah letters or the writing is fixed, but the lam letters are not read.

Alif lam syamsiyah is called Idgham Syamsiyah , because the sound of alif lam will be idghamed into the syamsiyah letters in front of it. That way, it will result in the sound of the alif lam being melted because it is entered with the syamsiyah letter in front of it.

Alif Lam Qomariah

Alif lam syamsiyah will definitely be different from reading alif lam qomariah. Where alif lam qomariah is the law of tajwid reading, if there is al-ma’arif or lam ta’rif meeting one of the qamariah letters , then the way to read it is clear or clear. Therefore, the old letters will be read clearly. Alif lam meets one of the qamariah letters , so the alif lam must be read clearly.

The following are some of the letters alif lam qomariah , including:

ب ج ح خ ع غ ف ق ك م و غ ه ء ي ا

The difference between Alif Lam Syamsiah and Alif Lam Qomariah

The differences between alif lam syamsiyah and alif lam qomariah include:

1. For Alif lam syamsiyah , the letter lam must be read unclearly and put into the next letter, while for alif lam qamariyah it must be read clearly and clearly.
2. Alif lam syamsiyah which has no vowel or is considered non-existent, while alif lam qomariah has breadfruit.
3. Writing in alif lam syamsiyah will use the tasydid sign and the syamsiyah letters are located in front of the alif lam.
4. Writing alif lam qomariah uses the breadfruit sign in the lam letters .

Alif lam syamsiyah and also alif lam qomariah are one of the existing forms of recitation. To be able to understand this law, it is certainly not difficult if it is done consistently, with frequent and routine intensity.

For that, learning tajwid is only about time and habits. It’s not difficult if Muslims want to try it and make us learn other foreign languages. It would be very difficult to put into practice, only become theory and never evaluate the results of learning.

Example of Alif Lam Syamsiah

The following are some examples of alif lam syamsiah reading , including:

• ال Meets ت For example: التَّكَاثُرُ How to read: at-takasur
• ال Meets ث For example: الثَّاقِبُ How to read: ats-tsaqib
• ال Meets د For example: الدِّيْنُ How to read: ad-din
• ال Meets with ذ For example: الذِّكْرُ How to read: az-zikr
• ال Meets ر For example: الرَّحْمَنُ How to read: ar-rahman
• ال Meets ز For example: الزَّيْتُوْن How to read: az-olive
• ال Meets with س For example: السَّمِيْعُ How to read: as-sami`
• ال Meets ش For example: الشَّمْسُ How to read: asy-syamsu
• ال Meets with ص For example: الصَّالِحَاتُ How to read: sh-salihaat
• ال Meets ض Example: الضَّالِّيْنُ How to read: adh-dhaalin
• ال Meets ط For example: الطَّاعَةُ How to read: ath-tha`ah
• ال Meets ظ For example: الظَّالِمِيْنَ How to read: azh-zhalimin
• ال Meets ل For example: الَّلْيلُ How to read: al-lail
• ال Meets ن For example: النَّاسُ How to read: an-naas

In addition to the examples above, the following is an example of the alif lam syamsiyah in the complete An-Nas letter.

بِسْمِ اللّٰهِ الرَّحْمٰنِ الرَّحِيْمِ

قُلْ اَعُوْذُ بِرَبِّ النَّاسِۙ ١

Meaning:
Say (Prophet Muhammad), “I take refuge in the God of mankind,

مَلِكِ النَّاسِۙ ٢

Meaning:
king of humans,

اِلٰهِ النَّاسِۙ ٣

Meaning:
human worship

مِنْ شَرِّ الْوَسْوَاسِ ەۙ الْخَنَّاسِۖ ٤

Meaning:
from the evil (devil) whisperer who is hiding

الَّذِيْ يُوَسْوِسُ فِيْ صُدُوْرِ النَّاسِۙ ٥

Meaning:
who whispers (evil) into the human chest,

مِنَ الْجِنَّةِ وَالنَّاسِ ࣖ ٦

Meaning:
from (class of) jinn and humans.

After reading the An-Nas verse that we mentioned above, did you find 5 examples of alif lam syamsiyah? Below are five examples of alif lam syamsiyah readings in the short An-Nas letter.

1. Verse 1 النَّاسِۙ
2. Verse 2 النَّاسِۙ
3. Verse 3 النَّاسِۙ
4. Verse 5 النَّاسِۙ
5. Verse 6 النَّاسِ

Characteristics of Alif Lam Syamsiyah Letters

In order to make it easier for you when reading the Koran, especially when faced with the letters alif lam syamsiyah. So, it is very important to understand its characteristics. The characteristics of the letter alif lam syamsiyah are in the tasydid sign at the top of the syamsiyah letter. Namely the tasydid sign given because of the law of meeting between the letters hijaiyah alif lam and also the letters syamsiyah.

Meanwhile, how to read it yourself is to enter the letter Al or lam breadfruit into the syamsiyah letters. Thus, the reading of lam breadfruit becomes lost and merges into the syamsiyah letters that follow. In other words, it can be considered as discarding the lam breadfruit and then translating the syamsiyah letters.

The following are some things that you should pay attention to the letter alif lam syamsiyah when reading the Al-Quran.

a. If it is at the beginning of the verse it is called ibtida’

The way to read it is that the letter alif is read like a letter that has the vowel fathah . While the lam letter is not read or is considered non-existent because it merges into syamsiyah letters or is read idgham . The way to read it is still valid, even though there is no tasydid at the top of the syamsiyah letters . The following is an example of the reading:

الرَّحْمٰنِ الرَّحِيْمِۙ

Arrahmaanirrahiim not al rahmaanil rakhiimi .

b. If the Alif Lam Syamsiyah Letter is in the Middle of the Verse

The way to read it is that the letters alif lam are not read or are considered non-existent. So, the letters before alif lam immediately merge into syamsiyah letters. The following is an example of the reading:

مٰلِكِ يَوْمِ الدِّيْنِۗ

Maaliki yaumiddiini . (Not read ” maaliki yaumildiini “, because ” al ” has melted).

c. If you want to connect between one verse of the Koran and another verse

The way to read it is that alif lam is not read or considered non-existent and immediately enters the syamsiyah letters . The following is an example of the reading:

O Allah

d. Lam Alif Meets Tanwin

The way to read it is the same as how to read alif lam qomariah , namely by changing the tanwin sign to become an ordinary vowel (if fathatain is changed to vowel fathah , if kasrahtain is changed to vowel kasrah, and if dhommahtain is changed to vowel dhommah ). Meanwhile, for the hamza washal, it is changed to the sound of the letter nun by using the vowel kasrah or reading it with ni.

Then for the nun wiqayah or the small nun at the bottom of the hamzah washal it will immediately be envisioned or merged into the syamsiyah letters . The following is an example of the reading:

فَكَيۡفَ تَتَّقُوۡنَ اِنۡ كَفَرۡتُمۡ
ony

Fakaifa tattaquuna ingkafartum yauman yaj’alulwildaana syaibaanissamaau munfatiruumbihii kaana wa’dahuu maf’uula .

Another Example of Alif Lam Syamsiyah’s Reading

Below are some examples of the letters laif lam syamsiyah in the Al-Quran:

النَّجْمُ الثَّاقِبُۙ

Read: an-najmuṡ-ṡāqib . (QS. At-Tariq: 3)
Description: alif lam meets the letter tsa (ث).

الرَّحْمٰنِ الرَّحِيْمِۙ

Read: ar-raḥmānir-raḥīm . (QS. Al-Fatihah: 3)
Description: alif lam meets the letter ra (ر).

ءَتِ الطَّاۤمَّةُ الْكُبْرٰىۖ

Read: a tiṭ-ṭāmmatul-kubrā . (QS. An-Naziat: 34)
Description: alif lam meets the letter tha (ط).

هُوَ التَّوَّابُ الرَّحِيْمُ

Read: huwat-tawwābur-raḥīm . (QS. At-Taubah: 104)
Description: alif lam meets the letter ta (ت).

As previously explained, to be able to read the verses of the Al-Quran that are in accordance with the tajwid requires quite a bit of time. Therefore, we must remain istiqomah in reading the verses of the Koran that are in accordance with tajwid.

Closing

That’s an explanation of the letter alif lam syamsiyah , its characteristics, and some examples that you can learn. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s.

For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about recitation and other Islamic religious material, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Human

Also read:

Verses of the Qur’an about heaven and hell – In Islam, there are heavens and hells where heaven is a place for believers. Whereas hell is for people who often make mistakes in the world. Therefore, there are verses in the Koran about heaven and hell. To find out more clearly about heaven and hell, you can see this article, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Heaven and Hell

Heaven is for His servants who are pious and hell is for those who are not pious.

The verses that explain heaven and hell are:

مَثَلُ الْجَنَّةِ الَّتِيْ وُعِدَ الْمُتَّقُوْنَ ۗفِيْهَآ اَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ مَّاۤءٍ غَيْرِ اٰسِنٍۚ وَاَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ لَّبَنٍ لَّمْ يَتَغَيَّرْ طَعْمُهٗ ۚوَاَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ خَمْرٍ لَّذَّةٍ لِّلشّٰرِبِيْنَ ەۚ وَاَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ عَسَلٍ مُّصَفًّى ۗوَلَهُمْ فِيْهَا مِنْ كُلِّ الثَّمَرٰتِ وَمَغْفِرَةٌ مِّنْ رَّبِّهِمْ ۗ كَمَنْ هُوَ خَالِدٌ فِى النَّارِ وَسُقُوْا مَاۤءً حَمِيْمًا فَقَطَّعَ اَمْعَاۤءَهُمْ

“The parable of the gardens of paradise promised to those who are pious, there are rivers whose water is not brackish, and rivers of milk whose taste does not change, and rivers of khamar (non-intoxicating wine) which is delicious to the drinkers and rivers of pure honey. In it they find all kinds of fruits and forgiveness from their Lord. Are they the same as those who are eternally in hell, and are given a drink of boiling water until their intestines are cut into pieces?” ( QS Muhammad: 15 ).

This verse in the explanation of the Interpretation of the Ministry of Religion explains that the rewards that will be received by believers in the hereafter are not the same as those that will be obtained by non-believers. This verse describes the state of heaven and hell in a very interesting symbolic form.

Beginning with the word parable (matsalul jannati). The first is heaven, and the second parable is samakah (kaman) which is summarized in a questioning tone. Said az-Zamakhsyari (in al-Kasysyaf), this expression is in the form of affirmation, but in essence it is denial, a negation.

Properties of Heaven and Hell

We also need to know the properties of heaven and hell, along with the explanation:

The properties of heaven described in the verse (QS Muhammad: 15) include, first , in it many rivers flow and each river has water of various types and tastes, and is delicious for the inhabitants of heaven to drink.

Among these types of water, there is water that is clear and clean, not polluted by anything. Therefore, the taste, color and smell will not change. There is a river that flows good milk to drink. The milk is still good and delicious, the taste will not change because it is spoiled or rotten.

There is a river that flows khamar which is pleasant to drink, healthy, and refreshes the body and feelings of the drinker. Not like khamar in the world. Even though it is delicious to drink by the addict, it can damage the body, mind and mind.

Therefore, khamr in heaven is lawful to drink, while khamr in this world is unlawful. There is a river that flows honey that is clean, like honey that has been filtered, delicious and healthy for the drinker’s body.

Narrated by Ahmad, At-Tirmidhi, and others from Mu’awiyah bin Haidah, he said, “I heard Rasulullah SAW say: In heaven there are oceans of milk, seas of water, seas of honey, and seas of khamr, then rivers flow from those oceans.” (History of Ahmad, At-Tirmidhi, and others from Muawiyah bin Haidah)

Secondly , in paradise there will be fruits of various kinds, different colors, shapes and tastes. All of them are delicious food for every inhabitant of heaven.

Third , the inhabitants of heaven are clean people from all stains and sins, because they have been forgiven by Allah the Most Merciful Lord, their Protector.

Then Allah explains the condition of those who live in hell. They drink water so hot that it destroys their intestines and the fires of hell burn their faces.

Proof of the Existence of Heaven and Hell

Evidence of the existence of Heaven and Hell is also illustrated in another letter, namely in the letter Al-Baqarah verse 221 which means: ….. ” They invite to hell while Allah invites to heaven and forgiveness with His permission and Allah explains the verses (commands Him) to humans so that they take lessons.

In the same letter of the Qur’an verse 214, Allah says which means “Do you think that you will enter heaven, even though it has not come to you (trials) as did those before you? They were overwritten by calamities and tribulations, and shaken (with various trials) so that the apostle and those who believed with him said, “When will Allah’s help come?” Remember, Allah’s help is very close.

Al-Quran verses about Heaven and Hell

One of the discussions in the Koran is about heaven and hell. These two things have been explained in the following verses:

Surah Ali ‘Imran verses 131 and 133

وَاتَّقُوا النَّارَ الَّتِيْٓ اُعِدَّتْ لِلْكٰفِرِيْنَ ۚ

“And guard yourselves from the fires of Hell, which have been prepared for the disbelievers.” ( Surah Ali ‘Imran: 131 )

وَسَارِعُوْٓا اِلٰى مَغْفِرَةٍ مِّنْ رَّبِّكُمْ وَجَنَّchange

“And hasten to seek forgiveness from your Lord and get a Heaven that is as wide as the heavens and the earth is reserved for those who are pious.” ( Surah Ali ‘Imran: 133 )

These two verses are proof of the existence of heaven and hell promised by Allah SWT at the end of the day. So that we as Muslims must be able to be more pious and seek as many practices as possible.

Surah Muhammad Verse 15

مَثَلُ الْجَنَّةِ الَّتِيْ وُعِدَ الْمُتَّقُوْنَ ۗفِيْهَآ اَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ مَّاۤءٍ غَيْرِ اٰسِنٍۚ وَاَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ لَّبَنٍ لَّمْ يَتَغَيَّرْ طَعْمُهٗ ۚوَاَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ خَمْرٍ لَّذَّةٍ لِّلشّٰرِبِيْنَ ەۚ وَاَنْهٰرٌ مِّنْ عَسَلٍ مُّصَفًّى ۗوَلَهُمْ فِيْهَا مِنْ كُلِّ الثَّمَرٰتِ وَمَغْفِرَةٌ مِّنْ رَّبِّهِمْ ۗ كَمَنْ هُوَ خَالِدٌ فِى النَّارِ وَسُقُوْا مَاۤءً حَمِيْمًا فَقَطَّعَ اَمْعَاۤءَهُمْ

“The parable of the gardens of paradise promised to those who are pious, there are rivers whose water is not brackish, and rivers of milk whose taste does not change, and rivers of khamar (non-intoxicating wine) which is delicious to the drinkers and rivers of pure honey. In it they find all kinds of fruits and forgiveness from their Lord. Are they the same as those who are eternally in hell, and are given a drink of boiling water so that their intestines are cut?” ( QS Muhammad: 15 )

In this sura, the characteristics of heaven are explained, such as the flowing of many rivers and each river has different water in terms of type and taste, and is delicious for the inhabitants of heaven to drink. Narrated by Ahmad, At-Tirmidhi, and others from Mu’awiyah bin Haidah, he said, ” I heard Rasulullah SAW say: In heaven there are oceans of milk, seas of water, seas of honey, and seas of khamr, then rivers flow from the oceans. ” (History of Ahmad, At-Tirmidhi, and others from Mu’awiyah bin Haidah)

In heaven there will also be fruits of various kinds. Everything is delicious food for every resident of heaven who is clean from all stains and sins, because they have been forgiven by Allah SWT.

Heaven and hell have been clearly explained by Allah SWT in His word which confirms it in the Qur’an. Heaven and hell are rewards for His servants from Allah SWT, where the pious servant is in heaven and the ungrateful servant is hell.

Surah Az-Zumar verse 73

The verse about heaven is Az Zumar’s letter verse 73, namely:

وَسِيقَ الَّذِينَ اتَّقَوْا رَبَّهُمْ إِلَى الْجَنَّةِ زُمَرًا ۖ حَتَّىٰ إِذَا جَاءُوهَا وَفُتِحَتْ أَبْوَابُهَا وَقَالَ لَهُمْ خَزَنَتُهَا سَلَامٌ عَلَيْكُمْ طِبْتُمْ فَادْخُلُوهَا خَالِدِينَ

Wa sīqallażīnattaqau rabbahum ilal-jannati zumarā, ḥattā iżā jā`ụhā wa futiḥat abwābuhā wa qāla lahum khazanatuhā salāmun ‘alaikum ṭibtum fadkhulụhā khālidīn

Meaning: “And those who fear their Lord will be ushered into heaven in groups. So that when they reach it (heaven) and its doors have been opened, the guards say to them, “Prosperity (spoiled) upon you, be happy you! Then enter, you will abide therein.”

Surah An-Nisa verse 145

Verses about hell in the Al-Quran letter An-Nisa verse 145, namely:

إِنَّ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ فِى ٱلدَّرْكِ ٱلْأَسْفَلِ مِنَ ٱلنَّارِ وَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُمْ نَصِيرًا

Innal-munāfiqīna fid-darkil-asfali minan-nār, wa lan tajida lahum naṣīrā

Meaning: “Surely the hypocrites are (placed) at the lowest level of hell. And you will never find a helper for them. Allah SWT has named hell and heaven with different names. Allah SWT is the one who has the right to determine the place of return based on every record of His servant’s deeds.

Hell Names

The following are the names of hell and their explanations:

1. Hell Hell

The hell of jahannam is a place of return for those who committed grave sins. This highest level of hell is said to have a very deep bottom, with a dark and black state.

Apart from the perpetrators of major sins, the inhabitants of hell are those who are disobedient to Allah SWT. Groups of hypocrites who like to follow Satan’s steps, to the point where they are stingy, risk going to hell.

2. Hell Lazha

Lazha is described as hell with a fierce and blazing fire. This second level of hell is prepared for those who do not follow the teachings of the Prophet and are reluctant to give alms.

The existence of hell lazha is explained in QS Al-Ma’arij verse 15,

كَلَّا ۖ إِنَّهَا لَظَىٰ

Kallā, innahā laẓā

“Absolutely not, verily hell is a turbulent fire.”

3. Huthamah Hell

As the name implies, the inhabitants of huthamah hell will experience destruction. This type of inhabitants of hell are people who like to swear and criticize, are reluctant to give alms, and calculations tend to be stingy.

Allah SWT has explained huthamah hell in Surah Al Humazah verses 5-6,

وَمَا أَدْرَاكَ مَا الْحُطَمَةُ

نَارُ اللَّهِ الْمُوقَدَةُ

Wama adraka mal-huthamah

Narul laahil-muuqada

Meaning: “5. And do you know what Huthamah is? 6. (That is) the fire (provided) by Allah which is kindled.”

4. Hell Sa’ir

The word Sa’ir comes from the words sin, ‘ayn, and ra’ which mean something that is burning and blazing. This hell is a warning from Allah SWT for people who do not pay zakat, or pay less than they should.

Another group of residents of the sa’ir hell are those who eat the property of orphans, deny the Day of Judgment, oppose the da’wah of the prophets and apostles, eat property that is not rightfully theirs. May we be spared from this behavior.

5. Hell of Saqar

In His word Allah explains, saqar is a burning hot hell. These prospective residents of hell are arrogant and deny the Koran, never pray, and are reluctant to feed the poor.

The existence of the saqar hell is explained in QS Al-Mudatsir verses 42-43,

مَا سَلَكَكُمْ فِى سَقَرَ

قَالُوا لَمْ نَكُ مِنَ الْمُصَلِّينَ

Maa salakakum fi saqar

Qolu lam naku minal mushollin

Meaning: “What put you into Saqar (hell)? They said: We were not among those who prayed.”

6. Jahim’s Hell

The meaning of the word jahim is a very hot place. This hell is described as a place with a great fire in a ravine or pit, so no wonder it is very hot.

This hell is reserved for liars of His verses, disobeying Him, and forgetting about the afterlife because they are busy with worldly affairs. The existence of jahim is explained in Al Hajj verse 51,

God bless you

Wallażīna sa’au fī āyātinā mu’ājizīna ulā`ika aṣ-ḥābul-jaḥīm

Meaning: “But those who try to contradict Our verses with the intention of weakening (the will to believe), they are the inhabitants of the Hellfire of Jahim.”

7. Hell’s Wail

The inhabitants of wail hell are those who are negligent in prayer, are carried away by worldly affairs, and ignore His call. Another group that can inhabit it are riya’ and cheaters.

Wail hell is told in His word in the letter Al Muthaffifin verses 1-3,

وَيْلٌ لِلْمُطَفِّفِينَ

Allah

وَإِذَا كَالُوهُمْ أَوْ وَزَنُوهُمْ يُخْسِرُونَ

Wailul lil muthaffifin

Alladzina idza ta’luu ‘alannasi yastaufun

Waidza kaaluu hum aw wazan legal yuk siruun.

Meaning: “Woe (wail) to those who cheat (in measuring and weighing)! (That is) people who, when they receive a measure from another person, they ask for it to be fulfilled, and when they measure it or weigh it (for other people), they reduce it, “

8. Hell Hawiyah

The meaning of hawiyah is falling from the highest place to the lowest place. With this meaning, it is not known how deep the Hawiyah hell is, so that it is called the lowest.

Another name for this hell in the Qur’an is nar hamiyah which means hot and blazing fire. Hell is reserved for those whose scales of good deeds are light.

Heaven Names

1. Paradise Paradise

Paradise paradise is a paradise created from gold. This heaven is also known as the heaven with the highest level.

These prospective residents of heaven are believers who are devoted to prayer, pay zakat, take care of themselves and avoid adultery, and always obey the commands of Allah SWT. Paradise paradise is described in Al Kahf verse 107

Amen

Innallażīna āmanụ wa ‘amiluṣ-ṣāliḥāti kānat lahum jannātul-firdausi nuzulā

Meaning: “Indeed, those who believe and do good deeds, paradise is prepared for them as a place to live.”

2. Heaven Adn

Paradise and created by Allah SWT from white diamonds for people with perfect faith and Islam. Those who are patient in their lives also have a chance to inhabit this heaven.

Allah’s Word regarding heaven can be listened to in Surah As Shaff verse 12

يَغْفِرْ لَكُمْ ذُنُوبَكُمْ وَيُدْخِلْكُمْ جَنَّاتٍ تَجْرِي مِنْ تَحْتِهَا الْأَنْهَارُ وَمَسَاكِنَ طَيِّبَةً فِي جَنَّاتِ عَدْنٍ ۚ ذَٰلِكَ الْفَوْزُ الْعَظِيمُ

Yagfir lakum żunụbakum wa yudkhilkum jannātin tajrī min taḥtihal-an-hāru wa masākina ṭayyibatan fī jannāti ‘adn, żālikal-fauzul-‘aẓīm

Meaning: “God will forgive your sins and admit you to paradise beneath which rivers flow, and to good dwellings in paradise ‘Adn. That is a great victory.”

3. Heaven Na’im

Furthermore, there is heaven na’im filled with pleasure which is said to be created from white silver. The candidate for the occupants of heaven is explained in the word of Allah SWT, letter Luqman verse 8, namely:

Amen

Innallażīna āmanu wa ‘amiluṣ-ṣāliḥāti lahum jannātun na’īm

Meaning: “Indeed, those who believe and do good deeds, for them are gardens full of pleasure.”

4. Heaven Ma’wa

The root of the word ma’wa is awa-ya wi which means to unite with a place and live there. Jannatul Ma’wa is a place for servants who are pious, do good deeds, restrain their passions, and believe in the greatness of Allah SWT.

The existence of heaven ma’wa is mentioned in the letter An Najm verse 15

عِنْدَهَا جَنَّةُ الْمَأْوَىٰ

‘Beautiful jannatul mawaa

Meaning: “Nearby is a paradise to live in.”

5. Heaven Darussalam

This paradise was created by Allah SWT from red yaqut. Its inhabitants are people who believe and fear Allah, contemplate the signs of His greatness, and acknowledge the greatness of Allah.

This is according to His Word in the letter Al An’am verse 127,

لَهُمْ دَارُ Peace be upon you

Lahum daarus salaami ‘inda Rabbihim wa huwa waliyyuhum bimaa kaanuu ya’maluun

Meaning: “For them (provided) a place of peace (heaven) with their Lord. And He is their protector because of the good deeds they do.”

6. Darul Muqamah

The next heaven’s name is Darul Muqamah which was created from white gems. The characteristics of its inhabitants are people who always hold fast to faith and Islam, multiply good deeds, are experts in gratitude.

Evidence of this heaven is explained in QS Fathir verse 35,

ٱلَّذِىٓ أَحَلَّنَا دَارَ ٱلْمُقَامَةِ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ لَا يَمَسُّنَا فِيهَا نَصَبٌ وَلَا يَمَسُّا َُا فِلَا بِلَا

Allażī aḥallanā dāral-muqāmati min faḍlih, lā yamassunā fīhā naṣabuw wa lā yamassunā fīhā lugụb

Meaning: “Who places us in an eternal place (heaven) from His grace; in it we do not feel weary nor do we feel weary.”

7. Maqamul Amen

Heaven Maqamul Amin is intended by Allah SWT for His servants who are truly pious. Allah said in the letter Adh-Dhukhan verse 51,

إِنَّ ٱلْمُتَّقِينَ فِى مَقَامٍ أَمِينٍ

Innal-muttaqīna fī maqāmin amīn

Meaning: “Indeed, those who fear Allah are in a safe place.”

8. Khuldi Paradise

Allah SWT created heaven khuldi from red and yellow marjan. Characteristics of its inhabitants are people who obey God’s commands as stated in the letter Al Furqan verse-15:

قُلْ أَذَٰلِكَ خَيْرٌ أَمْ جَنَّةُ الْخُلْدِ الَّتِي وُعِدَ الْمُتَّقُونَ ۚ كَانَتْ لَهُمْ جَزَاءْ

Qul a żālika khairun am jannatul-khuldillatī wu’idal-muttaqụn, kānat lahum jazā`aw wa maṣīrā

Meaning: “Say (Muhammad), “Is that (punishment) good, or eternal paradise promised to those who are pious in return, and a place to return to them?”

Thus the discussion about the verses of the Koran about heaven and hell, I hope this article is useful for Sinaumed’s.

If you want to find books about Islam, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Also read:

 

Definition of Affiliator – Affiliator comes from the word affiliate, which is one way to develop a business by utilizing directed socialization carried out by individuals, business entities or organizations and both parties will benefit.

In addition, affiliate as a promising job. Apart from being easy to start with, Sinaumed’s can earn up to hundreds of millions of income from this profession. Especially if Sinaumed’s can do it from home. Tempting isn’t it?

Meanwhile, in the business world, becoming an affiliate is a way to earn income which is increasingly favored by the public, especially young people. Some people use it as a sideline, while others use it as their main source of income because the results are quite promising.

Therefore, it can be said that an affiliate is a term for those who carry out an affiliate program where the concept of a business partnership is rewarded in the form of a commission. For Sinaumed’s, participating in the affiliate program is the same as taking a good opportunity to increase income with minimal capital. In addition, most of the affiliate program cooperation rules are not too onerous and binding.

Definition of Affiliator

Affiliator is a term for people who follow affiliates. The affiliate itself is a collaboration program for a brand with other people who will provide rewards in the form of commissions. In addition, affiliates have the task of inviting people to buy a product belonging to a brand that Sinaumed’s’ affiliate program follows. The amount of the commission is determined by the brand that organizes the affiliate, ranging from a few percent to up to 70%.

To get people to buy products, Sinaumed’s must diligently promote products on social media. Can be through various online content such as blog posts, social media and videos on YouTube. For example, when Sinaumed’s writes a blog review about the advantages or advantages of a product and invites readers to buy it via the link included.

The link contains a special referral code that Sinaumed’s gets after signing up for the affiliate program. Sinaumed’s must use the link so that it is counted as a successful sale and earns a commission. At a glance, an affiliate’s job is similar to what an influencer does. Both of them market a product or service belonging to a brand. However, both are actually different professions.

The difference between Affiliators and Influencers

There are several things that distinguish between affiliates and influencers, including the following:

1. Influencers are chosen by brands to promote their products, while affiliates register independently in an affiliate program.
2. Influencer income comes from being paid an amount agreed with the brand. If the affiliate, his income is in the form of a commission from every successful product sale, then the influencer’s income comes from the goods that have been promoted.
3. Influencers get paid before creating promotional content that is approved by the partnership with the brand . As for affiliates, commissions will be obtained after promoting and successfully selling a product.
4. The influencer’s task is completed after creating marketing content for the brand for a certain period according to the terms of the partnership. Meanwhile, affiliates can continue to sell products as they wish as long as they do not violate the program conditions.

Benefits of Becoming an Affiliate

Affiliator work offers several interesting advantages, as follows:

1. Have passive income

The main advantage of being an affiliate is that you have a pretty lucrative passive income. Because, Sinaumed’s affiliate links will continue to bring in money as long as they are not removed from your content, you know . In fact, top affiliates can also earn hundreds of millions from these affiliate links.

Apart from that, in order to continue to bring in income from affiliate programs, of course, your content must also be able to influence the audience to buy products using your link. Therefore, Sinaumed’s must follow affiliates whose products match your blog or social media niche .

For example, when the Sinaumed’s blog discusses technology, of course reviews about skincare products are less able to generate commissions from the affiliates they follow. So make sure your content is easy for your audience to find so they know about your promotion, Sinaumed’s. For example, Sinaumed’s needs to implement SEO for blog posts in order to be at the top of Google search results for certain keywords.

2. Does not require large capital

Starting an affiliate job is one of the easier things. Especially for Sinaumed’s who are already fond of blogging and posting on social media as well as the ability to create effective promotional content.

The next step, Sinaumed’s just need to join an affiliate program which is generally free / not paid. That way, Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to spend funds to start marketing the products offered by affiliate program provider brands . However, if you are going to do a more detailed promotion about product quality, you can try the brand ‘s product, yes, Sinaumed’s.

3. Can work anywhere and anytime

If Sinaumed’s wants to be free from work from home, cafe or other places, becoming an affiliate is one of the right choices. Currently, all that is needed is a computer device to work and a stable internet connection.

In addition, Sinaumed’s also doesn’t have to work from morning to evening to perform afiliator duties. So, you can make it as a side profession after completing the main job.

4. Not limited to one affiliate program

If Sinaumed’s wants to earn more, it’s fine to join more than one affiliate program, you know . However, first make sure that you have enough time and energy to create several content at once and monitor the effectiveness of each promotion that is carried out.

In addition, before joining the affiliate program, study the terms and conditions of the affiliate program organizer. Because, there are also those who do not allow you to become an affiliate of another brand.

Weaknesses of Being an Affiliator

After discussing the advantages of being an affiliate, the next discussion is the weakness of being an affiliate. Here is the full explanation.

1. Due to getting income based on commissions, the income received still depends on the products sold.
2. This business model requires patience and hard work so that the products offered can be successfully accepted.
3. Because it is increasingly popular, the competition is also getting bigger with various products that use this business model.
4. With so many products being sold, it is increasingly difficult to find the product that we want.

 

 

How Affiliators Work

Affiliator work system is quite easy. Directions from the company make affiliates able to understand the work system. In general, the working system of affiliates is to promote products by providing referral codes. Here’s how affiliates work, including the following:

1. Sign up for an affiliate program

Affiliate program registration is usually opened on the company’s website. Sinaumed’s can register first by filling in and fulfilling the terms and conditions. Sinaumed’s will also get a referral code which of course varies. This referral code will support the sales promotion.

2. Promote affiliate products

At this step, promotional media can be adjusted by the company or by Sinaumed’s’ own initiative. For example, product reviews with videos, YouTube, forums, social media, blog posts and so on. When socializing product promotions, enter information on using your referral code.

3. Consumers use referral codes from affiliates

The referral code that has been informed during product promotion by consumers will be used. Using this code makes consumers get different prices because they get a discount from using your referral code.

4. Get a commission

The referral code is intended to indicate that the product or service offered by the affiliate has been purchased by the consumer. The more you use the code, the more commission you will get as an affiliate.

Requirements to Become an Affiliator

Anyone can become an affiliate, but being a successful affiliate requires a number of qualified requirements. The requirements are as follows:

1. Internet quota

The most basic requirement to become an affiliate is internet quota. Most of the time, Sinaumed’s as an affiliate will require frequent internet connection. Affiliators also need to create content and distribute links which are all done through social media. But don’t worry, the required internet access also doesn’t need to take up a large quota depending on your content, Sinaumed’s.

2. Communication skills

When distributing a product or service link, there are times when the affiliate needs to make a verbal recommendation. That’s why successful affiliates must have direct and clear communication skills. Apart from that, Sinaumed’s will also need to communicate directly with followers who ask questions and leave comments on your uploads.

3. Extensive network

Links will spread more easily if you have a high number of followers. For this reason, Sinaumed’s may also have to spend more energy to network with fellow social media users. However, that doesn’t mean affiliates have to have a lot of followers from the start. Joining an affiliate program can actually make you collect followers gradually.

4. Ability to create content

The link that will be distributed is not necessarily thrown on social media. The link can be shared on social media by uploading the appropriate content. Most of the time, affiliate links are provided with appropriate recommended or review content posts. That way, followers will have more confidence that the link that is being provided is in accordance with the expectations given by the affiliate.

5. Target the right consumers

Not only the number of followers and communication skills, Sinaumed’s also need to know the right target audience. When Sinaumed’s is recommending a product, Sinaumed’s must understand who this product is intended for.

For example, Sinaumed’s has a target audience that is mostly adults in their 30s to 40s. Perhaps the most appropriate recommended content is vitamins and drugs not snacks.

 

 

Affiliate Types

The types of affiliation that we can learn, among others:

1. Mass media

By using mass media, a product will gain awareness from the wider community in large numbers. However, because the costs are somewhat more expensive than other types of affiliation, the mass media is rarely used.

By using mass media, a product or service can easily get the attention and promotion needed in a shorter period of time. This is because the number of viewers or audiences from the mass media is relatively larger.

2. Bloggers

Blogger can be used because it has the advantage of increasing sales conversions from a product or service that you want to offer. Using blogger as a marketing strategy can increase consumer confidence because in general a blogger can conduct trials of the products and services offered along with the reviews they provide as a form of promotion.

In addition, many people trust bloggers more than influencers, because bloggers generally have a wider knowledge or understanding of a product or service offered compared to influencers who are often not in accordance with the product or service offered.

3. Influencers

An influencer is someone who has the power or ability to influence other people in making purchasing decisions for a product or service.

By having a large number of followers and being loyal to that person, an influencer can easily influence his followers to buy that will promote the product being offered.

As for those included in influencers, they can be celebrities, experts or experts in a field to social media users with a large number of followers that can be used as your affiliate marketing strategy.

Steps in Running an Affiliate Business

Here are some tips that can improve Sinaumed’s in running an affiliate business model, check it out:

1. Familiarize yourself with studying all available information about the products and services that Sinaumed’s will offer and promote. In this way, Sinaumed’s can decide whether to do affiliate marketing for certain products.
2. Having a product that is currently in demand by the public and the market in general. So, when Sinaumed’s offers its products indirectly it can also get pleasure from carrying out these promotional activities.
3. Create a website or blog to promote your business. This needs to be done because it is one of the important steps in running this affiliate business.
4. Try first the product you are going to sell, so you can find out what you are promoting. In addition, the public or potential customers are now getting smarter and are unlikely to be taken in by the false promises that Sinaumed’s gives about a product.
5. Provide useful content and not just promote goods. This is due to the creation of a good product image that must build good relations with consumers.
6. Manage finances well in implementing this affiliate business model. Because, irregular income can make it difficult for you to manage expenses or income. By having good money management, the income you get will be used to improve yourself and your business to become a reseller.

 

 

Closing

So, that’s about the definition of an affiliate, to its advantages and disadvantages. If Sinaumed’s becomes an affiliate, they will get a commission for every purchase of a product from a brand through an affiliate link in your content. As an affiliate profession that is profitable and easy to run and only has a computer.

Apart from that, other capital is an internet connection and the ability to create good marketing content to earn millions of rupiah in income. However, make sure that the product you are selling for the affiliate program is real and can be functionally useful and don’t fool others.

If Sinaumed’s is still confused, and needs references related to the full definition, differences, strengths and weaknesses of affiliates, you can visit sinaumedia’s collection of books at sinaumedia.com . After reading this article to the end, I hope you can add insight to Sinaumed’s. So, are you interested in becoming an affiliate?

Definition of Adobe Illustrator – Are you just starting to explore the world of graphic design and illustration? If you want to study graphic design, surely you have this question: “what software to use?” There are so many popular design applications and of course you can be confused about choosing one. You can see the best design applications here !

With the help of various applications, exploring your new hobby can be even more fun. One of the choices of these various applications is Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator. Mastering these two applications can make you adept at drawing digitally and being creative in the world of graphics. That way, your new hobby can become additional income, even a more serious career choice.

However, if you are confused about having to use the Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator applications, you should read this article to the end. These two applications are both popular in the world of design, but they are quite different in their uses. No need to linger, sinaumedia has summarized information about this application just for you. The following is a complete explanation of Adobe Illustrator.

Definition of Adobe Illustrator

Adobe Illustrator is a popular software application among professionals, business design, and the art world that is used by graphic designers to create vector graphics. This vector graphics editor program-based application was developed and marketed by Adobe Systems.

Adobe began developing Illustrator in 1985. Although it had been developed since 1985, Adobe Illustrator was only officially released in January 1987. Adobe began designing and programming in 1985 which was a companion application to Photoshop.

Illustrator version 1.7 was released as Illustrator 88. It was so named because it was released in 1988. Illustrator 88 was introduced with richer tools and features than the previous version. In 1989, Adobe Illustrator 88 was named by Byte as the winner of the Byte Award because it was claimed to be better than its competitor, namely Aldus FreeHand.

This application offers a variety of sophisticated tools that can create vector-based illustrations, icons, typography, and other forms of design work. Adobe Illustrator is a software application that belongs to the Adobe Creative Cloud.

Illustrator CC is the latest version of this program, the twentieth generation of Illustrator products. This application has the function of creating graphic works. The works that you can make include logos, icons, illustrations, product packaging, typography, to large advertisements on billboards .

According to the information on the official website , the graphic processing results of this application are in vector form. According to Vectr , a vector is a type of image that cannot be broken, even if it is enlarged many times. This is what makes Adobe Illustrator suitable for use in making any illustration, including logos and icons. This is because the quality of the images will be maintained and will not break, even if they are resized to suit their use.

So, to dive deeper into this graphical application, let’s dive right into its superior functions and features, come on!

 

Adobe Illustrator Functions

This application is usually used to create various design needs ranging from logos, promotional content, graphics, digital artwork, even websites. Adobe Illustrator is quite popular for graphic design projects related to marketing, advertising, and for processing digital artwork professionally.

In the view of graphic designers, Adobe Illustrator can be used to create various digital images and print media. The main function of Adobe Illustrator is to draw or design illustrations in vector form. Apart from that, Adobe Illustrator can also make tracing on photo objects, recolor objects, or make a photo look like a sketch.

Apart from drawing illustrations, this software also makes it possible to manipulate text and create multimedia designs. Adobe Illustrator users are also supported to create and design mock-up designs as icon templates or design shapes displayed in applications and websites.

In terms of vector image quality owned by Adobe Illustrator, indirectly this software has the use of creating good work in terms of image quality. The functions and uses of the Adobe Illustrator software are very diverse, depending on the basic and exploratory abilities of the graphic designer who wants to process design drawings.

In detail, some of the multimedia design works produced from Adobe Illustrator are:

1. Media Content Design.
2. Application Design.
3. Logos.
4. Watermarks.
5. Website/Blog Design.
6. Illustration Design.
7. Icon Design.
8. Billboards, Banners and Banners.
9. Design of Tables, Graphs and Diagrams.
10. Cartoon Design.

Of the many works that can be designed using Adobe Illustrator, the job of a graphic designer is very profitable if involved in a commercial or business form through this application. This is because Adobe Illustrator is currently often used by media companies to serve clients’ wishes for design purposes, such as product advertisements, politics, media service companies, social media admin designs, and so on.

If you need to create a design from scratch and don’t need to edit existing images, you can use Adobe Illustrator. The tools offered by this application are more complete, so that they can improve the results of the designs you make.

Adobe Illustrator is very suitable for processing designs such as logo designs, brand designs, illustrations, and typography designs, while Adobe Photoshop is suitable for use if you are going to process designs with images. This application is suitable for working on types of design such as photo manipulation, photo editing, poster design, digital collage and advertisement design.

 

Superior Features of Adobe Illustrator

The features in Adobe Illustrator are usually called tools . Through existing tools , you can produce a variety of special digital images. Summarized from Tutsplus and Mashable , some of the tools in Adobe Illustrator include:

1. Toolboxes

The toolbox or tools panel is the most frequently used menu in Adobe Illustrator. This is because there are various menu functions for creating various objects in the Illustrator document. The tools panel is located on the left sidebar with more than 50 tools icons. Some of them are the selection tool (V), direct selection tool (A), magic wand tool (Y), lasso tool (Q), and many other tools that users can learn.

2. Pen Tool

The core tool of Adobe Illustrator is called the pen tool . With the pen tool , you can draw almost any shape you can imagine. There is an option to change the sharpness of the intersection points of your image to give the shape of the image a variety. It all depends on your own creation.

3. Pathfinder

Apart from the pen tool , another tool that you can use to modify shapes is the pathfinder . If the pen tool is used for drawing, pathfinder is used to modify the shape of an object based on certain other objects.

You can cultivate two different shapes according to your creativity. There are many variations of the pathfinder with different functions. To be clearer, you can see the difference between the four in the image below.

4. Clipping Masks

What if you want to transfer patterns or colors from one object to another? Clipping masks are the answer. The way this Adobe Illustrator tool works is by copying the color or pattern of one object. After that, the color or pattern will be placed on another object that you have specified.

5.Type

The tool that of course cannot be missed is type . With this tool, you can type whatever you want. You can also set the type, size, and spacing between fonts.

6. Making Patterns

The next featured tool from Adobe Illustrator is pattern . Through this feature, you can make patterns without having to repeat certain designs. That way, your digital design process can be much more efficient.

7. Live Trace

Live trace is the next interesting tool that you can use. Before this feature, graphic designers or illustrators had to scan documents to convert them into digital format. After that, they have to use the pen tool to redraw by “tracing” their own work.

The solution to the inefficiency of this process is live trace . With this tool , you can convert image and photo formats into vectors. If the format has changed, all you have to do is make a few adjustments here and there to suit your needs.

8. Color Palette

The Color Palette feature is used to make coloring by specifying the fill color ( fill ) and the stroke ( stroke ). In this color palette, various color parameters will be displayed from the RGB and CMYK coloring types.

9. Transparency Palette

The transparency palette is part of the tool used to adjust the opacity level of the objects created. The transparency palette in Adobe Illustrator’s latest features is further enhanced by providing object or layer sliders. This palette also provides a new opacity mask control with an object fill color luminance value to cover the underlying object. For example, a darker color will be masked to be more opaque than a lighter color. In essence, this Opacity mask will create more complex transparency and masking effects directly.

10. Stroke Palette

This section of the stroke palette is used by users to outline objects or are called outlines . This tool provides line thickness settings in vector objects that are set according to the user’s wishes.

11. Gradient Palette

The gradient palette will help the user in adjusting the position of the color gradation in a selected vector object. The default color of the gradation is black and white, then it can be adjusted to a variety of colors taken for object coloring.

12. Layers Palette

The Layers palette is a basic palette that graphic designers always encounter, because this layer section is always applied in Adobe System software for image processing applications, one of which is Adobe Photoshop. In Adobe Illustrator, layers also play an important role in designing design objects. The Layers palette will organize information on the list or place of object layers on the artboard or worksheet board.

This discussion only reviews a few of the many features offered by Adobe Illustrator. Always try new things and explore to get the most out of this app.

 

The difference between Adobe Illustrator and other applications

1. Difference Between Adobe Illustrator and CorelDraw

Adobe Illustrator and CorelDraw are very well known and are always relied on by designers, because the applications are perfect and have complete features. Both of these applications have vector-based image types, but there are still major differences between the two.

In terms of features, Adobe Illustrator is more complete than CorelDraw. Adobe Illustrator can maintain its original colors when printed and this application is great for creating illustration designs, while CorelDraw is often used by production companies for the production process because of its general appearance and easy recognition for ordinary users. However, CorelDraw cannot produce images as good as Adobe Illustrator, although it is not inferior to bitmap or raster based images.

2. The difference between Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Photoshop

The basic difference between Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Photoshop is that Adobe Illustrator is vector-based software and is more suitable for creating scalable logo designs, while Adobe Photoshop is more suitable for work that uses images and edits designs that have already been made.

Here’s the difference between the two in more detail:

• Adobe Illustrator has layers with many objects, unlike Adobe Photoshop where each layer can only contain one object.
• Adobe Illustrator is vector graphics-based software, so it allows you to process designs sharper and clearer than Adobe Photoshop.
• When running Adobe Illustrator, you can use multiple artboards in one project, whereas in Adobe Photoshop you can only use one canvas.
• When running Adobe Photoshop, you can use the area selection tool , whereas in Adobe Illustrator you only make it possible to select objects.

Adobe Illustrator Prices

So, even though it’s rich in features, Adobe Illustrator is an application that you can’t use for free. You need to pay a subscription fee to  legally enjoy the features and tools . Based on information on Adobe’s official website, the subscription scheme options include:

• Adobe Illustrator application only, which is IDR 283,300 per month.
• Access to all Adobe applications, which is IDR 715,100 per month.

Alternative Applications

You already understand that Adobe Illustrator is one of the most feature-rich graphics applications. Unfortunately, not everyone has the money to subscribe to the paid version of this app. You don’t need to worry, there are many alternative applications that function similarly, but can be used for free.

As reported by the NY Film Academy , several free alternatives to Adobe Illustrator include:

• SVG-edit, access via browser on computer.
• InkScape, access via Windows and Linux.
• Affinity Designer, access via MacOS.
• OpenOffice Draw, access via Windows, Linux, and MacOS.
• Serif DrawPlus, access via Windows.

Conclusion

From a brief review regarding the definition of Adobe Illustrator above, it can be concluded that Adobe Illustrator is Adobe Inc.’s vector-based image processing software. This software continues to experience development from the old version of Illustrator 1.0 since 1987 to the Illustrator CC version since 2013 until now. Adobe Illustrator brings the latest features from each release, it’s no wonder that many professional designers choose this software for editing and creating designs.

That is a complete explanation from sinaumedia regarding the meaning, superior features, and subscription prices for the Adobe Illustrator application. Hopefully it can help and be useful in understanding it. Are you increasingly interested in trying it? Proficient in using Adobe Illustrator is one of the capitals for a career as a graphic designer. However, besides mastering the application, you are also required to have other skills that must be constantly honed.

Share this article on your social media to make it more useful and useful. If there is something you want to ask or convey, please write it through the comments column below. Thank you and good luck!

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Definition of Abrasion – The Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI) is well known by many people as a maritime country. This term can arise because the Indonesian state has more ocean area than the land, so that almost all of Indonesia’s land is surrounded by a coastline. Therefore, the Indonesian state has long been known for its maritime trade.

The Geospatial Information Agency (BIG) said that the total length of the coastline of Indonesia is 99,093 kilometers. The length of the line is very long, but as time goes by, the Indonesian coastline begins to experience shrinkage. The shrinkage of Indonesia’s coastline has occurred in several places, so that slowly Indonesia’s coastline is also decreasing.

The shrinking of the coastline is accompanied by the shrinking of the land. The shrinking of the coastline can cause the environment, ecosystems, and residents around the coast to suffer losses, so they cannot use the beach to the fullest. Shrinking coastlines can be caused by human activities and can also be due to natural factors.

The smaller the coastline, the more indented the beach is towards the mainland. The occurrence of shrinkage is due to beach abrasion. Beach abrasion that occurs continuously can also reduce the beauty of the beach itself because the natural balance is damaged.

There is no harm in understanding more about beach abrasion because who knows, by knowing more about beach abrasion, we can play a role in preventing abrasion. To find out more about beach abrasion, you can see this article, Sinaumed’s. This article will discuss further, starting from the definition of abrasion, its causes, impacts, to how to prevent abrasion.

Definition of Abrasion

Abrasion is an event of soil erosion caused by sea waves and the presence of sea tides. Whether it’s sea waves or sea tides, both of them have destructive properties. Therefore, the land on the coastline will be damaged if it is continuously exposed to sea waves and sea tides.

Almost the same as the definition of abrasion in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), abrasion is the erosion of rocks by wind, water or ice that contain materials that are destructive. The occurrence of this abrasion event is not always caused by natural factors, but can also be caused by human behavior. If left alone, slowly but surely the beach area will decrease.

Abrasion caused by natural factors (tides and sea waves) will always occur. Even so, we can still reduce coastal damage due to abrasion. By minimizing the impact of this damage, soil erosion on the coast does not shrink or decrease significantly.

In simple terms, the occurrence of abrasion in the form of sediment that is on the coast is carried by sea water in larger quantities or has crossed the threshold. Therefore, if things like this keep happening, the sediment on the coast will not only decrease, but will slowly run out.

Coastal waves that cannot be broken can cause abrasion which will be detrimental to the ecosystem, environment, and residents around the coast. To prevent this, it can be done by providing concrete material around the beach, so that the beach waves can be broken up and abrasion is avoided. The concrete materials for protecting beaches are very diverse, you can find them in the book Concrete and Precast Technology in Coastal Safety Buildings. 

 

 

Preventing beach abrasion and erosion can be said to be a necessity so that the ecosystem and environment around the coast are not damaged. One way to make this happen is by applying PEGAR technology. PEGAR Technology stands for Low Threshold Breakwater. Building PEGAR technology requires special skills, the book Pegar Technology for Overcoming Erosion and Beach Abrasion contains research results on the development of PEGAR technology, so it can be used as a reference for making PEGAR technology.

 

Definition of Abrasion According to Experts

Some experts also express the meaning of abrasion, including:

Wibowo

Wibowo said that abrasion is a process of eroding hard material or rocks, such as rock walls which are usually accompanied by avalanches or material collapse on the beach.

Aditya Pebriansyah

According to Aditya Pebriansyah, abrasion is the occurrence of soil erosion caused by the impact of sea waves, glaciers, river water, sea, or the wind that is around it.

Damaywanti

According to Damaywanti, abrasion is a process of eroding land or coastal areas caused by the activity of ocean currents, sea waves, and sea tides.

Prawiradisastra

Prawiradisastra said that abrasion is the erosion of the beach which usually occurs due to ocean currents or sea waves.

Law Number 24 of 2007

Based on Law Number 24 of 2007, abrasion is a process of eroding the coast caused by destructive ocean waves and currents where the trigger is the disturbed natural balance in the area.

From the definition of abrasion that has been expressed by several experts, it can be said that abrasion is the erosion of the coast caused by sea waves and sea tides that carry coastal sediments at normal limits.

Causes of Abrasion

The process of abrasion or the cause of abrasion is divided into two, namely caused by natural factors and caused by human behavior.

Natural Factors

Natural factors that cause abrasion are sea currents, tides, climate change, and storms.

Ocean Currents

As previously explained, one of the main causes of abrasion is due to seawater currents. In this case, sea water currents can be interpreted as sea waves or waves that will continuously damage the coast, so that the coastline will shrink or decrease.

These sea waves or waves can appear due to differences in concentrations in the sea waters and the existence of air circulation. With these two things, waves or sea waves can reach the coast. If the sea waves are getting bigger, the sedimentary rocks on the beach will quickly break.

In addition, the stronger the sea waves will carry beach sand and other beach materials into the ocean. Because of that, beach erosion due to abrasion is slowly getting bigger.

Tide

In addition to the factor of sea water currents, the occurrence of abrasion is also caused by sea tides. The tides of this sea water will not be avoided. In other words, sea tides must occur, so that coastal damage cannot be avoided. Although it cannot be avoided, but abrasion due to sea tides, the damage can be minimized.

Sea tides occur due to the gravitational movement of the earth and the moon that surrounds the earth. The occurrence of tides will change the beach every day because it can carry beach materials into the sea, so there will be a lot of beach material that will be lost and cause beach abrasion.

Climate change

The next cause of abrasion that comes from natural factors is climate change. Climate change that is happening at this time can be considered quite severe because it is uncertain, so it is difficult to predict. This abnormal climate change can increase sea levels, so that it can submerge coastal areas. The coast, which used to be wide, will get smaller and smaller due to abrasion.

Storm

Storms are one of the causes of beach abrasion. If a storm has occurred in the coastal area, the soil erosion is also getting bigger. In fact, bada can carry beach material in quite a lot. The bigger the storm, the bigger and worse the beach abrasion will be.

Indonesia is known as a country prone to natural disasters because of its geographical location. The Geography of Natural Disasters book contains information on which areas may be affected by natural disasters. If you want to know about areas that have a significant risk of being affected by natural disasters, then you can get this book by clicking the “Buy Now” button below.

Human Factors

Not only from natural factors, beach abrasion can occur, but it can also occur due to human factors, including:

Exploitation of Marine Resources

Exploitation of marine resources can cause abrasion to occur. This is because when there are sea waves, there are no obstacles, so they go straight to the beach. In addition, the exploitation of marine resources can also damage seawater ecosystems, so that marine biota fish and coral reefs cannot develop optimally.

As for marine resources that are exploited, such as taking excess marine fish, damaging coral reefs, and taking excess marine biota. Exploitation of these marine resources should be reduced as much as possible so that marine ecosystems can last even longer. More importantly, the absence of exploitation of marine resources can prevent seawater abrasion.

Global warming

Global warming is one of the causes of abrasion due to human behavior. The occurrence of global warming is caused by bad human behavior which prevents geothermal heat from returning to the atmosphere, so that geothermal temperatures have increased from year to year. The causes of global warming, such as the use of motorized vehicles, excessive forest burning, industrial factories, and so on.

The existence of these motorized vehicles produces carbon dioxide which makes it difficult for geothermal energy to be reflected by the earth. If geothermal heat continues to occur, then the ice at the poles will seek, so that sea levels will rise. From the sea level that continues to rise, the area around the coast will be lower.

Sand Mining on a Large Scale

The third cause of beach abrasion originating from human behavior is sand mining on a large scale. Beach sand that is taken on a large scale will reduce beach sand very quickly, so that sea waves will easily hit coastal areas.

In other words, the absence of beach sand or a significantly reduced beach will result in the greater force of the ocean waves hitting the beach. If it’s like that, then abrasion can not be avoided anymore.

Various kinds of disasters that exist in this world can sometimes occur not only because of natural factors, but also because of human factors. One of the causes of natural disasters due to human activity is the lack of plants which can be the cause of natural disasters, such as floods, landslides, and so on. So, we must play a role in preventing natural disasters by replanting or reforestation. The book Going Green to Avoid Disasters contains the importance of going green to prevent natural disasters in simple and easy-to-understand language.

Abrasion Impact

The occurrence of this abrasion also has an impact, including:

Flora and Fauna Habitats are Slowly Disappearing

If abrasion occurs for a long time, the habitat for marine flora and fauna will slowly disappear. The loss of habitat for marine flora and fauna also reduces marine resources, so that it will be difficult for local people to enjoy the benefits of marine resources. In addition, the habitat of marine flora and fauna is slowly disappearing which can damage the marine ecosystem.

Mangrove Forest Becomes Degraded 

Many studies have stated that mangrove forests can repel sea water, so that abrasion can be prevented. However, mangrove forests will be damaged or even destroyed if large-scale abrasion continues. What’s more, when it enters the hurricane season, the mangrove forests will find it increasingly difficult to withstand the sea waves.

Shrinkage of Line or Beach Area

As previously explained that abrasion will carry beach material into the sea, so that the coastline will shrink. If the beach area is shrinking, there will be fewer places for fishermen to park their boats, making it difficult to store boats on the beach. In addition, the beauty of the beach can be reduced due to considerable abrasion.

How to Prevent Abrasion

Abrasion events are bound to happen, but that doesn’t mean we don’t try to prevent them. In the following, how to prevent beach abrasion.

1. Provides a Ban on Sand Mining

Sand mining can be one of the causes of abrasion. Therefore, it is necessary to ban sand mining. With this prohibition, beach sand will continue to exist and will not run out easily, so that abrasion or beach erosion can be prevented or minimized.

2. Improving Coral Reef Maintenance

Increasing the maintenance of coral reefs can be one way to prevent abrasion. This is because coral reefs are getting more and more maintained and will reduce the strength of sea waves.

This beach abrasion must be prevented so that environmental sustainability around the beach is maintained and residents can still feel the benefits of the beach. One way to prevent abrasion is to plant mangroves. This plant is able to prevent sea waves and still has other benefits. A research book from Kompas Research and Development with the title Mitigating Abrasion Calamity, Planting Mangroves can be used as a reference for planting mangroves for communities around the coast.

3. Planting Mangrove Plants

There have been many studies stating that mangrove plants can be abrasion prevention plants. With the presence of mangroves, the sea waves or waves will break before arriving at the beach. Therefore, in several areas near the coast, we will find mangrove forests which aim to hold and break up ocean waves.

Conclusion

The occurrence of this abrasion can have a damaging impact on the coast, so that ecosystems and the coastal environment are damaged, even the activities of the local population are not optimal and it is difficult to earn income. This is because marine resources are decreasing rapidly and the coast is not beautiful, so it is rarely visited by domestic or foreign tourists.

Therefore, we should prevent sea abrasion caused by humans. Meanwhile, we also play a role in minimizing damage caused by abrasion from natural factors. That way, the coast will still be beautiful and marine resources will still exist, so that the economy of the local population can increase. So, are you interested in participating in abrasion prevention activities?

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

The history of batik in Indonesia is closely related to the development of the Majapahit Kingdom in the era of the spread of Islamic teachings in Java. According to some records, the development of batik was mostly carried out during the Mataram Sultanate era, then continued during the Surakarta Kasunanan and Yogyakarta Sultanate eras.

The existence of the oldest batik activity in Indonesia is known to have come from Ponorogo and named Wengker, before finally in the seventh century, the Kingdom in Central Java learned batik from Ponorogo.

Batik is a cloth that is painted using liquid wax using a tool called a canting. With the wax and canting, the craftsmen draw and paint on a cloth to make the cloth highly valuable. Batik has existed since the royal era and continues to grow until now. What is the history of batik in Indonesia? Check out the explanation here!

Meaning of Batik

Batik is a pictorial fabric and the process of making it is specifically by drawing or applying motifs on a plain or blank cloth, then carrying out a special process, so that the cloth has special characteristics compared to other fabrics.

In language, batik comes from the word mbat which means throwing repeatedly and tick which means point. In terms, batik is a technique of drawing on cloth by using wax and canting as tools and materials in the manufacturing process.

 

 

Understanding Batik According to Experts

There are several figures who express opinions about the meaning of batik, such as Iwan Tirta, Santoso Doellah and others, along with their explanations.

Nusjirwan Tirtaamidjaja

Nusjirwan Tirtaamidjaja expressed his opinion about the meaning of batik. According to Tirtaamidjaja, batik is a technique of decorating cloth using wax through a color dyeing process and the whole process is done by hand.

Santoso Doellah

Santoso Doellah argues that batik is a piece of cloth made in the traditional way with certain decorative patterns and patterns. The techniques in the process of making batik are quite diverse, according to the origin of the batik.

Ivan Tirta

Batik according to Iwan Tirta is decorating cloth or textiles using wax and color dyeing methods. All the process of making batik is done with the help of hands and not machines, like the process of making modern batik.

Alif Syakur

Alif Syakur is of the opinion that the art of batik is a range of colors which includes various processes from the process of waxing, dyeing to dissolving on the cloth. The result is a subtle motif, with high artistry and detailed painting.

UNESCO

Indonesian Batik has been designated by UNESCO as a Humanitarian Heritage for Masterpieces of the Oral and Intangible Heritage of Humanity on October 2, 2009.

UNESCO assesses batik as the identity of the Indonesian people and becomes an important part for someone in Indonesia from the time they are born until they finally die. Because of this, the Indonesian government made October 2 as National Batik Day and is always commemorated with the community.

History and Development of Batik in Indonesia

Batik comes from the word ambatik which means a cloth that has many dots. The suffix of the word batik, namely tick, means a point or tip that is used to make a point.

Quoted from the official website of the Ministry of Education and Culture or the Ministry of Education and Culture, the word batik also comes from the Javanese language, namely tritik, the word batik comes from a combination of two words, namely amba which means to write and point which means point .

Historically, batik originated from the time of our ancestors and was known since the 17th century. At that time, the motifs of batik were dominated by animal and plant shapes. However, later batik motifs developed and switched to motifs resembling clouds or temple reliefs.

The craft of batik in Indonesia has been known since the time of the Majapahit kingdom. The Bhairawa statue is an example of the Majapahit Arca art style which was made in Sumatra around the 14th century. The development of batik art spread in Indonesia after the end of the 18th century or around the beginning of the 19th. Then stamped batik became known after World War I ended or in 1920s.

The history of batik in Indonesia is closely related to the development of the Majapahit Empire and the spread of Islamic teachings in Java. according to some records, the development of batik was mostly carried out during the Mataram Sultanate era and then continued during the Surakarta Kasunanan and Yogyakarta Sultanate eras.

The existence of the oldest known batik activity comes from Ponorogo with the name Wengker, before the seventh century, the Kingdom in Central Java began to learn batik from Ponorogo. For this reason, Ponorogo batik has a style that is somewhat similar to batik circulating in Central Java, except that Ponorogo batik is batik made from thick black wax.

In addition, Ponorogo batik is also commonly referred to as irengan batik and is close to magical elements. Ponorogo batik was also developed by the kingdoms in Central Java.

The existence of Ponorogo batik until the 20th century and became part of heaven for batik makers, because batik production in Ponorogo exceeded the batik industry in Central Java or Yogyakarta which was then taken by batik collectors in Surakarta and Pekalongan, besides that, the wages of batik makers were in Ponorogo it is also the highest in Java.

Batik art in Indonesia has been known since the time of the Majapahit Kingdom and continued to grow until the next kingdom and its kings. Batik art in general spread in Indonesia and then specifically on the island of Java after the end of the 18th century or until the beginning of the 19th century.

The batik technique itself is known to exist for more than 1,000 years, it is possible that the technique originated in ancient Egypt or Sumer. Then, batik techniques spread to several countries in West Africa, such as Nigeria, Cameroon and Mali, Asia such as Sri Lanka, India, Iran, Bangladesh, Thailand, Malaysia and Indonesia.

Then, until the early 20th century, the batik that was produced was written batik. New stamped batik became known after World War I ended or around the 1920s. Batik art is the art of drawing on cloth for clothing which became one of the cultures of the royal family in Indonesia in ancient times.

At first, batik activities were limited to the palace and the batik that was produced was only for clothes for kings and government families and prominent figures.

For this reason, many of the dignitaries who lived outside the palace and read batik art together with them outside the palace, so that batik producing places appeared in several areas.

Over time, the art of batik was imitated by the common people. Then the art of batik spread, so that the art of batik became a job for women or housewives to fill their spare time.

The coloring materials used for batik consist of native Indonesian plants and are usually made from noni, indigo and soga trees. Meanwhile, the soda material is made from soda ash and the salt is made from mud soil.

 

 

Original Indonesian Batik Variety

Batik in Indonesia has many kinds of motifs, ranging from motifs shaped like animals, clouds and statues. Each variety of Indonesian batik motifs actually has its own meaning and uniqueness. Here are some types of batik motifs in Indonesia.

1. Mega Mendung Batik

The first batik motif is mega mendung. This motif is one of the most popular types of batik in Cirebon , West Java. The mega mendung batik motif is synonymous with patterns that are similar to ordinary forms and have deep meanings and philosophies. One of the meanings of the Mega Mendung batik motif is the value of patience that must exist in every human being.

Mega Mendung has 7 color gradations as its coating. The name of this motif comes from the word mega which means cloud or sky. Meanwhile, cloudy is the sky that dims when it’s about to rain.

The color gradation of this Mega Mendung batik motif corresponds to the 7 layers of the sky. In addition, the term cloudy can also be interpreted as a patient or not easily angry character in a human’s life.

2. Batik Sogan

In contrast to Mega Mendung, the Sogan batik motif originates from Solo and Yogyakarta with a characteristic light brown color and accents of flowers and dots. Apart from that, there are also curves and lines in this Sogan batik motif. As additional information, the Sogan batik motif is the favorite batik motif of the President of the Republic of Indonesia, Joko Widodo.

It turns out that the sogan motif has existed since the time of our ancestors and was commonly used by kings in palaces and sultanates. The sogan motif is quite popular, because this motif has an elegant color, which is a combination of black and brown.

Even though the motifs and colors of batik are increasingly diverse and varied, the sogan batik motif remains a unique batik motif in Indonesia.

3. Seven Way Batik

One of the areas in Indonesia which is quite famous as a craftsman area and center for batik, namely Pekalongan , Central Java. So, it’s not surprising that the city of Pekalongan is currently known as a city of batik artisans, especially coastal batik motifs that have a variety of colors.

Pekalongan batik has a characteristic that is dominated by plant and animal motifs. Not only does it have bright floral motifs, but Pekalongan batik motifs also have lines and dots that are quite charming.

Pekalongan batik motifs describe the life characteristics of coastal communities who easily adapt to influences from outside cultures, so that the motifs and colors look very varied.

From a philosophical point of view, Pekalongan batik craftsmen have placed Chinese ceramic ornaments as a sign of acculturation of ancestral cultural ties, which in their paintings have both gentleness and fluency.

4. Kartini’s Batik

The next Indonesian batik motif is Kartini batik which is known in the Jepara area as a woodcarving producing area. Apart from Kartini batik, there are two most famous motifs from Jepara, namely old motifs and new motifs.

Jepara batik motifs have some quite striking characteristics, for example, such as black lunges to flora and fauna in the form of green threaded leaves or elephants with brown colors. Meanwhile, for a new version of batik motifs, Jepara has made innovations, for example, such as woven batik to written batik which is now known as Kartini batik.

5. Betawi Batik

Each region in Indonesia has its own distinctive batik motifs, including the Betawi or Jakarta community. This Betawi batik is a batik motif that is much liked by batik collectors in the archipelago.

In general, Betawi batik features bright colors and displays the cultural values ​​of the Betawi people. There are several images of motifs that are quite dominant on Betawi batik cloth, for example, such as ondel-ondel, Monas, the Ciliwung River to the Ceila Map. Usually, Betawi batik motifs are suitable for formal occasions, such as events from Abang None Jakarta or state events.

6. Asmat Batik

Even though batik is synonymous with heritage from Javanese culture, the eastern part of Indonesia also has a type of batik that is no less charming and enchanting. One of them is the province of Papua which is known to have Asmat batik motifs.

Asmat batik is known for its brightly colored motifs such as terracotta or slightly brownish colors such as earth colors. Asmat batik motifs are usually dominated by unique and distinctive carving patterns from the Asmat tribe, Papua. An example of Asmat batik is the motif in the form of carved statues and is unique to the native tribes that inhabit the Cendrawasih Earth.

7. Kamoro Batik

The next batik motif is the Kamoro batik motif originating from Papua . This batik motif has an image that resembles a standing statue carrying a spear blade.

The colors that are commonly displayed on the Kamoro tribal motifs are usually bright and bold colors, such as blue, green, yellow, pink, red or even black.

Kamoro batik motifs are also influenced by several cultures, for example, such as the Kamoro tribe and the influence of Javanese batik brought by batik craftsmen from Java Island. The use of Kamoro batik cloth is not only used for clothing, but also used for bed linen or other things.

8. Cendrawasih Batik

The Papua region also has batik with other motifs, namely Cenderawasih. One characteristic of the Cendrawasih batik motif is the use of bright and striking colors, for example golden yellow, green, red and other colors.

The Cendrawasih batik motif is classified as a contemporary and popular motif, because the Cendrawasih bird is an icon from the Papua region. In accordance with the name of this motif, Cendrawasih batik is inspired by the bird of paradise, which has charming feathers and tails.

So, it’s not surprising that users of Cendrawasih batik cloth will look both bold and assertive when wearing this batik motif.

9. Batik Prada

Prada batik is one of the batik motifs from Papua which is known to have high prices. This Prada batik motif resembles Cendrawasih batik, but there is a slight touch of gold lines on each motif.

Apart from the fact that there is gold in each motif, Prada’s batik is also made of silk. This batik cloth is usually used for shantung.

10. Batik Pring Sedapur

This one motif comes from Sidomukti Village , Magetan , East Java. The term Pring Sedapur comes from the Javanese language which means bamboo and allied. So, this batik motif depicts bamboo plants with bright colors and has a philosophical value, namely living in harmony and peace.

That is an explanation of the history of batik in Indonesia and the varieties of batik in Indonesia. If Sinaumed’s is interested in the origins of batik, or how to be creative with batik, then Sinaumed’s can find further information by reading books.

Shalawat Al Fatih – Reading blessings is a worship activity that is favored by Allah SWT because it praises the Prophet Muhammad SAW. While shalawat itself means a form of worship to Allah Ta’ala, which means giving praise to the Prophet Muhammad shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam.

Meanwhile, the term shalawat is our way of praying for the Prophet and his family to always be blessed with blessings and prosperity. Reading blessings has many benefits. Getting the intercession of the Prophet Muhammad in the hereafter is one of the benefits of prayer.

As in the word of Allah SWT in the Qur’an Qur’an Surah Al Ahzab verse 56, namely:

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتَهُۥ يُصَلُّونَ عَلَى ٱ lo

Innallāha wa malā`ikatahụ yuṣallụna ‘alan-Nabiyy, yā ayyuhallażīna āmanụ ṣallụ ‘alaihi wa sallimụ taslīmā

Meaning: “Indeed, Allah and His angels pray for the Prophet. O you who believe, pray for the Prophet and salute him.” (QS. al-Ahzab: 56)

There are various kinds of blessings, namely Jibril’s blessings, Nahdliya prayers, blessings, Syifa’s prayers, Nariyah’s prayers and others. Of the many prayers that are quite popular, here we will discuss the prayers of Al Fatih. This sholawat was made by Al-‘Arif al-Kabir Sayyid Muhammad al-Bakri. According to him, the virtue of Fatih’s prayer is that it can help erase sins and make it easier to enter heaven.

This sholawat is often read in various sholawat recitations at every opportunity. This shalawat has many benefits and as the name implies, is expected to be a ware to Allah SWT. If we have deadlocks and life problems, then we should draw closer to Allah SWT by reading this prayer of Al Fatih, hopefully we will be given smoothness and resolution.

Reading Shalawat Al Fatih

Shalawat that we need to know and the most important thing is to get the intercession of the Prophet Muhammad SAW later on the Day of Judgment. What we desire as Muslims is to receive the intercession of the Prophet Muhammad SAW because this is the way for us as Muslims to enter the paradise of Allah SWT.

The intercession of Rasulullah SAW is very important because it is the ticket to enter the paradise of Allah SWT. The content in the sholawat is about supplication, praise, and prayer to the Prophet Muhammad and his family, the aim is to get blessings from Allah SWT. Shalawat Al Fatih means “door opener (‘arsh).” Because there are many benefits of this prayer, it is necessary to know the correct reading of the Al Fatih prayer.

The following is the recitation of Al Fatih’s prayers in Arabic and Latin writing, complete with their meanings in Indonesian, namely:

اَللّٰهُمَّ صَلِّ وَسَلِّمْ وَبَارِكْ عَلَى سَيِّدِ نَا مُحَمَّدٍنِ الْفَاتِحِ لِمَا اُغْلِقَ وَالْخَاتِمِ لِمَا سَبَقَ وَالنَّاصِرِ الْحَقَّ بِالْحَقِّ وَالْهَادِي اِلَى صِرَاطٍ مُسْتَقِيْمٍ صَلَّى اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وَعَلَى اٰلِهِ وَأَصْحَابِهِ حَقَّ قَدْ رِهِ وَمِقْدَارِهِ الْعَظِيْمِ

Allahumma shalli wa sallim wa barik ‘ala sayyidina Muhammadinil Fatihi lima ughliqo, wal khotimi lima sabaqo, wan nashiril bil haqqi, wal hadi ila shiratil mustaqim (some read ‘shiratal mustaqim’). Shallallahu ‘alaihi, wa ‘ala alihi, wa asabihi haqqa qadrihi wa miqdarihil ‘azhim.

Meaning: “O Allah, bestow blessings, greetings, and blessings on our lord, Prophet Muhammad SAW, opening what is locked, closing what has been, defender of the right with the right, and guidance to the straight path. May Allah bestow blessings upon him, his family and his companions with the right of great rank and position.”

The Virtue of Shalawat Al Fatih According to Scholars

The recitation of Al Fatih’s prayer is quoted from the Malay Perukunan book. In the book there are quotes from Sheikh Al-Arif Al-Kubra where reading the Al Fatih sholawat has many virtues, namely as follows:

1. Forgiveness of sins by Allah SWT that we have ever done

If we want to erase his sins then read Al Fatih’s sholawat at every opportunity.

2. Alleviate every problem faced

If we face problems then Allah SWT will eliminate all the problems that are being experienced in life.

3. Eliminate anxiety

In our restless minds and hearts, Allah SWT will remove the restlessness that is in our minds and hearts. Some scholars recommend reading Sholawat Fatih so that the mind becomes calm.

4. Happiness in this world and in the hereafter

Reading Sholawat Fatih is also believed to bring happiness in the world and the hereafter. Life in the world and its sustenance is expected to be smooth. Then it will also be made easy when death picks up and gets happiness in the afterlife.

5. Died in a state of husnul khotimah

When we die, may we be killed in a state of husnul khotimah by Allah SWT. This is the death that every Muslim dreams of.

6. Stay away from hellfire

The virtue of Sholawat Fatih next is that we are free from the torment of hell fire. According to some scholars, reading Sholawat Fatih at least once in a lifetime then that person will be free from the fires of hell.

He mentioned some kind of benefit that could be obtained if he recited Al Fatih’s shalawat.

“Sykh Al-Arif Al-Kubra said, ‘Whoever reads this prayer once in his life, Allah Ta’ala will protect him from the fire of hell and make husnul khatimah obligatory for him,”

7. Bring guidance

Hidayah is a gift from Allah SWT, one of which is reading Sholawat Fatih. According to some scholars, whoever recites Sholawat Fatih for 40 consecutive days, his heart will be moved to repent for all the sins he has committed in this world.

8. The reward is equivalent to 10,000 prayers

Some scholars also believe that reading Sholawat Fatih can produce expensive results. According to these scholars, the reward for reading one prayer at Fatih is the same as the reward for reading 10,000 other prayers. In fact, some people believe that the reward is as high as 600,000 times.

9. Meet the Prophet Muhammad SAW in the afterlife

The dream of every Muslim really wants to have time to meet and gather with the Prophet Muhammad SAW. According to some scholars, reading Sholawat Fatih 1000 times on Thursday/Friday night or Monday night will make it easier to meet the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

10. Erases 400 years of sins

Reading Sholawat Fatih 100 times on Friday night is believed to erase 400 years of sins. This virtue is of course highly coveted by every Muslim.

The Right Time To Read Sholawat Al Fatih

The right time to read shalawat Al Fatih is to read it after the five daily prayers. More precisely when reading tahlil spirits and when praying and other worship activities. As for Shaykh Muhammad al-Budairi al-Qudsi, he recommends reading this shalawat after reading al-Musabbi’at al-Ashr (ten readings read seven times).

Among them are Ayat Kursi, Al-Fatihah, Al-Ikhlas, Al-Falaq, An-Naas, Al-Kafirun, tasbih tahmid tahlil takbir hauqalah, shalawat Ibrahimiyah, and prayer. The benefits of Sholawat Al Fatih are getting protection from the dangers in the world.

The Story Behind the Creator Sholawat Fatih

Sayyid Muhammad al-Bakri or better known as Sayyid Bakri is the creator of Al Fatih’s prayer. He is one of the descendants of Sayyidina Abu Bakar As-Shiddiq, a friend and father-in-law of the Prophet Muhammad.

Sayyid Bakri is a descendant of Abu Bakr who cannot be separated from the Prophet’s prayer for Abu Bakr when he wholeheartedly accompanied the Prophet to the Tsur Cave when he was being chased by the Quraysh infidels. At that time, Abu Bakr guarded the Prophet Muhammad from the stings of wild animals such as snakes. He covered the holes in the cave with his clothes.

There remains one small hole that has not been closed. Finally, he closed the hole with his thumb. Caves are usually inhabited by venomous and wild animals, such as snakes, scorpions and other venomous animals. Abu Bakr’s thought was right, the hole he closed with his thumb was inhabited by snakes. Abu Bakr’s thumb was bitten by a snake, another tradition mentions a scorpion.

The pain endured by Abu Bakr was unstoppable until his body trembled, sweat pouring down. Actually, the pain was unbearable but he still thought not to disturb the sleeping Prophet Muhammad, who was resting.

Habib Luthfi bin Yahya in his book A Glimmer of Ink: The Relationship of a Servant with the Creator (2014: 43) reveals that after the Prophet Muhammad woke up and knew what was happening to Abu Bakr, the Prophet prayed for Abu Bakr. There the Prophet Muhammad recited Surah Al-Fatihah.

After reading Surah Al-Fatihah, Sayyidina Abu Bakr’s swollen thumb finally recovered. Habib Lutfi also revealed the words of the Prophet Muhammad to Abu Bakr: “Abu Bakr, you will die a martyr because of this incident and your descendants will become martyrs.”

Prophet Muhammad’s prayer for Abu Bakr was proven. Habib Lutfi gave an example of the two descendants of Abu Bakr, namely Sayyid Syekh Muhyiddin Ibn ‘Arabi and Sayyid Bakri who had Shalawat Fatih.

Advice to Read Prayer Begins with Sholawat

Then, if you have a question, what if you pray praising the name of Allah SWT, but don’t recite prayers on the Prophet Muhammad SAW? It would be better, if we pray to Allah SWT by reading blessings on the Prophet Muhammad SAW so that our prayers are heard and granted by Allah SWT.

Meanwhile, Prophet Adam AS only said the name Muhammad SAW in prayer even though at that time the Prophet Muhammad SAW had not yet been born but Prophet Adam saw the name of Prophet Muhammad SAW on the Throne side by side with the name Allah SWT. So that our prayers are accepted by Allah SWT, we should pray in a polite manner and in accordance with Islamic rules, namely starting by praising the name of Allah SWT, then continuing by reciting sholawat with a sincere heart and not in a hurry.

Prayers that are performed by praising the name of Allah SWT but do not recite a sholawat for the glory of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, it is considered that the person who is praying is in a hurry and is not really in a state of concentration. Which means that the person prioritizes his worldly desires rather than getting closer to Allah and Rasulullah SAW.

This very unfortunate incident is in accordance with the statement of Rasulullah SAW that ; “He heard that someone was praying praising the name of Allah but without reciting a prayer, the Prophet said that the person was in a hurry.” The following are the words of the Prophet Muhammad about prayer “For those who read blessings on me even just once, Allah SWT will repay you ten times and ten degrees.” (HR. Muslim: 408 and has been stated by Imam bukhari in adabul Mufrad, Ibn abu Syaibah, Ismaili and sanad ma’lul).”

That is why Allah ta’ala sent down a mercy, a forgiveness, a great reward for anyone who reads sholawat. This is the word of Allah SWT in the Qur’an Surah Al Ahzab verse 56 about prayers to the Prophet Muhammad SAW, namely as follows:

اِنَّ اللّٰهَ وَمَلٰۤىِٕكَتَهٗ يُصَلُّوْنَ عَلَى النَّبِيِّۗ يٰٓاَيُّcrib

Meaning: “Indeed, Allah and his angels pray for the Prophet. O you who believe, always pray for the Prophet Muhammad and pay homage to him.” (QS. Al-Ahzab: 56)

Shalawat is to uphold and glorify the Prophet Muhammad SAW so that Muslims remember that he is the last Prophet who must be glorified until the end of time.

Shalawat is a prayer that runs on true goodness and truth to remind all Muslims in the world that Allah is the only God, the creator of nature and the Messenger of Allah is the last messenger of Allah SWT until the Day of Judgment arrives.

Rasulullah SAW is a figure that we must glorify through blessings so that he becomes a role model for all mankind, especially Muslims. What we as Muslims need to watch out for is an absurd incident, namely the emergence of a heretical sect claiming to be the god of the universe who incarnates as a human being.

There are also those who claim to be the incarnation of the Prophet after the Prophet Muhammad SAW, therefore reading sholawat is the best way to confirm and strengthen one’s faith in the belief in the existence of Allah SWT who is actually real and believes in the hadiths of the Prophet that the Prophet Muhammad is the last prophet until the end of time.

Closing

Every sholawat in Islam has its own virtues. One of them is the prayer of Al Fatih, which has a lot of virtues especially being able to alleviate a problem faced by a Muslim. Therefore, it is recommended to read the Al Fatih sholawat regularly.

Thus the discussion about the prayer of Al Fatih, I hope all the discussion above is useful for you. If you want to buy a book about prayer, you can get it at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Reference:

• https://amp.voice.com/news/2022/01/19/111741/sholawat-al-fatih-bacaan-latin-arti-dan-keutamaannya-bisa-tergratis-dari-api-neraka#amp_tf=Dari% 20%251%24s&aoh=16711228562672&referrer=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.google.com
• https://surabaya.tribunnews.com/amp/2022/07/23/sholawat-fatih-lengkap-arab-latin-dan-artinya-disertai-untungnya-jika-dibaca-rutin#amp_tf=Dari%20%251% 24s&aoh=16711228562672&referrer=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.google.com
• https://www.orami.co.id/magazine/shalawat-al-fatih

MPLS means – We often look forward to school orientation activities or an introduction to the school environment as a new student. Moreover, there will be an explanation regarding certain characteristics and regulations in our new school.

Interestingly, the School Orientation Period or MOS activities were changed to the School Environment Introduction Period or MPLS starting in the 2018/2019 academic year. Related to this, what is MPLS and is it the same as MOS?

MPLS itself is indeed an activity carried out on the first day of school, which all new students must attend. Its activities are not much different from MOS, because MPLS is an introduction to the school environment and its programs, facilities and infrastructure, learning methods, self-knowledge, and basic coaching related to culture in a school.

Meanwhile, the implementation of MPLS is in accordance with Permendikbud Number 18 of 2016, Sinaumed’s.

Mpls What is it?

In a more focused and specific manner, the School Environment Introduction Period is carried out directly by the school in order to introduce all things related to school to new students. Not only limited to new students or seniors and teachers, this introduction also includes various other components.

For example, the introduction of programs, ways of learning, infrastructure, coaching, to inculcating the concept of self-knowledge. As for boarding schools , this kind of cultural introduction is important material.

Deeper, school introduction becomes an introduction to the school environment and culture with various other components when it comes to boarding schools . New students will be given material and various games with an introduction to their alma mater agenda through this MPLS. These activities include:

• Introduction to culture and environment related to dormitory life.
• Enforcement of all regulations related to discipline in schools.
• Education about the dangers of drugs.
• Orientation related to student organization activities at school.

In accordance with existing regulations, these MPLS activities are generally carried out for 3 days and take place in the school environment.

MPLS Scope

Each school generally has slightly different materials, depending on their needs. During MPLS, some of the material that should be delivered will be explained at this point, Sinaumed’s. Also, don’t hesitate to ask politely if the MPLS activities at your school do not include the following:

1. Wiyata Mandala’s Insights
2. Student activities which include intracurriculars such as OSIS, or extracurriculars such as UKS, Scouts, Sports, Arts, and so on
3. How to study effectively
4. character building
5. Introduction to local culture.

MPLS Activity Objectives

Returning to the meaning of MPLS itself, of course this activity applies to all new students, both junior and senior high schools. More precisely, this activity also certainly has its own objectives, which are as follows:

1. Introducing students to the school environment.
2. Explore the potential that exists in new students.
3. Helping new students adapt to the school environment and surroundings, including aspects of security, infrastructure, and public facilities.
4. Growing motivation, enthusiasm, and a more effective way of learning as new students.
5. Develop positive interactions between school members, such as teachers and employees, and students.
6. Foster positive attitudes and behaviors, such as honesty, mutual respect, independence, discipline, respect for diversity, clean and healthy living, and other aspects that can make students have integrity, mutual cooperation spirit, and work ethic.

MPLS rules

The following are the rules regarding MPLS implemented by schools, Sinaumed’s.

Mandatory in MPLS:

Mandatory things that must be worked on or carried out in MPLS activities, namely:

• Planning and organizing activities is the teacher’s right only.
• This activity is carried out in schools, unless they do not have adequate facilities.
• Activities must be useful because they contain educational, creative, and fun values.
• New students must wear uniforms and official attributes from the school.
• In writing, the school must ask permission from the parents/guardians of potential participants in the introductory activities for new extracurricular members. MPLS activities must also have details included in writing.
• At a minimum, schools must assign two teachers as assistants in this MPLS activity.

MPLS Schedule:

According to the rules, MPLS activities are carried out for 3 days in the first week of the school year, on school days, and during class hours. Parents of students must and naturally question this activity if it lasts more than 3 days.

MPLS can be carried out online or offline during the Covid-19 pandemic, depending on the decision of the local government. Teachers will be assisted by students regarding the technical implementation of MPLS, with certain conditions.

There are two types of activities in MPLS, namely mandatory activities and optional activities according to the MPLS syllabus. The activity material of their own choice is adjusted to the conditions and characteristics of the school environment concerned.

Preparation for School Entrance

Preparing for school days is the most exciting and thrilling moment for many students, especially new students. At the beginning of every school year, this moment is highly anticipated and it is hoped that it will go well. However, we also have to prepare ourselves. Like how?

To help Sinaumed’s get started with preparations, we’ve listed the top 10 things to get us ready for smooth sailing on the first day of school!

1. Start Morning Schedule

Wake up at the hour we usually apply to wake up in the morning. When Sinaumed’s is old enough, use the alarm clock rule to be responsible for our own morning wake-up routine and don’t always depend on your parents.

2. Eat a Healthy Breakfast

Nowadays, we all know that children need a nutritious breakfast to be ready for the day. Work with mom or dad, or anyone else at home who can help, to come up with a mix of healthy breakfast options like apples, bananas and whole grain bread.

This will give us the energy needed to be mentally alert throughout the day, instead of the bad morning rush that they’ll get from sugary cereal alone.

3. Prepare clothes since the night before

Avoid frantic mornings by picking out school clothes the night before. If Sinaumed’s is still young enough, try asking for help finding school clothes on schedule, and putting them together in preparation for wearing them the next day.

Do this routine before school even starts, so you get used to planning ahead.

4. Bring a Healthy Lunch

In the days or weeks before school starts, plan and make your lunch for the next day with your parent or guardian each evening. Even if school isn’t in yet, we can ask for help getting into the habit of packing our lunches and getting ready to go each morning.

5. Follow the Lunch Schedule

Start eating your lunch right at school lunch time, which is from 12 to 1 pm. By getting used to this, we won’t feel too hungry before that hour, or too full, so we are lazy to eat and end up starving at the end of the afternoon.

6. Create Free Time to Study

Start doing your homework routine now by having free time to study something during school hours. Use this time for study activities like reading a book or even talking about your day with your parents.

7. Play Educational Games

Playing games during the holidays is a great way to keep our minds engaged and focused to build study skills. This will help you ensure that you are always ready when classes return and make the transition back to school smoother.

8. Keep doing the routine before going to bed

Early bedtime usually won’t occur during the holidays, but young minds need plenty of sleep to be ready to learn. Get back into a set bedtime routine now, so you don’t wake up too late before the first day of school.

9. Read Every Day

Learning should not stop during the holidays. Every day, spend at least 30 minutes to sit and read, alone or together. This will help us stay engaged with learning and in our daily school work routine.

10. Provide School Supplies

Immediately purchase or stock up on the school supplies needed to start the school year successfully. Shopping for backpacks, binders, and pencil cases will get us thinking (and excited) about the coming school year.

The Importance of the Role of the School Environment

If parents are a child’s first teacher, then it would be correct to say that the teacher is their second parent. School plays a perfect role in laying the foundation for a child’s life. Schools and their staff can provide a constructive environment that fosters mental and psychological growth and development in young people.

Surveys repeatedly show the influence of the school environment on student achievement. Launching Gurukul The School, which is recognized among the leading CBSE schools near Crossing Republic of Ghaziabad, understands the important role that the school environment plays in the intellectual growth of young people.

Hence, the schools have carved out an enabling environment that fosters the holistic development of children rather than simply pushing them to achieve excellence in academics.

This is how schools should believe that the learning environment in schools influences children’s growth:

1. Character Formation and Self-Motivation

Schools can foster leadership and self-motivated values ​​in children at an age when their minds are porous enough to absorb the most. Once children experience the importance of values ​​such as empathy, integrity, compassion, they live by those values ​​throughout their lives.

This creates the foundation of their character, shapes their beliefs, values ​​and views of themselves. This self-motivation gives them confidence in the future, so that they can communicate not only about what they need but also about social issues effectively.

2. Expanding the Learning Horizon

We all know how kids tend to lose interest in anything over a period of time. This is where the role of the nurturing school environment comes into play, which helps broaden the horizons of experiential learning for children by making them learn from their real-life experiences outside the classroom.

For example, at Gurukul Crossings, the School regularly organizes field trips and excursions which allow students to get a lot of exposure to culture, traditions, nature and so on. This helps shape their perspective on the world around them.

Gurukul The School’s “no-boredom” approach allows students to be involved in a whole host of extra-curricular activities, which keeps them excited and curious to experience and learn new things in life.

This creates a taste for the future within them that keeps them moving forward and living with joy in life. It also helps them discover their passions which allows them to confidently shape their careers at a later stage.

3. Acquire Life Skills

In keeping with UNICEF’s framework for rights-based and child-friendly education and school systems, the teachers and staff at Gurukul The School offer a child-friendly environment at school that allows every student at Gurukul to be prepared in a physically safe, mentally safe environment. emotionally, and psychologically possible. Starting with good manners, sharing, getting along well with others, and progressing to their social, emotional, cognitive and academic development.

Thus, students at Gurukul are not only prepared academically, but are better equipped to grow into responsible citizens in the future. These social skills get them ready to get through their first job interview and be effective with people and teams. They are equipped to face the challenges of everyday life.

4. Academic Strengthening

Lastly, not the most important but certainly the most significant role of the school environment is to strengthen students’ academic performance. While this includes teaching them the ABCs and 123s, that alone is not enough to tap into their full academic potential.

Getting good grades and being effective in making a great career on the basis of good academics are recognized worldwide. However, it is important that rather than being compared to other children, it is important that each child is appreciated for their individual efforts and skills.

At Gurukul, the school has carved out a positive and productive learning environment, which instills in children a problem-solving approach while strengthening them academically.

At Gurukul The School, a top-rated school in Ghaziabad, the school aims to provide young shoots with not only an enriching learning environment, but also provide them with life experiences they can cherish throughout their lives.

At Gurukul Crossings, with its unique ‘No Bags, No Bells, No Boredom’ approach , schools are allegedly able to create tremendous joy for learning in students every day and keep them motivated to broaden their learning horizons far beyond the boundaries of the classroom, even the school.

Closing

Sinaumed’s, that is the importance of having MPLS, aka the School Environment Introduction Period, as well as the school environment itself. As students, we certainly have to focus on preparing many things and expanding knowledge in various fields.

sinaumedia.com as the largest online bookstore in Indonesia, of course, also supports knowledge, especially what can be obtained through book literature. We try to present the latest and most popular books, and of course they have their own meaning in the hearts of readers.

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

You can try reading books such as “The Great National Children’s Encyclopedia Children’s Book”, “Happy School: I Love School”, and “Communication between Parents and Children” to broaden their views regarding schools and their environment. Don’t forget that acquiring new knowledge, including through MPLS, is really fun!

 

Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

ENTP is – The Science of Psychology is currently developing very rapidly. Its popularity is highlighted by various groups, from young people to adults. Knowledge related to psychology is very important in life, especially in terms of personality, education, socializing, and in work.

Besides that, there are many ways to find out someone’s personality, one of which is ENTP. Then, do you already know about ENTP? If not, then you can read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Understanding Psychology

Before going into further discussion, let’s first get to know what psychology is. Psychology is a science that studies human behavior or behavior both towards himself or individually as well as towards other people and the surrounding environment. In psychology, to understand an individual or a group can be seen and noticed from a principle and research activities specifically and specifically regarding changes in mental function and behavior or behavior.

In building good behavior or behavior an individual or group can be found in the world of education. Education is an important point in the process of changing individual or group behavior or behavior in life through education about habits, norms, beliefs, religion, language, and social institutions from generation to generation.

From the education they get, they are able to make people think which behavior is appropriate and inappropriate. In addition, from experience when humans receive education, humans are able to correct themselves against a behavior that they deem inappropriate or can motivate themselves to continue to do positive things towards behavior that they deem appropriate.

From various education studies regarding psychology, various speculations emerged regarding the definition of psychology. According to Muhibbinsyah (2010) there are various definitions of psychology, namely:

1. Psychology is a science related to mental life or commonly called the science of mental life
2. Psychology is a science related to the mind or commonly called the science of mind
3. As for psychology which is a science related to behavior or commonly called the science of behavior , and there are many other definitions depending on the point of view of the various people who define it.

From these various sciences it can be seen how the mental, thoughts, and human behavior can describe his personality.

Human personality is very diverse, so to know human personality is quite difficult. Need to do some tests to know the actual human personality.

However, the accuracy of the tests carried out is still minimal if they are not carried out properly if not carried out through the party concerned or a party who is already professional. This inaccuracy can be caused because the implementation of the test is carried out in a manipulative way.

How to Know Human Personality

Myers-Briggs Personality Test (MBTI)

As we know, there are many ways to find out someone’s personality, one way is by doing the Myers-Briggs Personality Test or commonly called the MBTI. In the MBTI, 16 types of human personality can be identified.

This test is a psychological test that is used to measure human psychological preferences in their vision of the world or their environment and in terms of making decisions. In addition, the MBTI is used to describe various fundamental differences in healthy and normal human behavior.

The Myers-Briggs Personality Test (MBTI) is based on personality types and preferences from Carl Gustav Jung as the author of Psychological Types in 1921. Then it was developed by Isabel Briggs Myers since 1940. The MBTI is designed to measure how much human intelligence is, knowing interests and talents, and a person’s personality type.

At this time, many have used the MBTI to find out the personality traits that are intended for prospective company employees or even those who are already employees. It aims to find out the position or field that fits his personality so that he can make the potential of the employee optimal.

 

In fact, there are still many people in this world who do not know the career path that suits their interests and talents. According to Isabel, The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) is one of the psychometric personality tests that has been widely used in terms of helping people to choose the right career field for themselves.

This test provides an in-depth explanation of a person’s strengths and talents so that they can choose the type of career they are interested in. The MBTI has been widely used in the field of management, such as research from Berr (2000) which looked at the relationship between employee preferences and managerial behavior and in general, starting from paying attention to the many companies that have given the MBTI test to prospective employees when they take the job entrance test to see the personality of their prospective employees. the.

Based on the results of research from MacLellan on Christin Reardon’s explanation in 2011, it is known that there are different types of personality preferences, including:

• Center of Attention Direction

Extroverts (E) have indicators, drivers or main energy within themselves, namely the environment and the outside world, both other people and objects; able to express his emotional state; and need relationships with other people.

Introvert (I) has an indicator, driving force or main energy in him that comes from within himself, the world in thought and reflection; only able to store emotional states; and need solitude.

• How to Obtain Information

Sensing (S) has indicators, collecting things with the five senses; able to see something in detail and specific; preferring to tackle a practical matter; live life for the moment and enjoy whatever is around it; like something that is real and can be measured; liking something that has a procedure; and seem materialistic

Intuition (N) has indicators, collects information by using guesses and gut feelings; see things with patterns and relationships; preferring something by imagining the possibilities imaginatively; live his life to prepare and anticipate the future; likes changes; and impressed as a fickle person and leader.

• How to Make a Decision

Thinking (T) has indicators, making decisions based on logical and objective considerations; decide something with his mind; carry out a thing on the basis of its logic; attach importance to truth and justice; see everything as an observer; strong in planning and analysis; and looks like someone who seems cold and condescending.

Feeling (F) has indicators, being able to make decisions on the basis of considerations of subjective personal values; decide everything by heart; run something with his personal beliefs; attach importance to a relationship and harmony; see something as a participant and directly involved in the situation; strong in understanding others; and his personality seems like someone who thinks unclearly and emotionally.

• Orientation to the Outside World

Judging (J) has indicators, his lifestyle must be planned and organized; a person who enjoys a predetermined condition; likes clear boundaries and categories; feel comfortable with situations that are defined or have limits; handle deadlines that have a variety of previous planning; and impressed as a person who likes to demand, stiff, anxious or tense.

Perceiving (P) has indicators, his lifestyle is flexible, spontaneous, and easily adapts himself to situations and his environment; enjoy curiosity and surprises; likes freedom in running his life; feel comfortable when in open situations; facing deadlines at the last second and in a hurry; and impressed as a person who is disorganized and irresponsible.

If the 4 tendencies of human nature are combined, it will produce 16 personality types. Based on the results of research conducted by Capraro (2002), it shows the 16 personality types in question, namely:

1. ESTJ (Extrovert, Sensing, Thinking, Judging)
2. ENTJ (Extrovert, Intuition, Thinking, Judging)
3. ESFJ (Extrovert, Sensing, Feeling, Judging)
4. ENFJ (Extrovert, Intuition, Feeling, Judging)
5. ESTP (Extrovert, Sensing, Thinking, Perceiving)
6. ENTP (Extrovert, Intuition, Thinking, Perceiving)
7. ESFP (Extrovert, Sensing, Feeling, Perceiving)
8. ENFP (Extrovert, Intuition, Feeling, Perceiving)
9. INFP (Introvert, Intuition, Feeling, Perceiving)
10. ISFP (Introvert, Sensing, Feeling, Perceiving)
11. INTP (Introvert, Intuition, Thinking, Perceiving)
12. ISTP (Introvert, Sensing, Thinking, Perceiving)
13. INFJ (Introvert, Intuition, Feeling, Judging)
14. ISFJ (Introvert, Sensing, Feeling, Judging)
15. INTJ (Introvert, Intuition, Thinking, Judging)
16. ISTJ (Introvert, Sensing, Thinking, Judging)

 

ENTP (Extrovert, Intuition, Thinking, Perceptive)

Do you know Sinaumed’s, what is ENTP? ENTP stands for Extrovert, Intuition, Thinking, Perceiving. People with the ENTP personality are alert, talented, fast, think logically, smart, driven, creative, innovative, alert, good at communicating, outspoken or spontaneous, and good at everything that happens to them.

In addition, ENTPs have a sense of appreciation for the various knowledge they gain and a strong desire to develop themselves. Therefore, there are many successful people or figures from this ENTP personality.

ENTP has disadvantages such as very little interest in something that is detailed in nature, so if ENTP has ideas it is rare to have plans and actions to make their creative ideas come true. The solution is to try to discipline himself and be consistent with something. In addition, make the best possible plan so you don’t make decisions that are risky or have bad consequences later.

ENTP is divided into 2, namely: Turbulent (ENTP-T) and Assertive (ENTP-A). (ENTP-T) will prefer something on the basis of the approval and attention of others. Meanwhile (ENTP-A) tends to give positive feedback on something. Jobs that are quite suitable for someone with the ENTP personality include: being a Lawyer, Psychologist, Consultant, Scientist, Actor, Marketing, Programmer, Photographer.

Someone with an ENTP personality or Extrovert, Intuition, Thinking, Perceiving is known as a personality called “The Visionaries” (Visionary) or “Inventor” (Penemu).

Someone with the ENTP personality is a person who has the character of being alert, talented, fast, driven, alert, and outspoken or spontaneous. With such characters, ENTPs are able to solve even complex and challenging problems. In addition, ENTPs are able to analyze things and formulate things strategically.

ENTP as Extroversion has quite extensive relationships and networks because they are good at communicating and mingling with anyone and anywhere. Intuition in ENTP means that someone with this personality prefers to prioritize things that are abstract in nature compared to things that are concrete.

Then, Thinking about someone with an ENTP personality means that they always use their mind and always choose objective decisions. As well as Perception , it is characterized by someone with an ENTP personality being able to adjust to various things and being able to open things up with other people without deciding something first.

Someone with an ENTP personality can be said to be someone who is creative and innovative. This is because ENTPs have nimble, creative, innovative traits and behaviors, think logically, are smart, and are good at everything that happens to them. His speaking style, debating skills are also very good, able to appreciate various knowledge, and has a strong desire to develop himself.

The ENTP personality is able to read other people’s behavior and likes to try new things according to their interests. However, ENTPs tend to get bored easily with their routine work. The disadvantages of the ENTP, namely being able to argue just for pleasure without feeling guilty, don’t like to be controlled, sometimes don’t like to focus, are not sensitive to a number of things, and have a less consistent personality.

Someone with the ENTP personality is less interested and likes things that are detailed in generating an idea or theory. Therefore, many people with the ENTP personality tend to come up with various ideas from their minds, without providing a plan or action in realizing the creative ideas they put forth.

Solutions that can be given to the shortcomings of someone with an ENTP personality are trying to have a sense of not wanting to win alone or not being selfish, learning to be disciplined and consistent about something, avoiding a debate that is considered unimportant, and learning to be aware of himself.

In addition, balance your perspective so that you are not too optimistic which can lead to unrealistic decisions and risks. Then try to pay more attention to other people’s feelings. For someone with the ENTP personality, it will suit several jobs, including: Lawyers, Psychologists, Consultants, Scientists, Actors, Marketing, Programmers, Photographers.

This ENTP is divided into 2, namely Turbulent (ENTP-T) and Assertive (ENTP-A). someone with personality outcomes that (ENTP-T) will prefer something on the basis of the approval and attention of others. Meanwhile (ENTP-A) tends to give positive feedback on something.

Conclusion

In conclusion, everyone has a different character or personality. It is necessary to know each individual’s personality, because it is closely related to life, both in socializing, in education, and in work.

Knowing personality is expected to determine interests and talents that are appropriate and appropriate in the world of education and work. Building a person’s character starts from how educated they are, because a person’s characteristics exist from their habits, norms, religion, beliefs, and environment. The placement of the right job position is able to maintain the quality and quantity of oneself at work, even affecting the place where one works.

In today’s highly developed era, it’s fairly easy to do a test to find out someone’s personality. The test can be done directly or indirectly or online via the internet. However, if you want to be more guaranteed the accuracy of the results, try to ask a more in-depth question about this personality to a professional psychologist.

From the discussion above it can be said that ENTP stands for Extrovert, Intuition, Thinking, Perceiving. To add to your knowledge about the science of human personality, one of which is about ENTP, you can get it by looking for it on sinaumedia.com , starting from books on psychological theory of personality, personality tests, and successful people in the world who can motivate themselves according to their personality.

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

 

Author: Nabila Frithania

Reference source

Damayanti, KA, Nawangsari, NAF (2017). The Effect of Perceptions Regarding the Learning Environment and Achievement Emotion on Achievement Goals of Students at Sman 1 Taman Siodarjo. Journal of Educational and Developmental Psychology Vol (2), 72-88.

Dardiri, YH, Supratman, and Ratnaningsih, N. (2020). Students’ Divergent Thinking Processes in Solving Mathematical Problems in View of the Personality Type of Myer Briggs. Journal of Authentic Research on Mathematics Education (JARME) (2): 2, 142-157.

Ichsan, M. (2016). Educational Psychology And Teaching Science. Journal of Education (2): 1, 60-76.

Karyati, E. (2022). Development of the MBTI Method Personality Test for Psychology Students at Gunadarma University. Technologia (13): 2, 153-159.

Nurliani. (2016). Educational Psychology Studies. Journal of As-Salam (1): 2, 39-51.

Periantalo, J., and Azwar., S. (2017). Development of the Personality Scale of High School Students from Jung and Myers-Briggs Personality Typology. Journal of Science Socio Humanities (1): 2, 191-207.

Prawitasari. (2006). Nusantara Psychology: Where Are We Going?. Psychology Bulletin (14): 1, 1-30.

Wijaya, A., Novita, and Yulita, H. (2019). MBTI Personality Types For Career Development. Journal of Service and Entrepreneurship (3): 2, 91-99.